Home

Digital Super Hybrid System

1. o ao B e 4 conductor wiring gt is required To door opener 2 To door opener 1 Notes For wiring it is recommended to use UL 1015 twisted wire or the equivalent e The wire should be between 1 2 and 2 4 mm in diameter including the coating D 1 2 2 4 mm cea e Pair the door opener with the doorphone 2 46 Installation 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Maximum distance of doorphone and door opener line The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line that connects to the main unit is as follows 120 m for 0 5 mm Doorphone KX T30865 120 m for 0 5 mm Door opener Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Programming References Section 4 System Programming 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Feature References Section 3 Features Door Opener Doorphone Call Installation 2 47 2 4 9 System Connection To connect two main units use the optional System Inter Connection Cards two and the Connection Cable included in the cards
2. Expansion in LALE i area3 Ii 8 Station Line 2 Ea Units KX a a TD170 Expansion i PaE Og eee 7A Each unit adds area2 Of l eight extensions ba eee ee i Expansion _ A E LEX T nenene iz area ela Jo iL z JE 4 CO Line Unit r J E KX TD180 Adds four CO lines a 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 Expansion Card e e Adds two ISDN Connectors ete 3 SO lines Remove the cover plates on the front cover Note System programming is required for unit location identification Refer to Section 4 3 109 Expansion Card Unit Type 2 26 Installation 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units 4 CO Line Card 2 ISDN S0 Line Card for KX TD816 CO Line Expansion Card Connector Front Cover is Open Install 4 CO Line Card KX TD182 Adds four CO lines or Install 2 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD282 Adds t
3. KX TD816 L l ji a D Doorphone 2 D l l N DOORPHONE H Dohode N Le P ama a a PEHA mam ma aiaia a m Hi bO p oHa Hon LJ o Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 6 KX T30865 KX T30865 4 conductor wiring 2 44 Installation 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection KX TD1232 x o o fl om DOORPHONE REMOTE HH H Doorphone 2 a CONNECTION Ih Doorphone 1 aj o al Fs E e D i ie oan fea H 4 conductor wiring i o t zE 2000o ogogo opon oop O poon Sens z U pene Bene Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 KX T30865 KX T30865 E Door Opener KX TD816 DOOROPENER H pe Deo openel H Door opener 1 4 conductor wiring gt To door opener 2 is required To door opener 1 Installation 2 45 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection KX TD1232 DOORQPENER H Door opener 2 F Door opener 1
4. Expansion area 3 Expansion area 2 Expansion F KX TD144 area 1 KX TD142 Expansion Unit i i Connectors Remove the front cover plate s Note System Programming is required for location identification Refer to program 109 Expansion Card Unit Type in Section 4 Default Area 1 4 CO Line Unit Areas 2 and 3 8 Station Line Unit Select E1 or E2 for the 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 This is the same for an 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 8 10 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 4 Installing the Unit The following procedures can be used to install a 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 to the main unit and then the Cell Station KX TD142 to the KX TD144 The KX TD1232 is illustrated as the main unit 1 Loosen the two screws on the cover 3 Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide plate Insert your fingers into the slits the cabinet to the left until it is secured to remove the cover plate s SS l PTH pull l a I o LL Slit 4 Loosen the outside screw and slide the Slt LATTA J cover to the right BL l Bs ral Note Any of the cover plates can be removed as required ll
5. Description Proprietary telephones are provided with the feature line access buttons listed below KX T Proprietary Telephones Buttons 7020 7050 7130 7220 7230 7235 7250 7420 7425 7431 7433 7436 AUTO ANSWER MUTE A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y A AUTO DIAL STORE v Y A Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y CO Y aD 12 W 12 H 24 24 W aD W 6 W 12 W 24 12 W 24 24 CONF Vv Vv A Y Y Y A Y Y Y Y FLASH RCL Y Y Y Y Y Function Y 10 Y 10 FWD DND Vv Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y HOLD Y Vv Vv Vv Y Y Vv Y Y Y Y Y INTERCOM Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Jog Dial Vv Vv Vv Vv Y MESSAGE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y MODE Y MONITOR vi Vv PAUSE Vv Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y PF Programmable Feature W 4 W 4 W 12 PROGRAM Y Y Y Y 4 Vv Vv Vv Y RECALL Y Y Y Y Y Y Y REDIAL Y Y Vv Vv Vv Y Y Vv Vv Y Y Y SAVE Y SELECT Y SHIFT Vv Vv Vv Vv Soft V 3 W 3 Y 3 W 3 SP PHONE Vv Vv Vv Vv Y Y Y Y Y Y TRANSFER Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y VOLUME Vv Vv Vv Vv V The button is provided on the designated telephones y The button is provided with an LED Light Emitting Diode The buttons which can be changed to function as a feature button are called flexible buttons The button is provided without an LED x Shows the number of buttons only if multiple buttons are provided Features 3 17 3 Features The functions of the listed buttons are described below AUTO ANSWER
6. o Sel 1 Re arrange telephone wires in reverse order of the plug Wiring for external ISDN SO line Wiring for internal ISDN SO line 2 32 Installation 242 CO Line Connection Optional Card 2 Insert the plug into an ISDN port on the card KX TD281 KX TD282 Ze ZZ L g Z O S go 5 Port No 4 iA a we 0S Port No 3 F EF Port No 2 OE Port No 2 ts Port No 1 O amp Port No 1 To Terminal Board or Modular To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office Jacks from the Central Office Note If connection is made using a TJF Test Jack Frame ensure the maximum cable length between the TJF and the point on entry into the CO card is less than 30 m minimum distance 0 m Installation 2 33 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card Maximum cabling distance of SO bus connection The maximum length of the extension line cord that connects the main unit and the ISDN terminal equipment TE is shown below i Under 1000 m Point to Point Point to Multipoint Expansion Point to Multipoint Under 500 m Under 50 m Da Wiring with Terminating Resistors TR The IS
7. Panasonic 2 Connect the cabinet cord to the connec tor in the main unit firmly Outside screw a 5 Secure the inside screw included to fix B12se the cabinet to the main unit 4 ji Inside screw MHL Cy Note Be sure to fix the inside screw to the main unit or the unit may not work properly PRI Section 7 5 7 2 2 Installing the Unit KX TD290 6 Prepare the required plugs 10 Cover the cords with the cord holder included 7 Insert the plug into a jack on the unit JLT P Cord holder ae RB RA 3 11 Fix the cords to the wall at the shown 2 TB position so that the front cover can be cae opened Eo Tuite LELU 5 To Terminal Board or Modular z T p Jacks from the Central Office J m f 8 Tie up all the cords into a bundle If Note If two or three expansion units are other cords are coming from the upper installed cut the cabinet covers on cabinets tie them too the lower cabinets to allow the cords from upper
8. Cmca LL Connection Cable Insert the upper end of the System Inter Connection Card into the two hooks on the main unit of the Master System Press the two corners at the lower end of the System Inter Connection Card Connect the cord to the System Inter Connection Card connector System Inter Connection Card Open the latch on the card Repeat steps through 4 for the Slave System using the other card Insert one connection cable end to the Master System and insert the other end into the Slave System Close the latches on both systems 2 48 Installation Available for KX TD1232 only 2 4 9 System Connection 8 Open the ROM Cover in the Slave System and set the Master Slave switch on the CPU card to Slave 1 o mE j REMOTE fol af f SS a m im acomson s A H g o SP on Koy 9 Turn the power on Notes System Connection is completed about one minute later after the power is turned on e To turn the power on for the first time refer to Section 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time e The master and slave must have the same version software Otherwise System Conn
9. Doorphone 1 KX T30865 Amplifier External Music Source 2 Amplifier Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit gt To AC Outlet The socket outlet shall be placed close to the equipment and shall be easily accessible Doorphone 2 KX T30865 Speaker 2 2 8 Installation 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram z Panasoni one pair SA l Single Line Telephone one pair one pair Voice Processing System TE i ae gJ Coo oN Co Q O E pee i g n Q Q n es g le i ga a o0 fas R 2 zy a e 5 o a It is recommended that extension of jack is a display proprietary GES telephone SOE KX T7400 series digital KX T7200 series digital proprietary telephones proprietary telephones two two pair one pair pair Telephone Answering Machine with Facsimile Notes Digital DSS consoles KX T7440 KX T7441 KX T7000 series analog Data Terminal proprietary telephones KX T7240 two pair two pair SiS SSeS Poy SOSe SSSs7 7ss SE SSSESS KX T7130 analog proprietary telephone KX T7040 DSS console j needs optional cards or adaptor e Parallel telephone connections are possible e The KX TD12372 is illustrated as
10. ISDN TEI Mode All Ports Point 411 Host PBX Access Codes Not Stored 412 Pause Time All CO Line Groups 3 5 s 413 Register Recall Signal Time All CO Line Groups 96 ms 414 Disconnect Time All CO Line Groups 2 0 s 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Disable 416 Reverse Circuit Assignment All CO Lines Regular 419 Subscriber Number Assignment Not Stored 420 Direct Dialling In All CO Lines Enable 421 CO Line Name Assignment Not Stored 422 ISDN Port Type All CO Lines Enable 423 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode Not Stored 424 ISDN Configuration All Ports CO 425 ISDN Data Link Mode All Ports Permanent 427 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber All Ports Permanent Number All Ports Fix 0 428 ISDN Extension Progress Tone All Ports Disable 429 Direct Dialling In Night All CO Lines Enable 437 Multiple Subscriber Number Set Not Stored 438 439 Extension Ringing Assignment All Ports All Locations Disable Day Night Day Night for ISDN MSN COS Programming S500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day All COS Level 1 Day Night Night 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration All COS Disable Limit Call Transfer to CO Line All COS Enable Call Forwarding to CO Line All COS Disable All COS Disable Account Code Entry Mode All COS Option 507 Do Not Disturb Override System Speed Dialling Day Night All C
11. Note A user supplied printer can be connected to the EIA RS 232C connector 25 pin on the main unit The printer is used to print out SMDR call records and system programming data Connect the EIA RS 232C printer connector to the EIA connector Cables must be shielded the maximum length is 2 m Lia A aD EIA Connector Serial Interface RS 232C The KX TD12372 is illustrated as a main unit Serial Printer The pin configuration of EIA RS 232C connector is as follows Pin Circuit Type No PENNAN EIA CCITT 1 FG Frame Ground AA 101 2 SD TXD Transmitted Data BA 103 3 RD RXD Received Data BB 104 4 RS RTS Request To Send CA 105 5 CS CTS Clear To Send CB 106 6 DR DSR Data Set Ready CC 107 7 SG Signal Ground AB 102 8 CD DCD Data Carrier Detect CF 109 20 ER DTR Data Terminal CD 108 2 Ready 2 22 Installation 2 3 7 Printer Connection Printer Personal Computer 25 pin Connection Chart EIA RS 232C port on EIA RS 232C port on the main unit the printer PC T Signal Pin Pin Signal a EIA Name No No Name EIA AA FG 1 1 FG AA BA SD TXD 2 gt 3 RD RXD BB BB RD RXD 3 2 SD TXD BA CB CS CTS 5 CC DR DSR 6 20 ER DTR CD AB SG 7 7 SG AB CD ER DTR 20 Pm 5 CS CTS
12. Route Plan Table 2 B1 rate calls on frequently used route over 56km Time zone and fee table 2 Leading digit table 2 01 061 02 091 03 0355 04 0577 05 0588 80 Route Plan Table 3 B rate calls over 56km Leading digit table 3 01 OxxxX 02 03 04 05 Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 8 00AM 1 20 8 00AM 1 20 eco All day 1 20 9 00AM 2 30 9 00AM 2 30 eee 1 00PM 1 70 1 00PM 1 70 eee 6 00PM 1 20 6 00PM 1 20 eee Time zone and fee table 3 Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 8 00AM 4 50 8 00AM 4 50 eco All day 1 00 9 00AM 5 00 9 00AM 5 00 eee 1 00PM 4 50 1 00PM 4 50 eee 6 00PM 1 00 6 00PM 1 00 eee 80 Exceptional table Local Call 01 0235 02 0332 80 Features 3 85 L LCR Sequence chart START Y Dial 9 or Dial 81 88 or Press CO button or Press Group CO button or Press Loop CO button INTERCOM indicator is on 3 Features Check dialled number with emergency Hit Selects CO from Automatic access dial table or BTL access code table gt CO line group table and dial
13. 3 52 Features 3 Features D Display Time and Date Description Conditions Offers the display proprietary telephone user a display of either the present time and the date or the date and the day of the week It is displayed while on hook e There are two types of display Display example 1 Day Month Time 1 Jan 12 00AM Display example 2 Day Month Year Day of the Week 1 Jan 1994 SAT The present date and time are set by system programming Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 000 Date and Time Set None Appendix Display Examples Display Contrast Adjustment Description Conditions Allows the display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast The adjusting method depends on the type of proprietary telephone PT you have For a digital PT Soft buttons and Volume button are used to sharpen the contrast to one of three levels For an analogue PT a sliding lever on the telephone CONTRAST selector is used to select one of three available levels Programming References Feature References Configuration 00ccc cc cccccccceeceesseceesecesseeceeseeseeeeesseees User Manual Initial Settings for the KX T7400 Series Initial Settings for the KX T7200 Series None Operation References Not applicable Features 3 53 D 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND Description Allows an extension use
14. The call is denied Reorder Tone is returned to the user The call is allowed 3 144 Features 3 Features T Conditions e Toll restriction checks are applied to the following 1 Account Code Entry 2 Dial Access Automatic 3 Least Cost Routing LCR 4 Line Access CO Line Group 5 Line Access Individual 6 System Speed Dialling e Emergency call numbers such as Police or Fire Department numbers should be stored in program 311 Emergency Dial Number Set so that they are excepted from toll restriction e If a stored Host PBX access code is found in the dialled number a toll restriction check starts for succeeding telephone number e Toll restriction for System Speed Dialling can be assigned in the Class of Service setting e It is programmable whether the or the user dials is to be checked or not on the Toll Restriction code This is useful to prevent unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central Offices exchange system e It is programmable to admit the press of the RECALL or FLASH RCL button during an outside call on the extensions in levels 7 and 8 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 207 First Digit Time 208 Inter Digit Time 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night
15. month day 6 In a Meeting e An extension user can select only one message at a time The selected message is displayed every time the user goes off hook Pr ogramming References Section 4 System Programming 008 Absent Messages 100 Flexible Numbering Absent message 990 System Additional Information Field 34 Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Absent Message Capability Account Code Entry Description An Account Code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR call record For incoming outside calls account codes are optional For outgoing outside calls there are three modes available to enter an account code Verified All Calls mode Verified Toll Restriction Override mode and Option mode One mode is selected for each extension on a Class of Service basis 3 2 Features 3 Features A In Verified All Calls mode the user must always enter a pre assigned account code when making any of the following calls unless it has previously been stored in memory e Call Forwarding to CO Line e Last Number Redial e Line Access e Notebook Function e One Touch Dialling e Pickup Dialling e Saved Number Redial e Station Speed Dialling e System Speed Dialling In Verified Toll Restriction Override mode the user c
16. Features 3 112 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s 3 Features P Pickup Dialling Description Conditions Allows an extension user to make an outgoing call by going off hook if the user has previously stored the telephone number This feature is also known as Hot Line e An LD telephone without the button cannot program this feature For programming the phone number replace the LD telephone with a telephone with the button temporarily e The user uses a feature number to enable or disable pickup dialling e If the feature is enabled and the user goes off hook dial tone is generated for the waiting time and then dialling starts During the waiting time the user can dial another party overriding the Pickup Dialling function e If the user answers an incoming call or retrieves a call on hold the Pickup Dialling feature does not work e If the proprietary telephone is provided with PF 12 button the stored number of PF12 button is common to the one for Pickup Dialling Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Pickup dialling 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Pickup Dialling Hot Line Power Failure Restart Description Conditions Returning on electricity the system restarts the stored data automatically Before restarting the system r
17. and the desired speed dial number the selected code is displayed 17 You can continue to program another entry 18 After you have stored all your entries finish this program by pressing END After pressing END you can go to any program address you desire You can return to the Initial Message mode any time by pressing END To go to the next lager program address do not press END but press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME v To go to the next smaller program address do not press END but press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME 19 Tells you what you should notice or consider when doing the programming 20 Lists all of the features related to the programming These features are described in Section 3 Programming Structure Program Address Programming Group Description 000 016 Manager Programming These programs may meet frequent changes requested by the customer 100 148 System Programming Entire system programming 200 215 Timer Programming Flexible system timer setting 301 311 TRS Programming Assignment of Toll Restriction 400 439 CO Line Programming Setting of CO line and CO line group values 500 519 COS Programming Setting of Class of Service COS 600 626 Extension Programming Setting of extension values 7000 7824 LCR Programming Assignment of Least Cost Routing 800 814 Resource Programming
18. ccccccccccccccccsessssssccccceccsesssssscccccsecuseesssseseess 3 119 Remote Station Lock Control 0 0 ceecceeseeeeeseeeesececseeeeesteeeeseeeenaees 3 120 Reverse Circuit an oeta a E a e 3 120 Rinsing Delayed in Eer r t E D E E ES 3 121 Ringing Discriminating esesssseeesseesseessesssereessetssresseesserssseeesseessresse 3 121 Ring Gto P eiin a eed a a n a eai 3 122 Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons sseseseeseeeeeeresseeerererrese 3 123 0 Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls sseeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeererereeee 3 123 0 Saved Number Redial Redial Saved Number cccccceees 3 119 Screened Call Transfer to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to CO Line sssssessseeesssesseesseessee 3 32 Screened Call Transfer to Extension Call Transfer Screened to Extension esssseesssesseessessee 3 32 Secret Diall inSain Fo celh es uacsasannegeines E N S E 3 123 1 Single CO S CO Button Button Single CO S CO 3 16 Special Display Features erescsccaseduattedescsersacesgcesy Nees caaeacsonds seeastaes dans taeds 3 124 Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb eee cee ceceeeeeeceseeeeeeseecaecnaecnecnaeenees 3 124 CO Outgoing Call Lor cae crises ae aia E a ae eae 3 125 Extension Dialling insna arn n EE E EEE leu E E R E e 3 125 Station Speed Dialling oo ee eeo rn EE E EEE EEEE ES 3 126 0 System Feature Access Menu ee ceceeeesceseeeneeeecaeesaecaeceaecneceseeeeeseeeeeeeeees
19. Programming References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Unit Type Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 020 PS Flexible CO Button Assignment 650 PS Registration 651 PS Termination 653 PS Extension Name Set 654 SXDP Assignment 655 PS Budget Management 656 PS Charge Verification Assignment 657 PS Class of Service 658 PS Extension Group Assignment 659 660 PS DIL 1 N Extension Day Night 661 662 PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night 663 664 PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night 665 PS Voice Mail Access Codes 667 PS Extension Connection Assignment 668 PS Data Line Security 670 ISDN DDI Number PS Extension Number Transformation 671 PS Extension Number Set 672 PS Password Set 673 PS CLIP COLP Number Assignment 674 675 PS Extension Intercept Routing Day Night 676 PS Incoming Call Display 677 681 PS Itemized Code Set PS Radio System ID Set Operation References DECT Portable Station Features User Manual 8 28 DECT Portable Station Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features PS Feature Conditions Most of the features described in Section 3 are supported by a system with a DECT Portable Station PS However the following features are not supported Background Music BGM Executive Busy Override CO Line EXtra Device Port XDP Handsfree Operatio
20. 3 Features Station Feature Clear S Description Allows the extension user to cancel the functions set on the user s own telephone The following functions will be cancelled by this feature Conditions None Programming References Absent Message Capability The message set on the telephone Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Background Music that has been turned on Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting enabled Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR CO Incoming Call Information Log Over stored mode Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Do Not Disturb DND Log Out status Message Waiting All the messages that have been left by other extension users Parallelled Telephone enabled Paging Deny Pickup Dialling Timed Reminder Section 4 System Programming 100 Feature References None Flexible Numbering Station feature clear Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Station Feature Clear Features 3 127 S Station Hunting Description Conditions 3 Features If a call reaches a floating number of a hunting group Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the hunting group There are a maximum of 32 hunting groups Idle extensions are automatically hunted according to the programmed type There are six hunting types available Circular UCD Uniform Call Distribution Voice Mail VM A
21. Feature References Section 3 Features Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN 7 2 PRI Section 7 2 Installation 7 2 1 Location of the Optional Units Precautions KX TD816 To protect the printed circuit boards P boards from static electricity do not touch parts on the P boards in the main unit and on the optional units One 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 and either one CO Line ISDN Line Unit KX TD180 KX TD280 or KX TD290 can be installed to any expansion area You must use the KX TD170 when you install the KX TD290 The former KX TD170 does not work properly with the KX TD290 Please see the back of the unit and check is marked Panasonic MODEL NO KX TD170 8 Station Line Unit Area2 Areal KX TD170 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 I 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 S Unit Connectors Notes 1 PRI ISDN Line Unit KX TD290 Ge a a I A ee eo be Remove the cover plate s on the front cover e When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data Clear the application for location will use practical installation instead of the system default setting e System P
22. KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 all CO lines e Enabl enable Disab disable All PSs all CO lines Enable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 661 for day or 662 for night Display example PS CO Out Day 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 CO01 Enabl 4 Enter the CO line number You can also keep pressing m gt or lt until the desired CO line number is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END 8 54 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 661 662 PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night contd Conditions Feature References e To assign all PSs or all CO lines to one selection press the key in step 3 or 4 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line 01 or the PS which has the lowest PS registration number e To not assign a CO line for a PS press CLEAR in step 4 e When you change the PS registration number by press
23. Route Plan Table 2 B1 rate calls on frequently used route over 56km Leading digit table 2 O1 061 02 091 03 0355 04 0577 05 0588 80 Time zone and fee table 2 Route Plan Table 3 B rate calls over 56km Leading digit table 3 01 0X 02 03 04 05 80 Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 8 00AM 1 50 8 00AM 1 50 eco All day 1 00 9 00AM 2 00 9 00AM 2 00 eee 1 00PM 1 50 1 00PM 1 50 eee 6 00PM 1 00 6 00PM 1 00 eee Time zone and fee table 3 Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 8 00AM 3 50 8 00AM 3 50 ecco All day 2 00 9 00AM 5 00 9 00AM 5 00 eee 1 00PM 3 50 1 00PM 3 50 eee 6 00PM 2 00 6 00PM 2 00 eee Exceptional table Local Call 3 84 Features 3 Features 2 Carrier Table for SPLASH TELECOM Line Route Plan Table 1 A rate calls up to 56km Leading digit table 1 Time zone and fee table 1 L Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 8 00AM 0 50 8 00AM 0 50 eee All day 0 40 9 00AM 1 00 9 00AM 1 00 eee 1 00PM 0 50 1 00PM 0 50 eee 6 00PM 0 40 6 00PM 0 40 eee 01 021 02 0333 03 0444 04 0555 05 0666 80
24. 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 7 gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 DDI 4 Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed and enter the number if required To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Section 3 Features Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP System Programming 4 142 5 624 4 8 Extension Programming CLIP COLP Number for ISDN Extension Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Selects the type of additional number to the CLIP and COLP information when making and answering a call through an ISDN line You can select the type from one of the following DDI Subscriber number DDI number None Subscriber number Optional number e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 e Types DDI Any number 1 through 6 digits All jacks DDI 1 Enter 624 Display ISDN CLIP COLP 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO
25. Call Directory Description Conditions PS users can store names and or phone numbers in the directory A stored number is dialled out by selecting a name or phone num ber in the directory There are four types of directory features including one PS directo ry and three PBX directories as follows PS Dialling Directory PS users can make an outside call by selecting privately assigned names and phone numbers 100 max PBX System Speed Dialling Directory PS users can make a call via the system by selecting system assigned names and phone numbers 500 max PBX Extension Dialling Directory PS users can make a call via the system by selecting system assigned extension names PBX Station Speed Dialling Directory PS users can make a call via the system by selecting privately assigned names and phone numbers 10 max e It is possible to lock the PS Dialling Directory contents Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set DECT Portable Station Features cccccceeeees User Manual PS Programming Controlling the Directory Lock None DECT Portable Station Features Call Directory DECT Portable Station Section 8 33 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features Ps Programming Description
26. Display PRI Reference CO 2 Press NEXT Display CO NO gt 3 Enter the CO Line number of PRI Display example C025 CO 9 4 Enter the desired CO Line number 5 Press STORE 6 Press END PRI Section 7 9 45 7 3 PRI System Programming PRI Reference CO conta Conditions e For the KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master system and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e CO09 through CO16 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD816 and CO25 through CO54 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD1232 e To assign all CO lines to the same selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO09 for the KX TD816 and CO25 for the KX TD1232 Feature References None 7 10 PRI Section Section 8 DECT Portable Station Section This section provides information on the wireless system which can be optionally equipped with the basic system 8 1 Overview To connect the wireless system the following equipment is required 2 RF Interface Unit with 4 Station Line KX TD144 One KX TD144 supports up to two Cell Stations KX TD142 and four wired extensions One KX TD144 can be installed to the KX TD816 and up to two KX TD144s can be installed to the KX TD1232 CS Cell Station KX TD142 This unit determines the range of the supporting PSs Up to four calls can be ma
27. Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 System Programming 4 142 1 619 4 8 Extension Programming ISDN DDI Number ISDN Extension Number Transformation contd e For CLIP COLP or DDI features to convert the incoming number to an extension or a number assigned in this program depends on the program 990 System Additional Information Field 37 Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Direct Dialling In DDI 4 142 2 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 620 621 Extension Intercept Routing Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the Intercept Routing destination of for each jack in both day and night modes e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no Intercept Routing All jacks Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 620 for day or 621 for night Display example EXT Intercep Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter t
28. These programs assign the extensions which will ring when a doorphone call is received during the day and night modes Programmed extensions are also allowed to open the door e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 x all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Doorphone number KX TD816 1 and 2 two entries max KX TD1232 1 through 4 four entries max Jack 01 1 All doorphones Other jacks no doorphone Day Night 1 Enter a program address 607 for day or 608 for night Display example Doorphone in Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 1234 4 Enter the doorphone numbers To assign no doorphone press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new doorphone numbers 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available System Programming 4 133 607 608 4 8 Extension Programming Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night conta Feature References e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rota
29. 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part all jacks e Enable Disable All jacks Enable 1 Enter 654 Display SXDP Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter the jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the jack 01 Section 3 Features Super EXtra Device Port SXDP DECT Portable Station Section 8 47 655 8 4 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References DECT PS System Programming PS Budget Management Assigns the charge limit for a call on a PS basis e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e Charge limit Charge 0 through 99999999 All PSs 0 1 Enter 655 Display PS Charge Limit 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration num
30. 120 User Password 1234 121 Pulse Dial Reception Assignment Puls Enable 122 Automatic Door Open Assignment Disable 123 Hotel Application Disable 125 Assignment of Denomination 126 Voice Mail Number Assignment All jacks Blank Not Stored 127 Voice Mail Extension Number VM 01 265 VM 02 266 VM 03 267 Assignment VM 04 268 VM 05 269 VM 06 270 VM 07 277 VM 08 278 VM 09 281 VM 10 282 VM 11 283 VM 12 284 VM 13 271 VM 14 272 VM 15 273 VM 16 274 VM 17 275 VM 18 276 VM 19 279 VM 20 280 VM 21 285 VM 22 286 VM 23 287 VM 24 288 128 Voice Mail Extension Group All voice mail numbers VMG 1 Assignment 129 Operator Queue Queue 8 H UP 4 130 Phantom Extension Number Not Stored Assignment Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital List 5 5 Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 131 Hunting Group Assignment All Hunting Groups Disable 132 Hunting Group Name Assignment Not Stored 133 Hunting Overflow All Hunting Groups Busy 0 All Hunting Groups Disable Day Night 134 135 Hunting Intercept Day Night 136 ISDN DDI Number Phantom Blank Not Stored Extension Number Transformation 148 Off Hook Monitor En
31. 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card 8 CO Line Connection with KX TD181 4 CO Line Connection with KX TD182 Use 4 pin plugs included to connect CO lines There are two plugs to connect four CO lines for KX TD816 and four plugs to connect eight CO lines for KX TD1232 A single plug is able to connect two CO lines Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 2 Connection before connection 1 Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Note Do not strip the wires Insert the wires all the way into the plug 4 pin plug E 2 Insert the plug A into a CO jack B on the card KX TD181 Jacks for Power Failure Transfer CO7 C08 CO 5 CO 6 i CO 3 CO 4 fr CO1 CO2 View of Connector Bees acces ym To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office 2 30 Installation 242 CO Line Connection Optional Card KX TD182 Jacks for Power Failure Transfer CO 3 CO 4 CO 1 CO2 View of Connector To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office For details refer to Section 2 5
32. 8 a m Mon Fri 6 a m Fri 8 p m Mon 0 75 1 50 3 50 0 50 1 00 see 2 00 LCR Programming consists of the following items Common Tables 1 LCR Mode Program 7000 This program is used to turn on or off the LCR mode If turned off calls are sent to CO lines selected according to the Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment table Program 103 If turned on calls are sent to appropriate lines according to LCR programming tables Default Disable If LCR mode is turned on the user dialled number is compared with the following tables 2 BTL Access Code Set Program 7002 This program is used to store the British Telecom Line BTL Access Code Default 121 If the system finds out the same number as the user dialled number in this table the call is sent to the CO lines selected from the Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment table Program 103 3 Emergency Dial Number Set Program 311 This is used to store emergency dial numbers The dial numbers defined in this table are not applied to LCR and Toll Restriction If the system finds out the same number as the user dialled number in this table the call is sent to the CO lines selected from the Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment table Program 103 Emergency dial table Entry Dial 1 999 2 112 10 Features 3 79 Note The X and Y in the following program addres
33. All Calls What is the account code mode Verified Toll Restriction Override No a s the entered code identified with the stored codes Yes Yes y 3 Is the entered code identified at Is the TRS level Level 1 with the stored code No Yes No y TRS level changes to Level 2 y The call is not allowed gt Toll Restriction check starts Reorder tone is returned to the user 3 146 Features 3 Features T Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Account code entry 508 Account Code Entry Mode Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Station Programming Charge Fee Reference DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Toll Restriction Override Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialling Description Conditions Calls originated by System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the extension s toll restriction level for System Speed Dialling Same as the conditions of Toll Restriction feature except that the data for System Speed Dialling are used as the toll restriction levels Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set 100 Flexible Numbering System speed dialling 509 510 Toll Restriction Le
34. Clearing the Settings in Memory Cancelling the PS Registration Setting the Guidance Menu Setting the PS Programming Password Nie oN ol oIN Iojlojojl ojlololo Only displayed when registered to a Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System and Y is displayed If only one DECT system is connected the Selecting the DECT Setting the System Lock System display will not appear e If your PS is not registered the Selecting the DECT System and Cancelling the PS Registration displays will not appear Programming References Section 8 4 System Programming 650 PS Registration Feature References DECT Portable Station Features 0 cccccecececeeee User Manual PS Programming None Operation References None DECT Portable Station Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features Super EXtra Device Port SXDP Description The Super EXtra Device Port SXDP allows a proprietary portable station PS to be used in parallel with a proprietary wired PT or single line telephone SLT When in the SXDP mode your PS can make or receive calls as usual but can also receive calls reaching the paired telephone Conditions e This feature can only be set from a PS The wired telephone can enable or disable this feature in program 654 SXDP Assignment default enable e When the paralleled wired telephone receives a call both the wired tele phone and PS wi
35. Conditions e With a single line telephone the user can hold only one call whether it is an extension or outside call e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results e If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold 200 Hold Recall Time Feature References Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Hold Call Hold Intercom Description This is used to place an intercom call on hold The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension Conditions e Only one intercom call can be placed on hold in a telephone at a time up to 10 calls in the system Call Park With a proprietary telephone outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time With a single line telephone either one outside or intercom call can be held 3 24 Features 3 Features C e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming
36. None DPT Features Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail Uniform Call Distribution UCD Description Allows an incoming calls CO line extension to be distributed uniformly to a specific group of extensions called UCD group Calls to an UCD group hunt for an idle station in circular way starting at the extension following the last one called This UCD feature is particularly helpful when certain extension receives a high volume of calls compared with other extensions Log In Log Out feature is available for UCD f Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Features 3 149 Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 U 3 Features An outline sketch of UCD is shown below 1 When a number of calls have been 2 When the Ist call arrives at extension A arrived at an UCD group the Ist call the 2nd call arrives at extension B arrives at extension A first QO lt 3rd call in queue Calls have arrived at an UCD group QO 2nd call in queue 3rd call in queue O UCD group 2nd call in queue O Extension B Ist call in queue gt l q O When extension B is busy or UCD log out has been set to extension B the call arrives at extension C UCD group gt Extension A When extension A is busy or UCD log out has been set
37. PS users can change the default settings of PS Programming according to their needs There are two passwords a PS Programming password and System Lock password to enter into the programming mode The PS Programming password is programmed in PS Programming and the System Lock password is programmed in the initial PS registra tion or in PS Programming The displayed PS programming menu differs depending on the password level as follows Level 0 A password is not required Level 1 A PS Programming password is required Level 2 A System Lock password is required The combination of the passwords are as follows System Lock Disable Disable Enable Enable PS Programming Disable Enable Disable Enable System Lock Password PS Programming Password No Password or Incorrect Password 8 34 DECT Portable Station Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features Conditions The programming items and their password levels are as follows Password level Programming Item 0 Setting the Keypad Backlight Mode Setting the Key Tone Selecting the Ringer Pattern Selecting the Vibration and Ring Type Selecting the Display Language Controlling the Directory Lock Setting the Quick Answering Mode Setting the Automatic Answering Mode Selecting the Automatic Answer Delay Selecting the DECT System Selecting the Standby Display Selecting the Date Time Display
38. Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Power Failure Restart Operation References Not applicable 3 114 Features 3 Features P Predial Description Conditions Allows the display proprietary telephone user to check and correct the dialled number in on hook state before going off hook When going off hook making a call is initiated e This feature is available during stand by state only e A line access number is always required to make an outgoing outside call e Making a call is performed at the time the handset is lifted up or the CO or SP PHONE button is pressed Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Private Call Description Conditions No programming required None DPT Features Predial Preparation Allows the user to exclude private calls from the SMDR printout When making a private call if the user enters the pre set account code the dialled number is not included in the SMDR printout e It is required to program the account code for private calls in program 105 Account Code The location 01 of the entries is used as the account code for this feature e To prevent private calls clear the entry above Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 105 Account Codes Station Programming 0 cccccceecceeeeneeeneeeteeeteeeeees User Manual Chang
39. SHIFT SHIFT amp Soft Combination S1 S1 SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT SHIFT S2 S3 SHIFT S1 SHIFT S2 7 EEE oo 5 lu loa jal jo Sl AlWIZIS QlO gt oje TSK SOS A SOON S KI lt ALO CR mial Rotating Jog Dial Pulses oJen OD S Z Combination Table 1 a o B e a a o lo 5 la a js ka n SiH VZ 4 Q O gt oje x e hols wi slo ola la KI lt IAIOIMH DIAl mln N SlalolZziajalojAjr NZ XICIOIZIA E mw w BE A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 0 x x Combination Table 2 Note e The alphabetical characters correspond to the letters shown on the twelve dialing keys on the proprietary telephone except symbols e In Combination Table 1 If your telephone is a KX T7431 do not use the provided SELECT button Use the AUTO ANSWER MUTE button which becomes the SELECT button when using the overlay e In Combination Table 2 If you keep rotating the Jog Dial all of the characters in the table will be displayed System Programming 4 9 4 1 3 Entering Characters Please see the following example which shows how to select a desired character For example to select the letter M Select either of the following three methods 1 Using the SHIFT and Soft buttons for KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T743
40. Telephone number 9 Terminate None Loop CO None Group CO 1 through 8 CO line group number f Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 Default All PSs CO buttons 1 through 3 Single CO 01 through 03 Programming 1 Enter 020 Display PS Flexible Key 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt DECT Portable Station Section 8 39 020 8 4 DECT PS System Programming PS Flexible CO Button Assignment contd 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display PT PGM Mode 4 Press the CO button to be changed The display shows the button pre assignment Display example CO O1 5 Enter the button code plus parameter if required To change the parameter press CLEAR and enter the new parameter 6 Press STORE 7 To program another CO button for the same PS repeat steps 4 through 6 To program another PS press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END Cancelling 1 Perform the same procedures as steps 1 through 4 above 2 Enter 2 3 Press STORE 4 Press END Feature References Section 3 Features Button Flexible 8 40 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 650
41. The corresponding CO button does not exist on the Program the CO button See Section 4 2 005 Flexible CO proprietary telephone Button Assignment 6 1 4 Using Reset Button If the system does not operate properly use the Reset Button If Master and Slave Systems are in operation by System Connection reset both systems Before using the Reset Button try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not Notes a When the System Clear Switch is set to NORMAL pressing the Reset Button causes the following 1 Camp on is cleared 2 Calls on Hold are terminated 3 Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated 4 Calls in progress are terminated 5 Call Park is cleared Other data stored in memory except the above are not cleared b When the System Clear Switch is set to the CLEAR position you must press the Reset Button with caution because all data stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation pressing the Reset Button and setting the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing Available for KX TD1232 only Troubleshooting 6 5 6 1 Troubleshooting Operation A If the system does not operate properly 1 Make sure that the System Clear Switch is set to the NORMAL position 2 Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool B If the system still does not operate properly 1
42. With the eXtra Device Port XDP connection a digital proprietary telephone and a single line telephone can be connected to the same extension jack and have different extension numbers System programming is required A single line telephone and a digital proprietary telephone are connected to the main unit by 2 conductor and 4 conductor wiring cords 2 conductor wiring cord Connect pins A and B Master Master socket socket Single Line Telephone The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Section 2 3 3 Paralleled Telephone Connection Method 2 for Digital Proprietary Telephone only is also available for XDP connection Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 600 EXtra Device Port Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP Installation 2 17 2 3 5 External Pager Connection KX TD816 A maximum of two user supplied external pagers can be connected per system You can program the external pager that will send background music and determine whether both pagers will generate a confirmation tone Use an RCA connector and shielded cable To adjust the sound level of the pagers use the volume control on the amplifiers e Output impedance 600 Q Paging Jack 2 Paging Jack 1 Speaker Ampl
43. basis In the case of proprietary telephones PT however when the Prime Line Preference Incoming function has been set this line takes precedence e Incoming TAFAS calls can be identified by ringing signals sent out from external pagers The ringing pattern is the same as the outside calls Features 3 121 K 3 Features e The digital PT user can select a desired tone frequency for each CO button Programming References Feature References Operation References Ring Group Description Conditions No programming required Section 3 Features Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Not applicable All extensions in a ring group ring simultaneously by dialling the floating number of the extension group A ring group can be a Station Hunting type e Types of calls whose destination can be the ring group are Outside calls DIL1 1 DDI IRNA Hunting Group Overflow Intercom calls Extension Transfer e The floating number of the hunting group is used for all other hunting types Circular Voice Mail VM Automated Attendant AA Uniform Call Distribution UCD and No Ring Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type 602 Extension Group Assignment 813 Floating Number Assignment Section 3 Features Floating Station Station Hunting Not applicable 3 122 Features 3 Features R Ringing Tone Selectio
44. change the allocation of the Cell Station and repeat the site sur vey to select the best location e When a slot is synchronised in step 2 SYNC is displayed the other slots in the same channel show OTHER e Please do not use several PSs for the test simultaneously This may cause interference problems so that the test may not executed properly 8 24 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 5 Site Survey Referring to the recorded Radio Signal Test result 1 Set the PS Power Switch to ON while pressing C Talk Ce Flash and at the same time 2 Press CD RESULT OF SCAN LOG NO 0 9 3 Enter the desired log number Example 0 through 9 RESULT OF SCAN LOG NO 0 9 0 4 Press Talk Example e The results of channel 0 and slot 0 will be displayed CHO SLOT 00 SYNC L 12 0000 0100 To go to another slot scroll by press ing Next or Previous To go to another channel enter the channel number 0 through 9 DECT Portable Station Section 8 25 8 2 5 Site Survey After the Site Survey After obtaining the proper measurement results the following pro cedures are required before mounting the Cell Station to the wall 1 Disconnect the AC adaptor 2 Switch the Radio Signal Test Switch of the Cell Station from ON to OFF Radio Signal Test Switch ON a OFF 3 Connect the cable from the 2 RF Interface Unit with the 4 Station Line to the Cel
45. in order to use the extension number Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features Digital Wireless Connection 8 62 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 672 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References PS Password Set Assigns a registration password which is used for registration program 650 PS Registration to each PS e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e PS password 4 digits All PSs 1234 1 Enter 672 Display PS Password Set 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 1234 4 Enter the PS password Display example PS01 5678 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END If you modify the PS password re register the PS to the system in order to use the password None DECT Portable Station Section 8 63 673 8 4 DECT PS System Programming PS CLIP COLP Number Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Selects the type of additional number to the CLIP and COLP information when making and answering a call through an ISDN line You can select the type from o
46. lt I gt 1022220 0 45 NA lt Private gt 00 3 10 09876 5 6 7 8 9 10 4 Example of SMDR printout format Explanation 1 Date shows the date of the call as Day Month Year 2 Time shows the end time of a call as Hours Minutes AM or PM 3 Ext shows the extension number floating number etc that engaged in a call 4 CO shows the CO line number used for the call 5 Dial Number Outgoing call shows the other party s telephone number maximum 20 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 X P Gf PAUSE button is pressed or the mark if a host PBX access code is entered Features 3 129 Conditions 3 Features Received call shows lt I gt that indicates Incoming If the call is carried by an ISDN network also shows the name or telephone number of the calling party Private call shows lt Private gt 6 ANS shows the ring duration of the incoming call in Minutes Seconds 7 Duration shows the duration of the call in Hours Minutes Seconds 8 Cost shows the amount of charged fee Pulse or Pounds 9 Acc Account Code shows the account code appended to the call 10 CD Condition Code shows call handling type with the following codes TR Transfer FW Call Forwarding to CO Line RM Remote access to a modem RC Received an incoming call AN Answered an incoming call NA Unanswered an incoming call e Connect a printer provided with an EIA RS 232C inte
47. 2 Connect the cabinet cord of the 2 RF Outside screw Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 to the connector in the main unit firmly 5 Secure the inside screw included to fix the cabinet to the main unit P ii I z l l o ta Inside screw ers A a Au a o p E g i n if Note Be sure to fix the inside screw to the main unit or the unit may not work properly DECT Portable Station Section 8 11 8 2 4 Installing the Unit 6 Wireless Extension Connection Use a Cell Station Cord 4 conductor wiring included and 4 pin plug included to connect the cell station line There are 2 plugs to connect the Cell Stations Maximum length of the cable AWG 24 0 6 mm Under 1 km 3300 feet 6 1 Insert the wires of the 4 conductor wiring cord into the holes in the plug to connect pins D1 D2 V1 and V2 D1 Datal V1 Voltage D2 Data2 V2 Voltage Press the transparent part into the black part Insert the other end of the wires into the modular plug Note Do not peel off the wire coating Insert the wires all the way 4 pin plug Modular plug ee Y 6 2 Insert the 4 pin plug into a cell station jack on the unit and attach the ferrite core included
48. 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 or 03 you can also press NEXT Display example 03 DDI 4 Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed and enter the number if required To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available Section 3 Features Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 4 142 6 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 625 626 Doorphone Call Forwarding Day Night Description Assigns the phone number where doorphone calls are forwarded This feature is one of an ISDN service Selection e Doorphone number KX TD816 1 or 2 KX TD1232 1 through 4 e Line access code 9 or 81 through 88 e Phone number 16 digits max Disable not forwarded Default All jacks Disable Programming 1 Enter a program address 625 for day or 626 for night Display example D phone FWD Day 2 Press NEXT Display D phone NO 3 Enter a doorphone number Display example 1 Disable 4 Enter the line access code and a phone number To assign no forwarding press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program the other doorphone press NEXT 7 Repeat steps 4
49. 3 Features V Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to change the following as desired Handset receiver volume Headset volume Ringer volume Speaker volume Conditions The control method depends on the telephone type e With a KX T7400 series digital proprietary telephone rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction to select the desired volume level With a KX T7200 series digital proprietary telephone press the volume control button VOLUME a v UP DOWN to select the desired volume level However the ringer volume of KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7220 and KX T7250 is selected with Ringer Volume Selector OFF LOW HIGH With other proprietary telephones slide the following levers located on the left side of the telephone Volume Control MIN MAX Handset Headset Volume Selector NORMAL MID HIGH Ringer Volume Selector OFF LOW HIGH Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Configuration User Manual Initial Settings for the KX T7400 Series Initial Settings for the KX T7200 Series Features 3 159 3 Features Whisper OHCA Description When attempting to call a busy extension Whisper OHCA allows the extension user to notify the busy party through the handset which will only be heard by the party Only KX T7400 series telephone users can send or receive the Whisper OHC
50. 5 Press gt 6 Enter a COS number for secondary number To change the current entry enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END e There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services Every ISDN extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming of programs 500 through 519 and 991 The restriction of program 991 field 1 applies only for analogue outside lines Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available To assign all ports to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port Section 3 Features Class of Service COS ISDN Extension 4 138 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 615 616 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an ISDN extension in both day and night modes The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned CO lines e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 x all ports KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 all ports e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x
51. 509 510 Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling Day Night 990 System Additional Information Field 14 Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Override by Toll Restriction Override for Account Code Entry System Speed Dialling Operation References Not applicable Features 3 145 T 3 Features Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Description Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call from a toll restricted telephone The user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialling the telephone number Conditions e The toll restriction level of the user is changed to level 2 by this feature Thus this can be used by extension users assigned a toll restriction level from 3 through 8 The levels 1 and 2 are not changed e A Class of Service which is assigned Account Code Entry Verified Toll Restriction Override permits the class members to override their toll restrictions e Up to 40 account codes can be programmed for Verified Account code operation These are used for Toll Restriction Override e If the user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account code an ordinary toll restriction check is done Flow Chart of TRS Override by Account Code Entry TRS Override by Account Code Entry is attempted Option i Verified
52. 990 System Additional Information Field 69 Feature References Section 3 Features Busy Station Signaling BSS Off Hook Call Announcement Call Waiting OHCA Operation References DPT Features User Manual Off Hook Call Announcement Whisper OHCA OHCA 3 160 Features Section 4 System Programming This section provides step by step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone 4 1 General Programming Instructions Default Setting This system has a default factory setting If any of the programming needs to be changed you will find the necessary information in Section 3 Features This makes the system very simple to install and customize as required by the customer Any required changes can be written in Programming Tables Required Telephone Set One of the following telephone sets is required for System Programming e Digital Proprietary Telephone DPT KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 e Analog Proprietary Telephone APT KX T7130 Extensions Used for Programming Connect one of the above mentioned telephone sets to either of the following e Jack number 1 e Jack programmed as a manager extension To assign the manager extension see Section 4 2 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Night User Programming Manager Programming Manager programming items are allowed for any display proprietary telephone user in the system See Section 4 1 4 User Prog
53. A to matic Configuration acs etitiud gateniciven unedanepiensespansnenevargecincoaeoss 3 6 Automatic Overflow and Hurry Up Transfer sscseccssceeeenteees 3 7 Automatic Redial Redial Automatc ccccccccesesesesessseresenereees 3 118 PONTO AIS Station Releases a 3 8 B Background Musie BGM Jessea na n 3 8 Background Music BGM External ssseesseesseeseesssersssrerssressresse 3 9 Budget Managemefit osaicc nni na 3 10 Busy Lamp Fae a icsiscaessssintcacitecacicateceydataterlnsceasseedguatedadaasnvvatensentecculens 3 10 Busy Station Signalling BSS jeiseisicientsierpenitasiceietieedidetaeeaniess 3 11 Button Direct Station Selection DSS oo cccecsesecececeseesssteceeeeees 3 12 Buttons Flexible ct tae A ce te ott 3 12 B tton Group CO GCO eee enst seeneniit Eiaa 3 14 B tton Loop CO L CO Jerico a i 3 15 Button Single CO SCO asirese i 3 16 Buttons on Proprietary Mele phones cssem iconic 3 17 C CALL FORWARDING FEATURES SUMMARY o e 3 19 Call Forwarding AN Calls oc cescecsicrexy lanastladaedercecansscaestavnniouisededsetest 3 19 Call F rwarding BOS icenen seta ceeldbeanestenmiacaee 3 20 Call Forwarding Busy No ANnSWet scc ccccccscesccseetscnsitesesasseevisecsnneees 3 21 Call Forwarding Follow Me aia 2isiscocpecettoieatcnstivene tial peeaiawevteeealeeeds 3 21 Call Forwarding No ASW Ol eiaxscccseds recs sed esasceretlededenseneet id unedeaidetentoeds 3 22 Call Forwarding to CO Line sens e
54. According to the service hours and charges offered by your carriers enter the starting time of each zone Selection e Program address 7X1Y X 1 8 carrier number Y 1 8 table number e Day of the week selection number 1 through 7 1 Sunday 5 Thursday 2 Monday 6 Friday 3 Tuesday 7 Saturday 4 Wednesday e Time schedule 1 4 e Starting time 01 12 hours 00 59 minutes A a m P p m e Fee 00 99 pounds 00 99 pence Default Not stored Programming 1 Enter a program address 7X1Y Display Time amp Fee C1 1 2 Press NEXT Display Week NO gt 3 Enter a day of the week selection number To program Monday you can also press NEXT Display example mol 12 00A 10 10 To program another time schedule of the day keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 4 Enter the starting time hours and minutes moving the cursor with gt or lt buttons To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 5 Press to select AM PM 6 Press SELECT for AM or PM System Programming 4 149 7X1Y 4 9 LCR Programming LCR Time and Fee Set for Plans 1 through 8 conta 7 Press m gt to enter the fee 8 Enter the fee pounds and pence moving the cursor with gt and lt buttons To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new fee 9 Press STORE 10 To progra
55. Assignment of customer supplied peripherals connected to the system 990 991 Option Programming Used to answer the user s requirements or troubles if needed 4 14 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 000 Date and Time Set NOTICE It is assumed that you have read Section 4 1 General Programming Instructions The use of the soft buttons is discussed in the section therefore we will not make any reference to them in the following instructions At any time the soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay keys Description Selection Default Programming Sets the current date and time e Day 1 through 31 e Month Jan through Dec e Year 00 through 99 e Day of the week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 e AM PM 1 Jan 94 SAT 12 00 AM 1 Enter 000 Display Day Time Set 2 Press NEXT Display example 1 Jan 94 SAT 3 Enter the day To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new day 4 Press gt 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed 6 Press gt 7 Enter the year To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new year 8 Press gt 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed System Programming 4 15 000 4 2 Manager Programming Date and Time Set contd Conditions Feature References 10
56. Conditions Feature Reference Assigns whether the door is automatically unlocked or not when the Call button is pressed e KX TD816 D1 Day D1 Night D2 Day D2 Night KX TD1232 D1 Day D1 Night D2 Day D2 Night D3 Day D3 Night D4 Day D4 Night D1 Doorphone 1 D2 Doorphone 2 D3 Doorphone 3 D4 Doorphone 4 e Enable Disable All selections Disable 1 Enter 122 Display Auto Door Open 2 Press NEXT to program D1 Day To program another status keep pressing NEXT until the desired one is displayed Display example D1l Day Disable 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 To program another selection press NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 7 Press END This programming is applied to the doorphone which provides the door opener Section 3 Features Door Opener 4 62 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 123 Hotel Application Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Assigns whether the hotel application is enabled or disabled Disable Enable Disable 1 4 5 Enter 123 Display Hotel Apply Asn Press NEXT Display example Hotel Disable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END If Enable is selected the menu
57. Enter the carrier code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new code 4 Press STORE 5 Press END There is a maximum of 8 carrier codes Each code has a maximum of 10 digits consisting of 0 through 9 Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR System Programming 4 153 7X22 4 9 LCR Programming LCR Carrier Modify Command Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns modification commands applied to carrier numbers Dialled numbers are modified according to the programmed commands Available commands are as follows Insert carrier code Send pause Change to tone DTMF mode Insert Authorization code Insert Itemized code Home Position maT Pea voa e Program address 7X22 X 1 8 carrier number e C P T A I H 16 entries max Program 7122 carrier 1 CPTAIH Other programs carriers 2 8 Not stored 1 Enter a program address 7X22 Display example Modify Command Cl 2 Press NEXT Display example CPTAIH 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 To select other commands for the same carrier press gt and press SELECT for the desired command until all the required entries are completed To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and repeat steps 4 and 5 5 Press STORE 6 Press END Ther
58. Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing ISDN Extension Night Service 4 140 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 617 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording the conversation after the call is intercepted e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 all jacks KX TD1232 01 through 64 x all jacks e Stop Record Keep Record All jacks Stop Record 1 Enter 617 Display LCS Rec Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Stop Record 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In case of the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01 Section 3 Features Live Call Screening LCS Voice Mail Integration for Proprietary Telephones Available when the
59. Log Out no reception Red flash Log In plural reception off Log In Log In Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Log in log out Station Programming ccccceeceseeseeeteeeeeeteeneeens User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Log In Log Out Button Feature References Section 3 Features Station Hunting Uniform Call Distribution UCD Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Log In Log Out 3 98 Features 3 Features M Manager Extension Description Conditions One extension in the system can be assigned as the system manager This extension can perform system programming e Besides the manager extension the extension that is connected to the jack 1 is able to perform system programming e If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the manager extension the proprietary telephone user is regarded as the manager e Manager extension can print out and clear the system working report Programming References Feature References Operation References Message Waiting Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Night None Not applicable The system supports the ability to inform the called party of a message waiting The user with a MESSAGE button knows there is a message if the LED of the MESSAGE button is lit red If the button is
60. N 3 Features 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night 615 616 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension 620 621 Extension Intercept Routing Day Night 625 626 Doorphone Call Forwarding Day Night Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Night service mode 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode 102 Day Night Service Starting Time 513 Night Service Access Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Night Service No Reply Group Description Extensions or ring groups can belong to the no reply group If the floating number of this group is dialed the call is hunted in the group in the order of registration at a pre programmed Call Forwarding No Answer Time If the called extension or ring group is busy the call skips to the next extension or the ring group A no reply group can be a Station Hunting type Conditions e Types of calls whose destination can be the no reply group are Outside calls DIL1 1 DDI IRNA Hunting Group Overflow Intercom calls Extension Transfer e The floating number of the hunting group is used for all other hunting types Circular Voice Mail VM Automated Attendant AA Uniform Call Distribution UCD and Ring Programming References Sec
61. SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group If the programmed pause time is 1 5 or 2 5 seconds and you are storing an external number in program 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set it is required to store a pause manually after the line access code Section 3 Features Host PBX Access Pause Insertion Automatic System Programming 4 99 413 4 6 CO Line Programming Register Recall Signal Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the register recall signal time If your system is installed behind a host PBX External Feature Access EFA is necessary to obtain its services To enable it select a required register recall signal sending time for the CO line group e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Time milliseconds Disable no EFA 80 96 112 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 All CO line groups 96 ms 1 Enter 413 Display Register Recall 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also
62. SX DP Assignment x csccsesccteyscaseedasesgynas seeasvensctestocaaeenccedusteondaeis 655 PS Budget Management ta5 ioc cases diye erradccwnaciseeaeas essere 656 PS Charge Verification Assignment eecceceseeeeeseeeenteeeeees 657 PS Class of Serve ncn diac cteactinin eh a a a a ees 658 PS Extension Group Assignment s ssseesssesesseeesseeessresssesse 659 661 660 PS DIL 1 N Extension Day Night eee 662 PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day INGE esi sate Bi WG ated a a se eS 663 664 PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day FANT SIG scerssican seated Rena ttavausegeodavassutacesd qoaseunebuonaneegioneaneaecente 665 PS Voice Mail Access Codes ccccccccesessssssssssesssssssssssssnssseees 667 PS Extension Connection Assignment esceeceeseeeeseeeeeees 19 Installation Manual Contents 8 5 OOS PS Data Line SeCUni ys ecetienadieriuas sin des oat a kisexaenaseonent 8 59 670 ISDN DDI Number PS Extension Number Transformation cc ccccccccceseesersees 8 60 671 PS Extension Number Set ccccsesssssssesssssssssssessssesseeees 8 61 672 PS Password Setiscsicsite teicher ss Seve 8 63 673 PS CLIP COLP Number Assignment escceeeseeeeeseeeees 8 64 674 675 PS Extension Intercept Routing Day Night 8 65 676 PS Incoming Call Display eee ceecceceseeecesececeeeeeeseeeeenaeeeenes 8 66 677 PS
63. Single CO S CO Button Section 3 Features Button Single CO S CO CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing DPT Features Outward Dialling Line Access Individual Features 3 93 L 3 Features Line Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line Description A proprietary telephone user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences 1 No Line Preference No line is selected when you go off hook You must select a line to answer 2 Prime Line Preference You can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call on that line when multiple calls are received simultaneously Ringing Line Preference When you go off hook you answer the call ringing at your telephone 3 S Conditions e Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting e If Prime Line Preference is selected and an incoming call arrives from a line other than the prime line it cannot be answered just by going off hook The Prime Line should be assigned to the Single CO button e If Ringing Line Preference is selected going off hook does not answer a line programmed for no ring even though there is an incoming call Going off hook during the delay time does not answer a line programmed for delayed ringing e A single line telephone is always set to Ringing Line Preference and cannot be changed Programming References Station Programming cce
64. Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 KX TD1232 i Jack 4 g Jack 3 g Jack 2 P2 L A Jack 1 B H P1 Jacks 1 through 16 are located from bottom to top 4 To extensions Jacks 1 16 Installation 2 11 2 3 2 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 Maximum distance of extension line cord The maximum length of the extension line cord twisted cable that connects the main unit and the extension is as follows 240 m for 0 5 mm Single line Telephone 620 m for 0 5 mm 240 m for 0 5 mm DSS Console Notes e Extension line cords should only be routed internally inside a customers premises e The KX TD12372 is illustrated as a main unit Proprietary Telephone analogue type Connection With the KX T7020 KX T7050 and KX T7130 model proprietary telephones 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins A B L and H A A wire L Low B
65. Steel Plywood Glass Radio waves are reflected and rarely penetrate them Radio waves usually penetrate them Column Ferroconcrete Metal Radio waves can penetrate them but the more iron there is the more radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted Cabinet Steel Wood Radio waves are usually reflected or diffracted and rarely penetrate them Radio waves can penetrate them but they are weakened 8 6 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 2 Site Planning Installation Preparation 1 Prepare a drawing of the building where you want to install the Cell Station CS A drawing which shows the size or main structural material of the wall partition wall or ceiling is preferable 2 Consider the service area required for the users 3 Examine the service area on the drawing 1 Make a circle around the installable area by determining the radio transmission range inside 25 50 m outside 70 100 m Note that a CS cannot be installed outside a building 2 If more than one CS is required the radio transmission ranges should overlap The overlapping range should be 5 to 10 meters lt Basic location gt lt Location example for a building which has an object in the centre gt Object CS i AN O 5 10 i Cell Stations KX TD142 Note The DECT system does not support the function to switch the CS auto matically when the
66. System Programming 4 85 311 4 5 TRS Programming Emergency Dial Number Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Stores up to 10 emergency call numbers Emergency numbers are not subject to toll restriction Account Code Verified or Electronic Station Lockout e Location number 01 through 10 e Emergency number 3 digits max Location 01 999 Location 02 112 1 Enter 311 Display Emergency Dial 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 999 4 Enter an emergency number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END There is a maximum of 10 emergency numbers Each number has a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR Toll Restriction 4 86 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to identify the CO lines which are connected to the system s This prevents users from originating a call to a line which is not connected
67. This allows you to specify the CO lines connected to your system to prevent an extension user from originating an outside call by selecting a line which is not connected An idle line is selected from the connected ones when an extension user makes an Automatic Line Access If the user tries to make a call with a disconnected line reorder tone sounds to indicate that the line is out of use Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment None Operation References Not applicable Features 3 39 C 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Description Allows you to assign the CO line an extension user can use for outgoing calls This feature is useful to prevent unauthorized toll calls Conditions e When an extension user tries to make an outside call on a disallowed CO line reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use the CO line e Day and Night Service are individually programmed Night Service Programming References Section 4 System Programming 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night 615 616 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Co Line Group Description CO lines can be grouped into up to eight CO line groups This allows extensions to call outside parties without designating a specific CO
68. To add two ISDN SO lines use the optional 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 One of these units can be installed in any of the two three expansion areas provided on the front of the main unit For Unit Installation see Section 2 4 6 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD280 2 4 5 Extension Connection Optional Unit To add eight extensions KX TD816 jacks 9 through 16 KX TD1232 jacks 17 through 24 use the optional 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 To add 16 extensions jacks 17 through 32 use two 8 Station Line Units This unit can be installed in any of the two three expansion areas provided on the front of the main unit For Unit Installation see Section 2 4 6 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD280 2 38 Installation 2 4 6 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD280 The following procedures can be used to install either 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 There are two expansion areas for KX TD816 and three expansion areas for KX TD1232 System programming is required for unit location identification Default KX TD816 bottom 4 CO Line Unit top 8 Station Line Unit KX TD1232 bottom 4 CO Line Unit middle and top 8 Station Line Unit Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit 1 Loosen the two the screws on the cover 3 Hook the cabinet to the main unit and
69. Voice CODEC 32 Kbps ADPCM CCITT G 721 Transmission Output Max 250 mW DECT Portable Station Section 8 3 8 2 1 Wireless System Outline Procedure Flow Chart Consider the service area required for the users by referring to Site Planning Ree DABE SOUS ae Install a 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 to the main unit ee DAES Org MOURN CEN Connect a Cell Station KX TD142 to the KX TD144 See pages 8 12 through 8 15 Survey the site for the Cell Station See pages 8 16 through 8 26 Mount the Cell Station on the wall See page 8 27 8 4 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 2 Site Planning Choosing the best site for the Cell Station KX TD142 requires careful planning and testing of essential areas The best location may not always be convenient for installation Please read the fol lowing information before you install the unit Characteristics of Radio Waves Cell Station The transmission of radio waves and the operating range depend on the structure and materials of the building Office equipment such as computers and fax machines can inter fere with radio waves Such equipment may create noise or interfere with the performance of the portable station The illustration below shows the special transmitting patterns of radio waves 1 Reflection Column 2 Diffraction 3 Penetration
70. When the extension re joins the group the extension will set in log in status There should be at least one extension that is in log in status The following types of extension should not belong to an extension group that is assigned as an UCD group a An extension that is assigned as an XDP enabled extension in program 600 b An extension that is assigned as a disconnect extension in program 611 Programming References Feature Reference Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Section 3 Features Extension Group Station Hunting Log In Log Out DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Uniform Call Distribution UCD Features 3 151 U V 3 Features User Programming Manager Programming Description User Programming Manager Programming can be programmed by the end user Programs 000 through 016 can be changed by the user Conditions None Programming References User Programming 0 cccceccecseesseeeeceteceneceeeeeneeenees User Manual Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Voice Mail Integration Description This system can accommodate Voice Processing System VPS equipment which offers the user a Voice Mail and an Automated Attendant Services If an extension user has set Call Forwarding destination to the VPS a calling party will be forwarded to the VPS and can leave a voice message in the m
71. default As Version 3 Version 3 description 1 do not transform Assigns if the DDI is transformed to a specific ext aaa a a ee 47 Version 4 Reserved New Prog Step 519 BSS As Version 3 Version 3 description OHCA default Selects whether to activate BSS or OHCA for T7235 Assigns whether hunting works when an incoming call Hunting does not work 0 Hunting does not work directly reaches an extension which is a member of a default default Termination or Circular Hunting Group Hunting works 1 Hunting works Day Mode destination for the assigned DIL 1 N default 0 DIL1 N Operator DDI number or Operator Operator default an unrecognised or unassigned DDI Number Night Mode destination for the assigned DIL 1 N default 0 DIL1 N Operator DDI number or Operator Operator default an unrecognised or unassigned DDI Number N A not available 8 Version 4 00 Panasonic Program step 990 Option Programming PBX version changes FIELD DESCRIPTION VERSION 3 VERSION 2 VERSION 1 52 57 Various descriptions See Version 4 description See Version 4 description 58 Selects if a Call to Hunt group rings an extension in that As Version 4 N A group if the phone is set to Call Forward 59 Version 3 description 0 Operator Selects which itemisation code is used by a Doorphone 1 Jack 01 1 default with the Call Forwarding feature Enables or Disables the SMDR printout of the margin N N A rat
72. defines the CO line group assignment for each CO line For example if there are multiple telephone service companies available the CO lines can be grouped by company e CO line CO number KX TD816 01 through 16 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 54 x all CO lines e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 CO01 TRG 1 CO05 TRGS C002 TRG2 CO06 TRG 6 C003 TRG 3 CO07 TRG7 C004 TRG 4 CO08 through CO16 TRG 8 for KX TD816 CO08 through CO54 TRG 8 for KX TD1232 1 Enter 401 Display Trunk Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 TRG1 4 Enter the CO line group number To change the current entry enter the new CO line group number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e CO09 through CO16 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD816 and CO25 through CO54 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD1232 e To assign all CO lines to one CO line group press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 Section 3 Fea
73. for each extension Conditions It is programmable to select the limited call either incoming and outgoing call or outgoing call only Programming References Section 4 System Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 990 System Additional Information Field 12 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Operation References Not applicable Line Access Automatic Description Allows the extension user to dial the automatic line access number and access an idle line from the CO line groups assigned for the extension The proprietary telephone user can use the Loop CO button in place of the access number Conditions e This feature functions with Least Cost Routing LCR if LCR is enabled If so the least expensive route is automatically selected e Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines available to access e An idle CO line is selected from the CO line groups assigned to the station If one CO line group is available an idle line is selected from that group If multiple CO line groups are available the CO line group hunting sequence is determined by system programming 3 90 Features 3 Features L e This feature requires a CO button G CO L CO or S CO assignment on a proprietary telephone PT Dialling the line access code selects a CO button on a PT accordi
74. is automatically inserted after the code If the programmed pause time in program 412 Pause Time is 1 5 or 2 5 seconds it is required to store a pause manually after the line access code If you are storing an account code enter the account code before the line access code Refer to Section 3 Account Code Entry If you are storing a number for CO Incoming Call Information Display with name enter hyphen after the line access code The system starts to compare the calling party s number with the System Speed Dialling Number stored after Example 9 12345678 Refer to Section 3 CO Incoming Call Information Display It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by storing it in two speed dial numbers A line access code should not be stored in the second speed dial number To go to another speed dial number at steps 3 through 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press a gt or lt a Program 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set is used to give names to speed dial numbers Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Display CO Incoming Call Information Log Special Display Features System Speed Dialling System Speed Dialling 4 18 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions
75. 0 0 ccccccceececeteceseceeeeeeeeeaees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment DSS Button air a es E a Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field Button Direct Station Selection DSS DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Intercom Calling Features 3 75 I 3 Features ISDN Extension Description The system supports terminal equipment with separate power supplies For example ISDN telephone G4 Facsimile and personal computers which are connected to optional ISDN SO Line Unit or Card KX TD280 KX TD281 or KX TD282 A maximum of eight terminal equipment can be connected to each ISDN SO bus with point to multi point configuration Terminal equipment can be addressed individually with Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit 0 through 9 If MSN is not assigned all equipment on the same SO bus are called simultaneously The following bearer capabilities can be supported Transfer Mode Transfer Capability Circuit Unrestricted digital Speech 3 1 kHz Audio The functions of terminal equipment are similar to single line telephone functions except for the following features e Automatic Callback Busy e Conference e Call Forwarding e Do Not Disturb e Call Hold e Log In Log Out e Call Park e Message Waiting e Call Pickup e Paging Group Answer e Call Transfer e Pickup Dialling e Call Waiting e Timed Reminder Conditions e Class of Service and
76. 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold 200 Hold Recall Time Section 3 Features Call Park Music on Hold Hold Recall DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Hold Call Hold Exclusive CO Line Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to prevent any other extension users from retrieving a held outside call Only the user who held it can retrieve the call e Ifa call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results After Hold Recall results the held call can be retrieved from any other extension e If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Field 44 Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold DPT Features Call Hold Exclusive Features 3 25 C 3 Features Call Hold Exclusive Intercom Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to prevent any other extension users from retrieving a held intercom call Only the user who held it can retrieve the call Conditions e Only one intercom call can be placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call Hold at a time e Ifa call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results A
77. 184 48 384 73 584 24 192 49 392 74 592 25 200 50 400 75 600 26 208 51 408 4 94 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References The Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 feature allows incoming outside calls to be directed to a specific extension When a CO line is assigned as DIL 1 1 it is necessary to assign the destination These programs specify the extension number for day or night mode e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no DIL 1 1 All CO lines Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 407 for day or 408 for night Display example DIL 1 1 Asn Day 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number To disable DIL 1 1 press CLEAR Press STORE To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available CO line numbers in the out of service syste
78. 4 162 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 4 163 813 Floating Number Assignment ccc ceceesseceseceeeeeeeeeeseeeaeenes 4 165 814 Modem Standard cccccccccccccscsccececececececesecececececeseceeeeeeeeass 4 167 4 11 Option Programming xisvccescssecssoscecseestvsonsssvenenvesevesnsstessanesgvavesennessee 4 168 990 System Additional Information cee eeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeneees 4 168 991 COS Additional Information 0 0 0 cccccccceeeesssessssessesseseseseseeee 4 176 Section 5 List S1 THOME Ring Tont oisein eccacadeencasesaseteerennedaeespnseeveea bearneses assises 5 2 5 2 Default Val s ye asses cccsaseceeccadedeasscczcvands isese reiso sssdsssasoes soseri s aasde ias oses 5 4 Section 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting ssssscssssssssssssosssisssssessesssssossessssessssosssosssssessvssessossssris 6 2 GLU Installatioi eise es eais shea aE EES ER 6 2 6 1 2 CC OMMCC LION seinen a lout ads E a A 6 3 6 1 3 Operati Nor r E N E EE RAT 6 4 6 4 Using Reset Button shoe anak a a a as 6 5 18 Available for KX TD1232 only Installation Manual Contents Section 7 7 1 7 2 7 3 Section 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 PRI Section OD caa CA EEE EE EE SE DriS CM AGH Mis sisvassssceninnsvsencadsivasdcesdssdeassaa scdecauwaveasstess deceived sadseaivssasevevesde 7 2 1 Location of the Optional Units eee eeeeseecsseceeeeeeeesteeeenaees 7 2 2 Installing the Unit KX TD29
79. 4 162 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port I Port 2 Description New line code Baud rate Word length Parity Stop bit Selection Default Programming Assigns the communication parameters for the EIA RS 232C interface for Port 1 for KX TD816 and Master System of KX TD1232 or Port 2 Slave System of KX TD1232 Select the code for your printer or personal computer If your printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with carriage return select CR If not select CR LE A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer e New line code CR LF CR CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed e Baud rate baud 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 e Word length bits 7 8 e Parity bit None Mark Space Even Odd e Stop bit length bits 1 2 New line code CR LF Baud rate 9600 Word length 8 Parity bit Mark Stop bit 1 Por
80. 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit Description This program allows you to restrict the duration of outside calls on a Class of Service COS basis Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Disable no limit Enable limit Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 502 Display CO Durat Limit 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e An outside call originated or answered by the programmed extension user is disconnected when the time specified in program 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time expires Extensions in the limited classes cannot establish a CO to CO call that is cannot transfer forward an outside call to another CO line To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension e Program 990 System Additional Information Field 12 is used to program Limited Call Duration to be done for outgoing calls only Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwardi
81. 9 Example When synchronised When not synchronised CHO SLOT 06 SYNC Abbreviation of CHO SLOT 06 L 12 0000 0100 SYNCHRONOUS E2 Channel number 0 9 Frame counter 0000 9999 Frame error 0000 9999 Slot number 00 23 Signal strength level 00 12 Level 00 Out of range Level 01 Catches noise easily or disconnects Level 02 07 May catch noise Level 08 10 Good Level 11 12 Better RECOMMENDATION e Frame error 0000 e Signal strength level more than level 08 DECT Portable Station Section 8 23 8 2 5 Site Survey 3 To record the result 3 1 Press Talk e Attention ALL BOOK DATA IS CLEARED All directory data will be cleared To return to the test result display press Clear ARE YOU SURE TALK YES TRANS NO 3 2 Press Talk e To clear all log data press Ce _ LOG NO 0 9 Flash FLASH ALL CLR 3 3 Enter the log number Example 0 through 9 LOG NO 0 9 0 FLASH ALL CLR Example 3 4 Press Talk e The result is recorded LOG NO 0 9 0 STORED Note e The results of measurement for the 24 slots on the channel are saved each time a channel is set If the same channel is set the new results override the previous ones Therefore a measurement of 10 channels x 24 slots in total can be made e If correct results cannot be obtained e g there are many error coun ters
82. 9 e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR System Programming 4 146 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s 4 9 LCR Programming TXOY LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions By entering numbers into each leading digit plan for a maximum of eight carriers you are starting the process to determine which CO line group will be used to route the call Eight tables are available per carrier e Program address 7XOY X 1 8 carrier number Y 1 8 table number e Location number 01 through 80 e Leading digit number 7 digits max Carrier 1 Table 1 Location 1 x All other locations Not stored 1 Enter a program address 7X0Y Display example LCR L Digit C1 1 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a leading digit number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 80 leading digit numbers for each plan Each number
83. Assigns the password required for entering User Programming Manager Programming mode In the User Programming Mode any display proprietary telephone user in the system can set the programs 000 through 020 Password 4 through 7 digits 1234 1 Enter 120 Display User Password 2 Press NEXT Display example Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e The password can be from four to seven digits long The valid numbers are from 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they are not stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features User Programming Manager Programming 4 60 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 121 Pulse Dial Reception Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Assigns whether the pulse dial from the extension can be received or not by the system Puls Enable Puls Disable Puls Enable 1 4 5 None Enter 121 Display Ext Pulse Dial Press NEXT Ext Puls Enable Display example Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END Section 3 Features Mixed Station Capacities System Programming 4 61 122 4 3 System Programming Automatic Door Open Assignment Description Selection Default Programming
84. Background music external 803 Music Source Use 804 External Pager BGM 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Operator Service Features Background Music BGM External Features 3 9 B 3 Features Budget Management Description Limit the telephone usage to a pre assigned amount For example the limit may be the amount deposited during a hotel at check in If the pre assign limit is reached the extension user cannot make further calls until he she receives authorization from the operator Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 010 Budget Management 014 Budget Management on ISDN Port 990 System Additional Information Field 32 Feature References Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION Operation References Not applicable Busy Lamp Field Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicators of the DSS Direct Station Selection buttons each of which corresponds to a selected extension tell whether the corresponding extensions are idle busy or in Do Not Disturb DND mode Conditions e This function is available for DSS buttons on DSS Consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on proprietary telephones e A DSS button indicator lights red if the corresponding extension is busy or in DND mode e The DSS indicator on a proprietary telephone also informs you of incoming calls except for the DIL 1
85. Button Features 3 23 0 C Feature References 3 Features Section 3 Features Limited Call Duration Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Forwarding by ISDN Line Description The call forwarding service provided by ISDN can be assigned on a multiple subscriber number MSN basis The following features are available e Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU All incoming calls to an extension are transferred by the ISDN line e Call Forwarding Busy CFB An incoming call to an extension is transferred by the ISDN line when the line is busy e Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR An incoming call to an extension is transferred by the ISDN line when the extension does not answer it before a pre assigned time Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 518 CFU CFB CFNR Assignment Station Programming cccccceseceseeeeeeeeeseesecnaeens User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Forwarding by ISDN Line 3 23 1 Features Page left blank for future upgrade s C 3 Features Call Hold CO Line Description Allows the extension user to put an outside call on hold The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension
86. Button Assignment Section 3 Features Button Flexible One Touch Transfer by DSS EXtra Device Port XDP Button DSS Console Features Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 59 E 3 Features Electronic Station Lockout Description Allows the extension users to lock their stations so that other users cannot make outgoing outside calls Any 3 digit numeric code can be used to lock the station The same code is used to unlock it Conditions e Making intercom calls and receiving intercom or outside calls are permitted on the locked station e Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout If the operator sets Remote Station Lock on a station that has already been locked by the station user the user cannot unlock it e It is programmable to admit the press of the Register Recall button during an outside call on the locked station e Emergency dial numbers programmed in 311 Emergency Dial Number Set can be dialled on a locked station Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Electronic station lockout 990 System Additional Information Field 15 Feature References Section 3 Features Remote Station Lock Control Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Electronic Station Lockout 3 60 Features 3 Features E Emergency Call Description Conditions Allows the extension user to dial out a pre assigned em
87. COS e Program 657 PS Class of Service is required for assigning each PS a Class of Service COS CO Incoming Call Information Display Display Call Information The display type for a PS when an incoming call is recieved can be selected by program 676 PS Incoming Call Display CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Program 661 662 PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night is used to determine the CO line which can be accessed by a PS Conference The Conference button can be activated by selecting it on the display For details refer to the Key Operation in the User Manual The Conference button can be assigned on a flexible button However the LED of the flexible button does not work Data Line Security Data Line Security for a PS can be set or cancelled by program 668 PS Data Line Security Direct Dialling In DDI Program 670 ISDN DDI Number PS Extension Number Transformation is used to convert a DDI number to a PS extension number Direct In Lines DIL A PS can be assigned as the DIL 1 N destination In this case program 659 660 PS DIL 1 N Extension Day Night is required Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1 1 When the line is busy the PS is out of range or the PS power switch is OFF Do Not Disturb DND DND is displayed as notification while on hook The FWD DND button can be activa
88. Connect the earth wire to the earth terminal on the main unit LED Power Switch Ground Wire 3 Turn on the power switch of the battery adaptor LED Power Switch 2 50 Installation 2 4 10 Battery Adaptor Connection Wall Mounting 1 Drive the accessory four small screws on the bottom of the unit 2 Place the metal plates so that the screw Metal Plates Front eA heads insert into the slots as shown n 3 Slide the metal plates in the directions of 1g the arrows and drive the screws Screws Bottom 4 Place the templet on the wall to mark two screw positions and install the big screws into the wall 5 Hook the battery adaptor on the screw heads Notes If the Power LED does not go on check the main unit battery adaptor batteries and wiring connection e After connection of the battery adaptor keep the power switch on unless when the main unit is turned off Batteries will discharge e To charge the discharged batteries use a proper charging unit e Power Fuse 8A 32V x2 If the Power LED light goes off during a power failure the power fuse may have been blown To change the fuse 1 Turn the power switch off 2 Turn the fuse holder in the direction of Fuse Holder i T Arrow while pushing it in the direction of Arrow Sa 3 Change the fuse Om 4 Turn the fuse holder in the direct
89. Description Selection Default Programming PS Registration Assigns a registration number and an extension number to each PS Steps 1 through 5 and 22 through 24 must be operated with your display PT and steps 6 through 21 with the PS whose registration number is to be set With a display PT e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e PS extension number 2 through 4 digits With a PS e DECT system number 1 through 4 e PS password 4 digits e System lock password 1 through 4 digits All PSs Not stored With a display PT 1 Enter 650 Display PS Registration 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number Display example PSO1 Not Stored 4 Enter the PS extension number Display example PSO1L Ext 281 5 Press STORE Display if enabled Executing Continue programming from step 6 with a PS within five minutes Display if disabled Rejected The Cell Station CS may not be connected or not working After connecting the CS or resetting the PBX wait for at least one minute and try again from the beginning With a PS 6 Slide the Power switch ON 7 Press the Function button Display KEY 8 Press the Book button twice Display PROGRAMMING 9 Press the Auto OK button DECT Portable Station Section 8 41 650 84 DECT PS System Programming PS Registration contd 10 Press the Book button re
90. Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital System Programming 4 14 Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 618 4 8 Extension Programming ISDN DDI Number Extension Number Transformation Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e DDI Number 1 through 6 digits All jacks Not stored 1 Enter 618 Display DDI NO Trans 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 001 4 Enter a DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 128 DDI numbers Each DDI number can be one through six digits consisting of 0 through 9 e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numb
91. Feature References Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 telephones show the stored name when performing System Speed Dialling The stored names are applied to the CO Incoming Call Information Display Log features e Speed dial number 000 through 499 e Name 10 characters max All speed dial numbers Not stored 1 Enter 002 Display SPD Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Speed dial numbers are programmed in program 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set e There is a maximum of 500 names Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e To go to another speed dial number at steps 3 through 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Display CO Incoming Call Information Log Special Display Features System Speed Dialling System Programming 4 19 00
92. Features Toll Restriction 4 84 System Programming 4 5 TRS Programming 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll restriction specified in programs 301 through 305 as follows Program 306 applies to level 2 Program 307 applies to levels 2 through 3 Program 308 applies to levels 2 through 4 Program 309 applies to levels 2 through 5 Program 310 applies to levels 2 through 6 e Location number 01 through 20 e Exceptional number 7 digits max All locations Not stored 1 Enter a program address 306 through 310 Display example TRS Excp LVL 2 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter an exceptional number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END There is a maximum of five numbers for each program Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character can be used as a wild card character Section 3 Features Toll Restriction
93. Flexible Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Changed Features Changed Features Changed Features and default settings and default settings and default settings No 61 69 No 61 69 No 44 Data line security 730 Quick Dial Number Quick Dial Number No 54 CO I C call info log 56 Assignment Assignment No 55 CO T C call log lock 57 No 78 SXDP N A No 78 SXDP N A No 56 77 N A Quick Dial Assignment See Flexible Numbering See Flexible Numbering Locations 61 68 Locations 61 68 ed Expansion Card Type No Primary Rate option S3 No Primary Rate option S3 Floating Number DDI Assignment As Version 4 As Version 4 but includes N A ISDN extension Number assignment Ea i A ce a a N A N A Pulse Dial Reception Auto Door Opener N A N A 123 Hotel Application 125 Assignment of Denomination assigned for Voice Mail 13 16 are N A N A not available 104 109 111 112 120 122 123 125 126 127 2 Version 4 00 Panasonic PROGRAM DESCRIPTION VERSION 3 VERSION 2 VERSION 1 STEP 128 Voice Mail Extension Groups As Version 4 Additional 8 Groups N A Groups 9 16 1 Hunt Group assignment As Version 4 N A N A Ringing Refer to program step 602 Refer to program step 602 Hunt Group Name Assignment Hunting Overflow Hunting Intercept Day Hunting Intercept Night Extn Ring off Detection Time Reverse Circuit Assignment Ref
94. Full One Touch Dialling cis vscsasseaseeeenteecseatcess sehyuvessaveshedacnanenstecenadeees 3 68 0 G Group Call Pickup Call Pickup Group eee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenee 3 30 Group CO G CO Button Button Group CO G CO 3 14 H Handset Headset Selections i 05 cat oa os eadener i atin 3 68 1 Handset Microphone Mute 0 0 ee eeseceeneeeseeceseceseeeeeeesseecsaeceseensees 3 68 1 Handsfree Ans werback te 2ics2ciiheetincdini inten aadne 3 69 Handsfree Operat Ones sxc cori rnea a sie deal Geta EEE ea 3 69 Hold Recall uctica nee i ee Rae Roe Bie ai st ee 3 70 Host PBX ACCES Sisate enaa asin a Ra a RTRS 3 71 HOTEL APPLICATION ai sssacsiceasesacanasentevtsoaddgvesbasadeentivacasousedevd geuveeve 3 72 Check In Cheek Oultvisec siccescced ccs osdebdenctna ote desveadeveladepesvcadancpecventsa lan cebecea E os 3 72 Room Management ceceesccsessecssesseceecesecesceseeeeeeseseeeeseseaeeseecaecsaecasenaeeaees 3 73 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call occ eeeseescecsreeeeeceeecesseceneeceseeeneeeeees 3 73 0 Hunting Groupes aisin E E ER 3 73 1 I Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN seeeeeseeeserereresereree 3 73 2 TPT CE Pt ROUEN in a a T E S E Ea nass 3 74 Tytercom Calling 3 9 45 eae hie eet S 3 75 ISDN ES GENS 1G I forse sores tates Sacer al oe rote ee ime tre 3 76 L Last Number Redial Redial Last Number 0 cccccccccceeeseeeeees 3 118 Least Cost Routing CCR aise coacs coues rcaaayduengidsslues acdauesignddagi
95. Hotel is displayed on the operator extension s KX T7235 or KX T7436 and Check In Check Out feature is available Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION System Programming 4 63 125 4 3 System Programming Assignment of Denomination Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the Denomination required for your country 2 characters Max 1 4 5 Enter 125 Display Denomination Press NEXT Display example Denomi Enter a denomination To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new denomination To enter characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters Press STORE Press END If more than two characters are entered they are ignored Section 3 Features Display Call Information 4 64 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 126 Voice Mail Number Assignment t Description Assigns the jack number corresponding to the voice mail port for data transmission to the Voice Processing System Selection KX TD816 e Jack number 02 through 16 KX TD1232 e Master Slave e Jack number 02 through 32 Master 33 through 64 Slave Default All jacks Blank Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 126 Display VMS Port Asn 2 Press NEXT Display example Mastl 3 Enter a jack number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the
96. KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 Programming 1 Enter 005 Display Flexible Key Asn f Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital System Programming 4 23 Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 005 4 2 Manager Programming Flexible CO Button Assignment contd Cancelling Conditions Feature References 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display PTI PGM Mode 4 Press a CO button to be changed The display shows the contents pre assigned to the button Display example CO O1 5 Enter a button code plus parameter if required To change the parameter press CLEAR and the new parameter 6 Press STORE 7 To program another CO button of the same jack repeat steps 4 through 6 To program another jack press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END 1 Perform the same procedures as steps through 4 above 2 Enter 2 3 Press STORE 4 Press END e A centralized telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack programmed as a manager extension in program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Night There is a maximum of 16 proprietary telephones for KX TD816 and 64 proprietary telepho
97. Log Mode on the unit when the information area is full If the user sets this mode new CO incoming call information is retained but old data is discarded If the user cancels this mode new CO incoming call information is not memorized on the unit To set or cancel the mode a corresponding feature number is used The telephone user can lock the display of the unit so that CO incoming call information is not shown on the display if the user does not want others to see the information A lock code is required to set or cancel this feature Operator can cancel the lock in case the user forgets the lock code Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card 2 4 4 CO Line Connection Optional Unit Programming References Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set 100 Flexible Numbering CO incoming call information log mode CO incoming call information log lock 419 Subscriber Number Assignment 421 CO Line Name Assignment 622 Incoming Call Display 3 38 Features 3 Features C Feature References Operation Reference User Manual Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Display DPT Features CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock CO Incoming Call Information Log Mode Operator Service Features CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock Clear CoO Line Connection Assignment Description Conditions
98. Night None Operation References Not applicable Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 49 D 3 Features Display Call Information Description The display proprietary telephone shows the user the following call information Extension number and name These are shown when calling or when called by an extension user and during an established intercom call A display example 123 Smith Dialled telephone number This is shown when dialling the telephone number A display example 91234567890 Number or name of the caller These are shown when receiving an incoming outside call on ISDN network Display examples 0712225555 JOHN WHITE CO line number and name This is shown when receiving an outside call A display example CO03 AB COMPANY Charge Meter This is shown during an established outside call A display example CO01 00005 Charge Fee This is shown during an established outside call A display example CO01 00001 15 Call duration This is shown during an established incoming outside call The display remains for five seconds after the call is finished A display example CO 02 0 02 28 Conditions e Extension numbers and names and CO line names are programmable If no name is stored only the number is displayed e The display shows no intercom call duration e The outgoing outside call duration starts when the programmable timer expires e It is programmable to select the first display meter or charge by syst
99. Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 013 ISDN Extension Name Set 421 CO Line Name Assignment 622 Incoming Call Display Feature References Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Log Operation Reference DPT Features User Manual CO Incoming Call Information Display 3 37 1 Features Page left blank for future upgrade s C 3 Features Co Incoming Call Information Log Description If the display digital proprietary telephone KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 or KX T7436 user cannot answer a call the telephone automatically records the caller s telephone number name and the time The user can call back the caller by checking the call log This is available if such a telephone receives incoming outside calls from the ISDN SO line provided with the CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation feature A maximum of 15 calls are recorded per telephone Conditions e The call log is registered at the time the DPT finishes ringing If a call is directed to multiple DPTs the call log is registered at the DPT that has the smallest jack number of the ringing DPTs Transferred call information is also recorded If the DPT is in Call Forwarding No Answer or IRNA is activated the call log is registered at the original DPT but not at the destination DPT unless the destination party answers the call and records it manually The telephone user can control the CO Incoming Call Information
100. Off Hook Monitor Enable Disable Enable iF 4 5 Enter 148 Display Off Hook Monitor Press NEXT Display example Monitor Enable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END Off Hook Monitor is only available for the KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 telephone users Section 3 Features Off Hook Monitor System Programming 4 69 8 200 4 4 Timer Programming Hold Recall Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the hold recall timer This timer is used to alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period of time Time seconds 0 through 240 O Hold Recall disabled 60 s 1 Enter 200 Display Hold Recall Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 60 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e Select 0 if Hold Recall is not required e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Hold Recall 4 70 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings before the transfer recall occurs Ifa transferred call is not answered before the programmed time of rings the call returns to the original caller Number of rings
101. One Touch Dialling is enabled press One Touch Dialling DSS REDIAL or SAVE button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Feature References Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Operation References Basic Operation User Manual Making Calls Features 3 95 L 3 Features Live Call Screening LCS Description Conditions Allows a proprietary telephone user to monitor their voice mailbox while incoming callers are leaving a message and if desired intercept the call The voice mailbox can be monitored in one of two ways Hands free or Private Hands free Mode The voice mailbox is monitored through the built in speaker of the proprietary telephone Private Mode The proprietary telephone sounds an alert tone when callers are connected to the voice mailbox To monitor the call the user goes off hook on the handset or speakerphone ino nn nn Alert Tone To intercept the call in either Hands Free or Private mode press the LCS button A single line telep
102. PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Station programming is used to define the Account Codes for the Verified modes e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Feature References Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry System Programming 4 119 509 510 4 7 COS Programming Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References These programs set the toll restriction value used in System Speed Dialling for each Class of Service COS in day or night mode When the user makes a call with System Speed Dialling the system will check the phone number with this level e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Level number 1 through 8 All COS Level 1 Day Night 1 Enter a program address 509 for day or 510 for night Display SPD TRS LVL Day 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 1 4 Enter a level number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PRE
103. Press STORE 11 Press NEXT Display example 12 00 AM 12 Enter the hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new hour 13 Press m 14 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new minutes 15 Press gt 16 Press SELECT for AM or PM 17 Press STORE 18 Press END e After changing an entry you can press STORE You do not have to perform all of the rest of the steps To go back to the previous field press qm at steps 4 through 9 and steps 13 through 16 If you hear the alarm after pressing STORE check that the date is valid The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Display Time and Date 4 16 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set Description Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users The stored numbers are also applied to CO Incoming Call Information Display Log features Selection e Speed dial number 000 through 499 Telephone number 24 digits max Default All speed dial numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 001 Display SPD Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entr
104. References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming cceccceeceseeeteeeeeeeceeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment SAVE Button Section 3 Features Button Flexible Redial Automatic DPT Features Redial Saved Number Features 3 119 R 3 Features Remote Station Lock Control Description The operator is given the privilege of controlling Electronic Station Lockout on any station Conditions Remote Station Lock Control is superior to Electronic Station Lockout If Station Lockout has already been set by the extension user and Remote Station Lock is set by the operator cancelling the lock is only possible by the operator Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Electronic Station Lockout Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Remote Station Lock Control Reverse Circuit Description This feature can be used to detect a reversal of CO line polarity from Central Office when trying to make a CO line call This is useful for determining the start and completion of CO line calls Conditions This feature needs system programming for each CO line Programming References Section 4 System Programming 416 Reverse Circuit Assignment Feature References None Operation References Not applicable 3 120 Features 3 Features R Ringing Delayed
105. System Additional Information contd Option Programming Area Field Description Selection Default References 5 35 Assigns whether or not the new page will 0 enable 1 start whenever printing out the data inthe 1 disable Hotel Application feature 36 Assigns whether or not to print out the data 0 enable 1 when the system receives a call and a call is 1 disable answered 37 Assigns whether an extension number ora 0 DDI 0 e CLIR DDI number is used when a DDI call transformation e COLR comes in or the CLIP and COLP feature number e Direct Dialling becomes available 1 extension In DDI number 38 Assigns how to change the number through 0 The number 0 Direct Dialling the ISDN line into the extension number transformed in 111 In DDI 1 The number equals the which receives incoming DDI calls number from the ISDN line minus the subscriber s number programmed in 419 6 39 Disables or enables sending dial tone after 0 disable 0 None seizing a CO line 1 enable 40 Reserved 41 Assigns whether the system disconnects the 0 disconnect 0 None CO line or not if nothing is dialled after 1 do not seizing a CO line disconnect 42 Reserved 43 Selects the way to access CO line to apply 0 Dial 9 or press 1 Least Cost LCR L CO button Routing LCR 1 Dial 9 press L CO button press G CO bu
106. UCD is assigned group members are hunted in circular way starting at the extension following the last one called If Ring hunting is assigned all of the extensions in the group ring simultaneously If No Reply hunting is assigned the extensions in the group are hunted in order of registration for a programmed interval of time e Hunting group number 01 through 32 Disable no hunting Circular VM voice mail AA automated attendant UCD Ring No Reply All hunting groups Disable 1 Enter 106 Display Hunt Type 2 Press NEXT Display Group NO gt 3 Enter a hunting group number To enter hunting group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE To program another hunting group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired hunting group number Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for connection to a Voice Processing System as VM or AA port Section 3 Features Hunting Group Station Hunting No Reply Group Uniform Call Distribution UCD Ring Group Voice Mail Integration 4 44 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 3 System Programming 107 System Password Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the password required for ent
107. _ Absent message 750 49 __ Timed reminder 76 50 _ Electronic station lockout 77 51 __ Night service mode 78 52 ___ Parallel telephone mode 69 53___ Background music external 65 54 _ Paging deny 721 55__ Primary COS select 791 56 _ Secondary COS select 793 57 __ Log in log out 45 58 _ Operator 1 call None 59 _ Operator 2 call None 60 _ Automatic callback busy cancel 46 61 69 Not available z 70 _ Timed reminder remote 7X 71 CO incoming call information log mode 56 72 Do not disturb for DDI 54 73 CLIR 59 74 COLR 58 75 CO incoming call information log lock 57 76 Live call screening password control 799 77 System working report 794 78 Super extra device port SXDP 48 f Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Features 3 65 Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 F Fixed Feature Numbers Conditions Programming References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 100 Flexible Numbering Feature References 3 Features Feature Default While busy tone is heard Busy Station Signalling BSS 2 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 2 Whisper OHCA 2 Automatic Callback Busy 6 While Do Not Disturb tone is heard Do Not Disturb Override 2 While calling or talking Conference 3 Door Open 5 Alternate Calling Ring Voice
108. all CO lines e Enabl enable Disab disable All ports all CO lines Enabl Day Night 1 Enter a program address 615 for day or 616 for night Display example CO Out ISDN Day 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter first port number you can also press NEXT Display example 03 CO01 Enabl 4 Enter the desired CO line number or keep pressing gt or lt until the desired CO line is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END e Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available System Programming 4 139 615 616 4 8 Extension Programming Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension conta Feature References e To assign all ports to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 4 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO 01 e When you change a port number by pressing NEXT or PREV the CO line number is not changed Example 03 CO02 Pressing NEXT 04 CO02 Section 3
109. and 2 are installed in the Master System and 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e You can enter up to two KX TD816 or up to four KX TD1232 doorphone numbers for each extension Section 3 Features Door Opener Night Service Doorphone Call 8 56 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 665 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References PS Voice Mail Access Codes Assigns a mailbox number for each PS only if program 990 System Additional Information Field 18 is set to free e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Mailbox number 16 digits max All PSs Not stored 1 Enter 665 Display PS VM ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Not Stored 4 Enter the mailbox number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant ports e Each mailbox number has a
110. and 5 8 Press END Conditions e When Disable is selected the call is received by the extension programmed 607 608 Feature References Section 3 Features Doorphone Call Forwarding to ISDN Night Service System Programming 4 142 7 Page left blank for future upgrade s 4 9 LCR Programming 7000 LCR Mode Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Allows you to turn on or off the Least Cost Routing LCR mode LCR if enabled selects the least expensive route to be used for an outside call On Off Off 1 4 5 Enter 7000 Display LCR Mode Press NEXT Display example LCR Off Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END If Off is selected the Automatic Line Access feature functions in place of LCR Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR Line Access Automatic System Programming 4 143 4 9 LCR Programming Blank 4 144 System Programming 4 9 LCR Programming 7002 BTL Access Code Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Stores the BTL British Telecom Line access code BTL access code 10 digits max 121 1 4 5 Enter 7002 Display BTL Access Code Press NEXT Display example 121 Enter a BTL access code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry
111. and so on Two connected systems are called the master and the slave systems A maximum capacity of the system is as follows Item Maximum Quantity Maximum Quantity Single System System Connection CO Line 12 24 Extension Jack 32 64 DSS Console 4 8 Doorphone 2 4 Door Opener 2 4 External Pager 2 4 Music Source 2 4 Conditions e The following resources can be used by either system a External pagers b Music sources used for Music on Hold c Music sources used for Background Music BGM d Station Message Detail Recording SMDR EIA RS 232C ports e Call Parking areas e System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 optional expansion cards to connect both systems must be installed for this feature e Once this feature is employed the data adjustment in both systems are performed at the programmed time default is 1 00 every day The time can be changed by programming Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 9 System Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 115 Adjust Time Feature References None Operation References Not applicable 3 134 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features S System Data Default Set Description Conditions This system permits re initialization of system programmed data If all the programmed data is cleared the system will restart with the default setting The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section
112. associated CS is busy If the associated CS is busy the portable station cannot make or receive a call Thus it is not useful to install more than one CS very closely as shown below Please follow our recommendation in step 3 above Object S gt Cell Stations KX TD142 DECT Portable Station Section 8 7 8 2 2 Site Planning Precautions e The Cell Station should be kept free of dust moisture high tem perature more than 40 C low temperature less than 5 C vibration and should not be exposed to direct sunlight e If a backup system for use during a Cell Station power failure is required set the system cable resistance within 20 Q e Keep distance between the equipment listed below in order to prevent noise interference or the disconnection or a conversation EQUIPMENT DISTANCE Two Cell Stations more than 1 meter Cell Station and office equipment such as a computer more than 1 8 meters telex fax etc or microwaves Cell Station and portable station more than 1 meter Two portable stations more than 0 5 meter Portable station and proprietary wired telephone more than 1 meter The system and Cell Station more than 2 meters 8 8 DECT Portable Station Section 2 3 Location of the Unit KX TD816 Expansion area 2 Expansion area One 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 can be installed to any of the two expansion areas on the main unit KX TD816 Up to two Cell Stat
113. busy or logout the call is transferred to the Intercept destination for the group Busy Tone This assignment is available only when the call is made through an ISDN line or intercom call If the queue is full a busy tone is sent to a caller If the number in the queue is assigned as 0 and all extensions are busy or logout a busy tone is sent to the caller If the call is made through an analog line the number in the queue is assigned as 0 and all extensions are busy or logout the caller will hear a ringback tone but the call cannot be received No As the queue is treated as infinite overflow will not occur and a busy tone will not be sent The call will be kept waiting until any extension in the group becomes idle or logs in IRNA starts e Hunting group number 01 through 32 e Call management OVF Overflow Busy Busy Tone No e The number in the queue 0 through 8 1 digit All hunting groups Busy 0 1 Enter 133 Display Hunt Overflow 2 Press NEXT Display Group NO 3 Enter a hunting group number To enter hunting group number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Busy 0 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press gt System Programming 4 69 4 133 4 3 System Programming Hunting Overflow conta Conditions Feature Reference 6 7 8 None Enter the number in the queue To change the current entry
114. cc cccccsssssececececeeeesenteaeeeeees Unscreened Call Transfer to Extension Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension User Programming Manager Programming scceeseeeeeseeeeeees Voice Mail Tite rath Otis nesciis eies Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Whisper COC Ae ae is ee et E E R ee gee De System Programming General Programming INstructions ccccccssscssssscssesceseseess 4 1 1 Using the Proprietary Telephones ceecceceeeceeeteeeeeteeeenaees 4 1 2 Programming Ways ccgaisszaaesteeseejevsstauadeasaacstush cased vatdedaceaaaatsensabed 4 13 Entering CHAaracter s orense tinsi 4 1 4 User Programming Mode ss ssssssessseeesseeesseesseesseresseessseessresse 4 1 5 Example of Programming esesseeeeesssesesresstseresressessresrersessresees Manager Programming esesssssesossoesessossesossossesossoeseesossesossosssseessese 000 Date and Time Setnikar aan a 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set cee eeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeneees 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeneees 003 Extension Number Set cccccscssssssssssssssssesesssssssssssssssseee 004 Extension Name Set cccccccccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseseeees 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment cceeececeeeceseseeeesteeeennees 006 Operator Manager E
115. clearing the System Working Report e Setting clearing the Remote Station Lock e Switching the Class of Service primary secondary e Switching Day Night mode manually e Turning Background Music External on and off Only Operator 1 has the ability to perform the following operations e Setting the Automatic Overflow e Setting the Hurry Up Transfer e Receiving the Alert Indication e Receiving the call which is transferred from DND extension If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the operator s extension the proprietary telephone user is regarded as the operator e The operator can be assigned as a destination of the Transfer Recall by system programming e The Direct Dialling In call which is denied to receive by the extension or is dialled improper number is forwarded to the operator e The Alert Indication is only available for Operator 1 in Day mode Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Night 100 Flexible Numbering Night service mode Background music external Primary COS select Secondary COS select Timed reminder remote CO incoming call information log lock Live call screening password control System working report 129 Operator Queue 990 System Additional Information Field 11 Station Programming cccccc
116. display shows 1 Enter 6 6 M N O 2 Press Soft 1 M M M N O 3 Enter 4 M4 G H I 4 Press SHIFT t lt i i g h ik 5 Press Soft 3 i Mi g h al 6 Enter 5 MIS J k 7 Press Soft 2 k Mik J k 8 Enter 3 Mika d amp f 9 Press Soft 2 e Mike d amp i Using method 2 See Combination Table 1 The display shows 1 Enter 6 6 2 Press SELECT 3 Enter 4 M4 4 Press SELECT six times Mi 5 Enter 5 Mid 6 Press SELECT four times Mik 7 Enter 3 Mik3 8 Press SELECT four times Mike System Programming 4 11 0 4 1 3 Entering Characters Using method 3 See Combination Table 2 SIAAMRWNE SPAAKMRWNe The display shows Enter 6 Rotate Jog Dial one pulse Enter 4 Rotate Jog Dial six pulses Enter 5 Rotate Jog Dial four pulses Enter 3 Rotate Jog Dial four pulses R Enter 2 Rotate Jog Dial until M appears Enter 2 Rotate Jog Dial until 1 appears Enter 2 Rotate Jog Dial until k appears Enter 2 Rotate Jog Dial until e appears Notes To erase all the letters press CLEAR e To erase the last letter press lt a 6 M M4 Mi Mid Mik Mik3 Mike M2 Mi Mi2 Mik Mik2 Mike 4 11 1 System Programming Page left blank for future upgrade s 4 1 4 User Programming Mode Some programming items are accessible by any display proprietary telephone user in the sy
117. e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 16 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 54 all CO lines e Connect No Connect All CO lines Connect 1 Enter 400 Display CO Connection 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Connect 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e CO09 through CO16 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD816 and CO25 through CO54 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD1232 However the assignment of CO09 through CO16 or CO25 through CO54 are not changeable You can only check them e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment System Programming 4 87 401 4 6 CO Line Programming CO Line Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Each CO line must be assigned to a CO line group This program
118. e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 e In case of the KX TD1232 CO 01 through CO 12 are for the Master System and CO 13 through CO 24 are for the Slave If available e CO09 through CO16 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD816 and CO25 through CO54 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD1232 e To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press gt o lt Section 3 Features Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 4 104 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 420 429 Direct Dialling In Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assign the contract status of the Direct Dialling In DDD Service or Multiple Subscriber Number on a CO line basis in both day and night modes This setting is also used for Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP and Connected line Identification Presentation COLP e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Disable Enable All CO lines Enable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 420 for day or 429 for night Display example DDI Service Day 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Ente
119. enable this function at the locked extension and toll restricted extension by system programming Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 414 Disconnect Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 3 15 Section 3 Features External Feature Access DPT Features Recall Features 3 117 R 3 Features Redial Automatic Description This is a special feature for the digital proprietary telephones that provides automatic redialling of the last dialled saved number or call log if the called party is busy If the Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial CO Incoming Outgoing Call Log operation or Notebook function is performed handsfree the telephone set will hang up and try again after a pre determined period of time Conditions e Redial Repeat Time and Interval Time can be changed by system programming e Pressing RECALL or FLASH RCL button allows the system to cancel this feature e If any dialling operation is done during Automatic Redial this function is finished e This feature is not available with KX T7250 Programming References Section 4 System Programming 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time Feature References Section 3 Features Redial Last Number Redial Saved Number Operation References DPT Features User Manual Redial Automatic Redial Last Number Description Every telepho
120. following tables to decide the carrier In the table the wild card characters substitute all the digits except the codes in the LCR Exceptional Code Set table All the dialled numbers except for the excepted codes are sent to the MCL The excepted codes are sent to the BTL Time zone and fee table 1 Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 2 Exceptional code set table B If you use BTL MCL SPLASH TELECOM Line If you use BTL MCL SPLASH TELECOM Line for long distance calls you may program the following tables to decide the carrier If you enter all area codes available you should program eight hundreds area codes However you can use the wild card characters x x for the largest number of area code The wild card can be programmed at only one location of all the Leading Digit Entry tables 1 through 8 and the Exceptional Code Set table Features 3 83 L 1 Carrier Table for MCL Route Plan Table 1 A rate calls up to 56km Leading digit table 1 01 021 02 0333 03 0444 04 0555 05 0666 80 6 00PM 0 50 6 00PM 0 50 3 Features Time zone and fee table 1 Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 8 00AM 0 75 8 00AM 0 75 eee All day 0 50 9 00AM 1 00 9 00AM 1 00 eee 1 00PM 0 75 1 00PM 0 75 eee
121. from a remote location and request a transfer to the modem e Assign the modem as the destination of the DIL 1 1 feature Conditions e A proprietary telephone can be used to perform system programming e Only one access is allowed to system programming at any one time e To access system administration a valid password must be entered The password is factory programmed and can be changed e System administration can be performed on line except for the procedures of diagnosis If the system goes off line the system functions as if it was in power failure Refer to Power Failure Transfer feature Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 7 Remote Card Installation Programming References Section 4 System Programming 107 System Password 813 Floating Number Assignment 814 Modem Standard Feature References Section 3 Features System Programming with Station Message Detail Proprietary Telephone Recording SMDR Operation References Not applicable System Programming with Proprietary Telephone Description This system can be programmed with a personal computer or a proprietary telephone PT Proprietary telephones available for system programming are KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 KX T7235 and KX T7130 Display Proprietary Telephones Two extensions are allowed to perform system programming The extensions available are 1 An extension that is connected to jack 1 2 An extension that is assi
122. from the destination extension Conditions e Same as the conditions of Call Forwarding All Calls e It is programmable to enable or disable this feature on a Class of Service basis Features 3 21 C 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb 991 COS Additional Information Field 2 Station Programming 0 0cccccccesceeseceteceteeeeeeeeeeenees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding All Calls Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Forwarding Follow Me Call Forwarding No Answer Description Calls to your extension are forwarded to another extension if you do not answer the call in a pre determined time Conditions e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are Outside calls DDI DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e This function operates if an incoming call is not answered in a specific period of time Therefore this function also applies if your extension is busy and cannot answer the incoming call within the time e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the forwarded call e Altho
123. has a maximum of 7 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character can be used as a wild card character System Programming 4 147 7XOY 4 9 LCR Programming LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 conta e The same code with different digits may be assigned in this program or in program 7X20 LCR Exceptional Code Set In this case the code which has smaller digits takes the more expensive route is priority To prevent this enter X wild card after the code with the smaller digits Examples are shown below lt Examples gt 1 The code priority is as follows 33 in program 7102 gt 333 in program 7101 In this case 33 should be assigned in program 7102 2 The code priority is as follows 44 in program 7201 gt 444 in program 7101 In this case 44 should be assigned in program 7201 3 The code priority is as follows 332 in program 7120 gt 3323 in program 7120 In this case 332 should be assigned in program 7120 Feature References Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR 4 148 System Programming 4 9 LCR Programming 7X1Y LCR Time and Fee Set for Plans 1 through 8 Description Assigns time schedules and charged fees for a maximum of eight plans of a maximum of eight carriers Itis possible to split a day into four time zones max so that the least expensive line is selected for that time
124. in extension A the call arrives at extension B Extension C Extension A y Extension B When extension B is has been setin 3 When the 2nd call arrives at extension C extension B the call the 3rd call will arrive at extension A arrives at extension C Extension C When extension C is busy or UCD log out has been set in extension C the call arrives at extension A busy or UCD log out 3 150 Features 3 Features U Conditions e UCD can be used in the following cases a The floating number of UCD is assigned as the DIL 1 1 destination b The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination c The floating number of UCD is dialled from the extension d The floating number of UCD is assigned as the Direct Dialling In destination This feature requires assignment of UCD group in the system programming An extension can belong to two or more UCD groups The floating number can be assigned on a hunting group basis The UCD group is based on the hunting group It is possible to set the log in or log out status on extension basis UCD call can arrive at the extension in log in status within the UCD group and cannot arrive at the extensions in log out status If the extension would like to leave the group temporarily the extension will set in log out status by the feature number to prevent UCD calls being sent to their extensions
125. in the telephone system and not in the unit Do not use benzine thinner or the like or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet Wipe it with a soft cloth WARNING THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS BECOMING ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS THE POWER SOCKET WALL OUTLET SHOULD BE LOCATED NEAR THIS EQUIPMENT AND BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE Attention The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft MODEL NO SERIAL NO For your future reference DATE OF PURCHASE NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS CE Warning 73 23 EEC This is a Class A product In a domestic environment 89 336 EEC this
126. is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Select the standard used by your modem Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 167 990 4 11 Option Programming System Additional Information Description Adds the following programming items if required Area 1 There are 14 fields available in Area 1 as follows Display example 0010100010000101 Jl blobbllbidbidiudvd Field number 00 M 4 2 S1 50 49 GB D 0 Area 2 There are 13 fields available in Area 2 as follows Display example JL1L1OOLLOOLLTOLIOO J Jl L bbb lb lb ide Field number unused 26 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 1 Area 3 Area 3 is reserved for future use Display example oooooooooooooooo Field number reserved Area 4 There are 8 fields available in Area 4 as follows Display me 1111111100000000 te ooh She oD abe a ad Field number 57 56 55 54 27 53 25 24 reserved Area 5 There are 11 fields available in Area 5 as follows Display ene LLL L LOOILITLILLO de abe Se ale ale hs a a al Field number unused 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 4 168 System Programming 4 11 Option Programming 990 System Additional Information contd Area 6 There are 16 fields available in Area 6 as follows Display a oa ILLL LFLL SN Field numb
127. is forwarded to the VPS under the proper conditions The system sends to the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that time Therefore the calling party can leave his her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number Features 3 153 V 3 Features Outside call DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N System VPS IRNA Extension __7 gt VM1 pf gt VM2 1 VM Hunting Chain NVM X psti VM 3 1 3 Transferring to VM The extension user can transfer an outside call to the VPS so that calling party can leave his her message in the mailbox of the desired extension The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the VPS Pressing this button and entering the extension number allows the extension user to transfer the call to the mailbox of the corresponding extension Outside call System 1 Transfer VPS 2 Transfer Extension Extension gt _ M1 f SET Operator by VM Transfer r ATSR Button A VM Hunting j i Chain VMX amp VM 3 3 154 Features 3 Features Outside call V 1 4 Changing from VM to Automated Attendant AA The Automated Attendant Service is automatically activated in the following cases 1 The
128. is forwarded to an AA port so that the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily e Other programming required program addresses 106 602 System Programming 4 53 114 4 3 System Programming VM Command DTMF Set conia Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References e LV MSG GETMSG AA SVC VM SVC e DTMF signal number 16 digits max LV MSG H GETMSG H AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 1 Enter 114 Display VM Command Set 2 Press NEXT to program the LV MSG command To program another command keep pressing NEXT until the desired command is displayed Display example LV MSG H 3 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END e A command signal number can have a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 RECALL or FLASH and PAUSE e The RECALL or FLASH button is available only for LV MSG and GETMSG commands to store H which means Home Position e If H is stored for LV MSG a mailbox number programmed in program 609 Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the VM port Follow On ID function If certain codes are required before and after the ID co
129. leading digits some have 3 digit numbers and some have 4 digit numbers Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default 01 Ist hundred extension block 2 02 2nd hundred extension block 3 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 18 Automatic line access LCR 9 19 CO line group line access 8 20 System speed dialling x 21 Station speed dialling 6x 22 Station speed dialling programming 60 23 __ Doorphone call 61 24 __ Paging external 62 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 3 64 Features 3 Features F Flexible Feature Numbers Number Feature Default 26 Paging group 63 27 _ _ Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup CO line 4 29 Call pickup group 40 30 __ Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve CO line 53 34 Last number redial 35 _ Call park call park retrieve 52 36 __ Account code entr 49 37 Door opener 55 38 External feature access 64 39 Station feature clear 790 40 __ Message waiting 70 41 Not available 42 __ Call forwarding do not disturb 710 43 Call pickup deny 720 44 Not available 45 _ Call waiting OHCA Whisper OHCA 731 46 __ Not available 47 __ Pickup dialling 74 48
130. maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the display press m or lt a Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration DECT Portable Station Section 8 57 667 8 4 DECT PS System Programming PS Extension Connection Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns whether the PS can perform all accesses or not e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e Connect No Connect All PSs Connect 1 Enter 667 Display PS EXT Connect 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 Connect 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all PSs to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number Section 3 Features Extension Connection Assignment 8 58 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 668 Description Selection Defau
131. neither provided nor assigned the called party hears special dial tone when he she goes off hook Pressing the lit MESSAGE button also means to call back the called party or listen to the messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice Processing System e For the proprietary telephone which is provided with no MESSAGE button a flexible CO button can be assigned as the MESSAGE button either by system or station programming e Cancelling the message can be performed from the extension setting it or from the extension receiving it e The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages e Messages are always left on the original extension It is not sent to a Call Forwarding or Station Hunting destination e A single line telephone user will hear the ring tone if a message is received It is programmable to set the ring tone interval by system programming Features 3 99 M 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Message waiting 214 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 9 31 Station Programming ccccccesseeseceteceteceeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Message Waiting MESSAGE Button Feature References Section 3 Features Dial Tone Distinctive Voice Mail Integration Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User
132. of access succeeded Number of access succeeded X 100 Number of access requested e The average duration of the dialled calls These records can be deleted by the manager and the operator and new data will be recorded thereafter Conditions Connect a printer to the EIA RS 232C connector located on the main unit After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer in 10 seconds Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 7 Printer Connection 3 138 Features 3 Features T Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Terminate Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering System working report 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR DPT Features System Working Report The Terminate button is used to allow the proprietary telephone user to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up first e Pressing the Terminate button disconnects the conversation outputs an SMDR record and get an internal dial tone e The proprietary telephone is provided with no Terminate button originally However a flexible CO button can be assigned as the Terminate button either by system or station programming Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 S
133. of calls whose destination can be the phantom extension are Outside calls DIL 1 1 DDI IRNA Hunting Group Overflow Intercom calls Extension Transfer You can call the phantom extension by pressing the Phantom Extension button or by dialling the phantom extension number If several extensions have the same phantom extension button they will ring simultaneously A phantom number must be assigned by System Programming before assigning the Phantom Extension button by Station Programming There is a maximum of 128 phantom numbers Each number has two to four digits consisting of numbers 0 through 9 The phantom number cannot be used for feature settings such as Call Forwarding The lighting patterns and status of the Phantom Extension button are shown below Lighting pattern Phantom Extension Status Off Idle Red on Calling a phantom extension Green rapid flash Incoming call A DSS button can be assigned as the Phantom Extension button so that the operator can use the button for transferring a call Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment 136 ISDN DDI Number Phantom Extension Number Transformation Station Programming 0 ceccceeceseeseeeneeeeeneeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Phantom Extension Button None Operation References DPT Features User Manual Phantom Extension
134. on Hold and Background Music features To adjust the sound level of the Music on Hold use the volume control on the external music source e Input impedance 8 KQ External Music Jack 2 External Music Jack 1 or led DD External Music Source 1 2 20 Installation 2 3 6 External Music Source Connection KX TD1232 1 T amp REMOTE i SYSTEM INTER CONNECTION 8CO ISDN EEEE pE ol 7 External Music Jack 2 External Music Jack 1 or leo External Music Source 1 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Background Music BGM External Music on Hold Installation 2 21 2 3 7 Printer Connection
135. or VOLUME v You can move in reverse order from 008 to 007 etc by pressing the SKP or VOLUME 4 This method can also be used to move between neighboring program groups For example you can move between the program addresses 008 and 100 116 and 200 and so on Also you can move between the smallest program address 000 and the largest one 991 Program addresses 7000 through 7824 are arranged between 626 and 800 Method 2 is useful when you wish to jump to another program address For example you have just finished with program 006 and now you want to go to program 301 Neither SKP VOLUME v nor SKP VOLUME A is convenient in this case So you should press END and enter 301 Note The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode and that you will use Method 2 Confirming the entries You may review the stored programming without making any changes Going back to the operation mode Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode 1 Lift the handset while in programming mode 2 When the Initial Message SYS PGM NO is displayed press the PROGRAM or PAUSE button To display the Initial Message press END 4 8 System Programming 4 1 3 Entering Characters You can enter characters to store names or messages by using the dialing key pad buttons or the Jog Dial See the Combination Tables below Combination Tables N
136. page e Page length lines 4 through 99 e Skip perforation lines 0 through 95 Page length 66 Skip perforation 0 1 Enter 801 Display SMDR Format 2 Press NEXT to program page length Display example Page Length 66 3 Enter the page length To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new page length 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program skip perforation Display example Skip Perf 0 6 Enter the skip perforation To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new skip perforation he Press STORE 8 Press END e The page length should be four lines or more longer than the skip perforation length e A title is positioned on the first three lines on every page e The programmed format becomes valid only if the EIA RS 232C cable is connected If a printer is already connected disconnect it and connect again Otherwise the former format becomes valid Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 4 158 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 802 System Data Printout Description Starts or stops printing of the system data All the current system programmed data is printed out Selection Start Stop Default Not applicable Programming 1 Enter 802 Display System Data Dump 2 Press NEXT Display PEINE OUt Start 3 Press STORE to start printing Printing starts To stop printing in the middle of printing press SELECT and go to
137. press NEXT Display example TRG1 96msec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You may disable EFA if not required The Recall feature will be in effect in place of EFA Program 414 Disconnect Time is used to select the time required for the Recall feature e The register recall signal time required is determined by the central office or the host PBX lines e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features External Feature Access Recall 4 100 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 414 Disconnect Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Determines the amount of time between successive accesses to the same CO line e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Time seconds 0 5 2 0 4 0 All CO line groups 2 0 s 1 Enter 414 Display TRG Discnct Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To program CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display exampl
138. pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e The DTMF time required is determined by the CO line or PBX line Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection 4 92 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on incoming outside calls If this is programmed the system disconnects the line when the CPC Signal is detected e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Time milliseconds Disable no detection 02 through 75 Xx 8 is the actual time See the table on the following page All CO lines 44 352 ms 1 Enter 405 Display CPC Detection 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Enter the time or press CLEAR to selec
139. product may cause radio interference in which case 92 31 EEC the user may be required to take adequate measures 93 68 EEC Introduction This Installation Manual provides technical information for the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD816 KX TD1232 It is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the system and includes a description of the system its hardware and software features and services and environmental requirements This manual contains the following sections Section 1 System Outline Provides general information on the system including system capacity and specifications Section 2 Installation Contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions as well as how to install the optional cards and units Section 3 Features Describes all the basic optional and programmable features in alphabetical order It also provides information about the programming required conditions connection references related features and operation for every feature Section 4 System Programming Provides step by step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone Section 5 List Lists tone ring tone and default values of system programming Section 6 Troubleshooting Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting Section 7 PRI Section Provides information on using the Primary Rate Interface PRI ISDN line with the optional expansion unit Section 8 DECT P
140. programmed Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line basis The digital PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each L CO button by system or station programming Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming cccccceeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Loop CO L CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line Line Access Direct LED Indication CO Line Ringing Delayed Features 3 15 B 3 Features Line Access Automatic Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Operation References Basic Operation User Manual Making Calls Receiving Calls DPT Features Outward Dialling Line Access Automatic Button Single CO S CO Description A Single CO S CO button is a CO line access button This allows the proprietary telephone user to access a specific line by pressing an S CO button An incoming call can be directed to an S CO button Conditions e The default setting for CO buttons is changeable Flexible CO Button e An S CO button provides CO line status e It is possible to assign one CO li
141. sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Toll Restriction 4 76 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 208 Inter Digit Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing toll call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF receiver is released This timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed Time seconds 5 through 30 10s 1 Enter 208 Display Inter Digit Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Toll Restriction System Programming 4 77 209 4 4 Timer Programming Automatic Redial Repeat Times Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of times Automatic Redial is tried Automatic redialling of the last dialled or saved number is done up to the specified number of times Number of times 1 through 12 4 times 1 Enter 209 Display Redial Times 2 Press NE
142. selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Some central offices CO may send CPC like signals during the dialling sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated If your CO is such a type select Disable e Program 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set is used to set CPC Signal Detection Time e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 4 102 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 416 Reverse Circuit Assignment Description Enables or disables to detect Reverse Circuit Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Regular no detection Reverse detection Default All CO lines Regular Programming 1 Enter 416 Display Reverse Circuit 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Regular 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is disp
143. system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals such as a mailbox 01 1 0s Integration number to VPS after VPS answers a call 10 1 5s 11 2 0s 8 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals programmed in 01 1 0s Integration 113 to VPS after the VPS calls an 10 1 5s extension 11 2 0s 9 Assigns whether the system turns off the 0 system 0 e Message Message Waiting lamp or the VPS does 1 VPS Waiting when the user hears a message recorded in e Voice Mail a mailbox Integration 10 Assigns whether the system starts the 0 do not start 0 Voice Mail Automated Attendant Service or notifan 1 start Integration outside call is directed to VPS by Call Forwarding or Intercept Routing If start is assigned the AA SVC code programmed in program 114 is transmitted to the voice mail port and the Follow On ID function does not work 4 170 System Programming 4 11 Option Programming System Additional Information contd 990 Area Field Description Selection Default References 1 49 Enables or disables the CO Pulse feedback 0 disable 0 Dial Type tone 1 enable Selection 50 Selects the destination during the day 0 DIL 1 N 0 Direct Dialling mode when operator number is sent as a 1 Operator In DDI Direct Dialling In number 51 Selects the destination during the night 0 DIL 1 N 0
144. talk to a caller without lifting the handset if the user has set handsfree answerback mode If the user receives an intercom call in the mode handsfree conversation is established immediately after the user hears beep tone and the caller hears confirmation tone e Handsfree answerback mode is set or cancelled by pressing the AUTO ANSWER button e This feature does not work for calls from outside parties or doorphone calls e Handsfree Answerback set on a telephone overrides the Ring Voice Intercom Alerting mode preset on the telephone Handsfree conversation mode is established as soon as confirmation tone is sent e Handsfree answerback mode is overridden and a ring tone is heard when an outside call is transferred to the extension where the mode is set Programming Reference Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required Section 3 Features Alternate Calling Ring Voice DPT Features Handsfree Answerback Handsfree Operation Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to dial and to talk to the other party without lifting the handset Pressing an appropriate button provides handsfree mode e This function can be utilized by pressing a button listed below when the SP PHONE MONITOR button indicator is off SP PHONE button MONITOR button INTERCOM button CO button e The KX T7050 and the KX T7250 can be used for handsfree dialling operations etc but c
145. the External Pager modem Digital Test Access DTA and Hunting Groups These numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access Selection e Floating station KX TD816 Pager1 Pager2 DTA Hunting Groups 01 through 32 KX TD1232 Pager1 Pager2 Pager3 Pager4 MODEM DTA Hunting Groups 01 through 32 e Floating number 2 through 4 digits Default KX TD816 Pager 1 296 Pager 2 297 DTA 299 Hunting Groups 01 through 32 Not stored KX TD1232 Pager 1 296 Pager 2 297 Pager 3 396 Pager 4 397 MODEM 399 DTA 299 Hunting Groups 01 through 32 Not stored Programming 1 Enter 813 Display FLT EXT NO 2 Press NEXT to program Pager 1 Display example Pagerl EXT296 To program another floating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 3 Enter a floating number To program no floating number press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new floating number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another floating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A floating number is composed of two to four numerical digits 0 through 9 Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 165 813 4 10 Resource Programming Floating Number Assignment contd e The leading one or two digits of the flo
146. the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number Repeat steps 4 through 7 Press END e There is a maximum of sixteen extension groups Each extension can belong to more than one group e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 of the Installation manual e To assign all jacks to one extension group press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Section 3 Features Call Pickup Group Extension Group Paging Group 4 128 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Description Selection Default Programming A DIL 1 N line can be assigned to ring more than one extension All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to the specified extensions These programs assign the extensions and the notification method for each CO line in both day and night modes e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Disab disable Immd
147. the multiple subscriber When Point is assigned the call reaches to the extension with DDI contract Section 3 Features Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Night Service 4 113 3 System Programming Page left blank for future upgrade s 500 501 4 7 COS Programming Toll Restriction Level Day Night Description Each extension must be assigned a Class of Service COS These programs set the toll restriction value for each COS in day or night mode Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Level number 1 through 8 Default All COS Level 1 Day Night Programming 1 Enter a program address 500 for day or 501 for night Display example TRS Level Day 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 1 4 Enter a level number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Feature References Section 3 Features Night Service Toll Restriction 4 114 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming
148. the new message 5 Press STORE 6 To program another message press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired message number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of nine messages Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed Each message has a maximum of 16 characters You can enter a maximum of seven characters per message which can be programmed at each user s station The station user can enter 0 through 9 and for the characters If the user enters digits less than the number of characters it is recommended to fill the remaining characters with or Xx If there are 4 digit extension numbers available in your system add one to Message 3 e To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display press a gt or lt m Section 3 Features Absent Message Capability 4 28 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 009 Quick Dial Number Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Stores up to eighty quick dial numbers e Location number 01 through 80 e Desired quick dial number 16 digits max All locations Not Stored 1 Enter 009 Display Quick Dial 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a
149. to select the internal or external music source by system programming e The music is interrupted while off hooked Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 6 External Music Source Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Field 20 3 8 Features 3 Features B Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 3 Features Music on Hold DPT Features Background Music BGM Background Music BGM External Description Conditions Connection References Background music BGM can be broadcasted in your office through external pagers The BGM can be turned on and off by the operator only e It is required to connect an external pager and an external music source The pager and the music source are user supplied items Up to two pagers and up to two external music sources can be installed per system e Each pager can be programmed to send BGM or not e For Music Source 1 it is possible to select the internal or external music source by system programming e Priority of access to external pager is 1 TAFAS 2 Paging 3 BGM Higher priorities will override BGM Section 2 Installation 2 3 5 External Pager Connection 2 3 6 External Music Source Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering
150. type Connection and DSS Console Connection 6 pin plug Secondary socket l Terminal wire TST Ea gt rm ow 4 3 2 5 d Installation 2 13 2 3 2 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 2 Digital Proprietary Telephone Connection and SLT Connection 6 pin plug Master socket Terminal wire a A 4B s H A 2 ces a Programming References Section 4 System Programming 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features DSS Console Note After completing all the required inside cabling including CO lines extensions external pagers and external music sources fasten the cables with the nylon tie included as shown 2 14 Installation 2 3 3 Parallelled Telephone Connection for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone Method 1 4 conductor wiring cord For DPT Connect pins L and necessary For APT Connect pins A B D b and H H only A and B are not gt For DPT Master Master socket socket t E Note A single line telephone can be connected in parallel with any proprietary telephone as follows 2 conductor wiring cord Connect pins A
151. 0 eee ceeeeeseeeeeecneecnseeeees PRI System Programming cccsccccsssccssssccsssccssscsssssssssssssseesees 450 PREC Oni gurqtioncaictcastgeniedensta tag anatase eee eaeast 451 PRI Referenc CO isco Rieti s Poetic Se iis DECT Portable Station Section QV VOLVIOVE AEA E E E EEEE E sus cons E Wireless System Installation soesssesssesesocesooesoosesscsssccssocesoosssosesse 8 2 1 Wireless System Outline 222922 ecnii a acerca adie 8 2 2 Site PLANTING sousca ina sdesaangas A R lonsdanasueead cousananees 8 2 3 Location of the Umit sess ccasaccesasscvsastawertcdasdecabenspaeasvaieenecessnceedes 8 2 4 Installing the UNit eii in nii Ra ata edee 8 2 SIE S TVE Gee ese Ged ects ea eee oe ERT TEE R ARET 8 2 0 Wal NiO WINGS v neia a a a E A a Es DECT Portable Station Features eesesseseoseesessossesossossescosoesoseoss Digital Wireless Connection ssssssessseessssessseessressereseeessseesseesseessee Call DineCtOry nonnii e i ee Ne i PS Programa eonen E EREA A E REA Super EXtra Device Port SXDP eeeseseeesesrseserersresresrrrsresseseresresss DECT PS System Programming seeesooessocssocessecssccesocesooeesseessecssese DECT PS System Programming Conditions s 020 PS Flexible CO Button Assignment sssesseeessseesseessessseseseee 650 PS Registration asien NEE E R E AEAEE 651 PS Term aO a a A E O 653 PS Extension Name Set ccccccccscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesseees 654
152. 0 calls all extensions on the ISDN SO bus simultaneously e Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available 4 32 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming O12 ISDN Extension Number Set conta Feature References e An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits disagree with the setting of the program 100 Flexible Numbering Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have one through three digits If two digits are assigned some have three digits Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment of programs 003 Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment and 813 Floating Number Assignment Valid entry examples 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry examples 10 and 106 210 and 21 Program 013 ISDN Extension Name Set is used to give names to the extension numbers Section 3 Features ISDN Extension System Programming 4 33 013 4 2 Manager Programming ISDN Extension Name Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns names to the ISDN extension numbers programmed in program 012 ISDN Extension Number Set e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 throu
153. 1 Enter 101 Display Day Night Mode 2 Press NEXT Display example D N Mode Manual 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e If automatic switching is assigned day night mode is switched at the time programmed in 102 Day Night Service Starting Time e The pre assigned extension and the operator can switch the day night mode at any time Section 3 Features Night Service System Programming 4 39 102 4 3 System Programming Day Night Service Starting Time Description Selection Default Programming Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis when automatic day night switching is programmed in program 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode e Day of the week selection number 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday every day of the week Hour 1 through 12 Disable no switching e Minute 0 through 59 AM PM Every day of the week Day 9 00 AM Night 5 00 PM 1 Enter 102 Display Day Night Time 2 Press NEXT Display Day of Week gt 3 Enter the day of the week selection number To select Sunday you can also press NEXT Display example Sun Day 9 00 AM To select night mode press NEXT Display example Sun Nig 5 00 PM 4 Enter the hour To set no switching keep pressing SELECT until Di
154. 1 Radio waves are reflected by objects such as those made of metal 2 Radio waves are diffracted by objects such as metallic columns 3 Radio waves penetrate objects such as those made of glass DECT Portable Station Section 8 5 8 2 2 Site Planning The Relationship between Radio Waves and Building Structure and Materials OBJECT e The transmitting range is affected more by the building materials and thickness of the material than the number of obstacles e Radio waves tend to be reflected or diffracted by conductive objects and rarely penetrate them e Radio waves tend to penetrate insulated objects and are rarely reflected by them e Radio waves penetrate thin objects more than thick objects e The table below shows the transmission tendency of radio waves when they reach objects made from various materials MATERIAL TRANSMISSION TENDENCY Wall Concrete Ferroconcrete The thicker they are the less radio waves penetrate them Radio waves can penetrate them but the more iron there is the more radio waves are reflected Window Glass Glass with wire nets Glass covered with heat resistant film Radio waves usually penetrate them Radio waves can penetrate them but tend to be reflected Radio waves are weakened considerably when they penetrate windows Floor Ferroconcrete Radio waves can penetrate them but the more iron there is the more radio waves are reflected Partition
155. 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e CO09 through CO16 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD816 and CO25 through CO54 become available when the expansion unit KX TD290 is installed in the KX TD1232 e There is a maximum of 24 names Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COOl1 Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Display 4 106 System Programming 46 COLine Programming 422 ISDN Port Type Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the type of each port either CO line or extension line on ISDN port basis e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 x all ports KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 all ports e CO CO line Extension All ports CO 1 Enter 422 Display ISDN Line Type 2 Press NEXT Display Port N
156. 11 427 4 6 CO Line Programming ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Selects whether the Multiple Subscriber Number is allocated to each terminal equipment on ISDN SO bus or not on ISDN port basis e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 x x all ports KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 x x all ports e Enable Disable no number All ports Disable 1 Enter 427 Display MSN Service 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display example 03 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To assign all ports to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port e After this assignment you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective Section 3 Features ISDN Extension 4 112 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 428 ISDN Extension Progress Tone Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature R
157. 113 1 438 439 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN MSN 000 eee ceseeeeeeeeneeeeeenseeeees 4 113 2 COS Programmi ne 5455 isscsscidesis oevevssaveissvaevsvicwcabuaacedesoxssansostdveceseveesess 4 114 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night eee 4 114 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 0000 cee 4 115 503 Call Transfer to CO Line aani 4 116 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line 00 eee eeececeeceeceseeeeeeeeeesteeeeaees 4 117 507 Do Not Disturb Override cccccccccecescesseeseeesssssesesssssssessseeees 4 118 508 Account Code Entry Mode ceeeccesscecsscceesseceesscceeneeeeeeees 4 119 509 510 Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling Day Night ee eeeeeeeeteee 4 120 SLA Door Opener ACCESS neinn e cance syacssavav a ia 4 121 513 Night Service Access ash cachsassescanstartede ha decdtesgorgeeeds teseatamumeaesenrs 4 122 514 Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call eee 4 123 516 Calling Line Identification Restriction eeeeeeseeeeeteeeees 4 124 517 Connected Line Identification Restriction cceceeeereees 4 125 0 518 CFU CFB CENR ASS niments aise cadecuinatisrae ates 4 125 1 519 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA c cccccccceseserseeeees 4 125 2 Extension Programming cssccssssccssssccssssccsssccsssssssssssssssssssescees 4 126 600 EXtra Device Potteria nnna n EA ENEN 4 126 601 Class OF S
158. 2 54 Installation 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time KX TD1232 a E _System Clear Te RE am X Switch q S H Eaj NORMAL Al m RESET a AY Reset Button Co D e 54m E m j q L gt To AC Outlet Power Indicator Notes After pressing the Reset button slide the system clear switch to NORMAL at step 6 while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds Otherwise the system does not start up with the default values When System Connection is executed the system will not accept incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after sliding the system clear switch to NORMAL The system needs time to establish the LCR data CAUTION Once you start up the system and if you turn the power off do not perform the above procedures to start the system again Otherwise your programmed data is cleared To start the system just turn the power switch on Installation 2 55 Leh System Restart Notes If after checking the system features you determine that the system is not operating properly restart the system Keep
159. 2 only 3 Features S Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 7 Printer Connection Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 000 Date and Time Set 212 Call Duration Count Start Time 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 801 SMDR Format 802 System Data Printout 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 990 System Additional Information Field 53 eS i U E aa E None Operation References Not applicable Station Programming Description Allows the proprietary telephone PT user to customize the extension to their needs The following are the programming items available For the PT KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7130 KX T7020 KX T7050 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Flexible Button Assignment Full One Touch Dialling Assignment Intercom Alerting Assignment Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Outgoing Station Programming Data Default Set For digital PT KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 only Handset Headset Selection Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls For display PT KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7130 only Charge Fee Reference pre assigned extensions only Self Extension Number Confirmation For digital large display PT KX T7
160. 2 rings nx100 ms n 0 40 1 64 min 0 240 s 3 48 rings 0 64 min O0 8s 6 11s 0 60s 5 120s 5 305 3 48 rings 0 5 2 0 4 0s Disable 80 96 112 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 ms 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5s nx8 ms n 02 75 96 160 ms Disable Immediate 2 4 6 8 rings No ring 80 160 ms 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0s 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0s 3 140 Features 3 Features Feature References Operation References Timed Reminder Description Conditions 205 207 208 209 210 212 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time First Digit Time Inter Digit Time Automatic Redial Repeat Times Automatic Redial Interval Time Call Duration Count Start Time 214 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 215 Ring Off Detection Time 404 DTMF Time 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 412 Pause Time 413 Register Recall Signal Time 414 Disconnect Time 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 990 System Additional Information Fields 6 through 8 Hee Gece a ed a a a ed None Not applicable Each telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset time as a wake up or reminder This feature can be programmed to be active only once or every day e Be sure that the system clock works e Setting a new time clears the preset time e The alarm tone continues for 30 seconds To stop it lift the handset or wi
161. 23456789 A CD Hold D B OK E Coe Redial C GE Book F Ce Flash tons Example 6 Press Talk CS NO 1 8 e The assignment is completed 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to assign other Cell Station ID numbers 8 Press Transfer to return to the initial FUNCT TONZOo4 gt display DECT Portable Station Section 8 19 8 2 5 Site Survey Unplugging the Cable from the Cell Station After assigning the Cell Station ID number to the PS unplug the cable from the Cell Station once 8 20 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 5 Site Survey DIP Switch Setting After unplugging the Cell Station once set the DIP Switch as fol lows 1 Switch the Radio Signal Test Switch from OFF to ON 2 Set the Channel Number Switches as desired DIP Switch Channel Number Switch Radio Signal Default Channel 0 Test Switch a a E E E EE OEP ie OO a S 1 Oe 1 2 3 4 5 6 E m E E Channel 1 mm mm m Channel 4 gy E Channel 7 gy 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 m DJ fm yf df
162. 28 Installation 242 CO Line Connection Optional Card Card Installation for KX TD1232 To connect CO 1 through CO 8 install the optional 8 CO Line Card KX TD181 To connect four ISDN SO lines CO 1 through CO 8 install the optional 4 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD281 1 Insert the upper end of the 8 CO Line Card or 4 ISDN SO Line Card into the two hooks on the main unit 2 Press the two corners at the lower end of the Card 3 Fix the card with an accessory screw at the lower right corner 4 Connect the cord to the connector 4 ISDN SO Line Card CO Line Expansion Card nt v d yd Cie i eee m MADA y e an Cos Peres Mi 4 pin Connector X 1 on the lower board Wire Specifications In making a CO line connection use twisted pair cable for installation The wire specifications for CO lines are as follows Wire Solid wire Diameter of conductor 0 4 0 65 mm Diameter including coating 0 66 1 05 mm Notes e Incase of starting the system for the first time or System Data Clear the application for location will adapt the practical installation instead of system default setting e System Programming is required for location identification Refer to Section 4 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Default CO Line Expansion Unit Installation 2 29
163. 3 4 2 Manager Programming Extension Number Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Assigns an extension number to each extension e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Extension Number 2 through 4 digits KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 201 through 216 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 301 through 316 KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 201 through 264 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 301 through 364 1 Enter 003 Display EXT Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 EXT201 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX TD816 and 128 extension numbers for KX TD1232 Each extension number can be two three or four digits consisting of 0 through 9 The and keys cannot be used e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available 4 20 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 003 Extension Numb
164. 3 KX T7436 only See Combination Table 1 1 Press 6 M belongs to 6 e The Function Line shows M N O 2 Press the Soft 1 M button Press SHIFT to display the lower case of the above letters 2 Using the SELECT button See Combination Table 1 1 Press 6 M belongs to 6 2 Press the SELECT button once e Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of times gives you the desired letter Pressing SELECT twice gives the letter m pressing three times gives N and so on 3 Using the Jog Dial for KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 only See Combination Table 2 1 Press 6 M belongs to 6 2 Rotate the Jog Dial one pulse e Rotating the Jog Dial an appropriate number of pulses gives you the desired letter Rotating the Jog Dial two pulses gives the letter m rotating three pulses gives N and so on OR 1 Press any dialing keypad 2 Rotate the Jog Dial until the desired character appears e If you keep rotating the Jog Dial all of the characters will be displayed For example If you rotate the Jog Dial after pressing 2 characters will appear in the following order AaBb Z z space lt gt amp AaBb 4 10 System Programming 4 1 3 Entering Characters Example of entering characters to enter Mike Using method 1 See Combination Table 1 The
165. 3 Features Buttons on Proprietary Telephones DSS Console Operation References Not applicable Button Group CO G CO Description To support efficient utilization of CO lines a group of CO lines CO line group can be assigned to a CO button The function is referred to as Group CO G CO The G CO button works in conjunction with the DIL 1 N feature Any incoming call from any CO line in the CO line group arrives at the G CO button To make an outside call the user can access an idle CO line in the group by simply pressing the dedicated G CO button Conditions e No G CO button is originally provided on a proprietary telephone PT It is programmable on a CO button by either system or station programming It is needed to program the extension for receiving and or originating calls on CO lines e It is possible to assign the same CO line group to more than one G CO buttons on the same PT e It is possible to assign the same line to an S CO button and to a G CO button e Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line basis e The digital PT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each G CO button by system or station programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 401 CO Line Group Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606
166. 3 126 0 System Speed Dialling iieii r e oea eiT ees 3 126 1 Station Feature Clear ia ee aa a E E E A O 3 127 Station UUM D522 on cada co5s cenca eth a E E a A E RAE 3 128 0 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR sseeseeeeesererrrrresreee 3 129 Station Programming sinnen oranie a e E a ih 3 131 Station Programming Data Default Set ee eeeeeeeeeeneeeteeneee 3 132 Station Speed Dialling yids Aaa eed a eee ea eah 3 133 System A ONG CMON so raiu o ia ht iis E RERE 3 134 System Data Default Seti cedon e e ts a e E S 3 135 System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 3 135 System Programming with Proprietary Telephone ceeeeeees 3 136 System Speed Dialling cio 342 seccoisscatunsvastenssoecatuaeteaesl aaeen RES 3 137 System Working Re POI soi sess ieee esos san dees aeees ssdatnaya Sue nsntieees 3 138 Terminated e e unease sammaunat A ATS 3 139 Time O t Variable vvcccsdsscccsccuaceesseceeocdcceaveesesdecseceseacessecsvesseeeateessedes 3 139 Timed R mindet see r padi osanse anh e E a A 3 141 Available for KX TD1232 only 13 Installation Manual Contents W Section 4 4 1 4 2 POUR Str CO sca ge A ended ged Seta eda ea descend sega Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry eeen Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialling Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS eee Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail seeen Uniform Call Distribution UCD cc
167. 3 through 48 12 rings 1 Enter 201 Display Transfer Recall 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension System Programming 4 7 202 4 4 Timer Programming Call Forwarding No Answer Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding No Answer feature If a call is not answered before the programmed number of rings the call is forwarded to the destination Number of rings 1 through 12 3 rings 1 Enter 202 Display No Answer Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 3 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e This timer is also used for Intercept Routing e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding No Answer 4 72 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 203 Intercept Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings for t
168. 4 e The display shows the Initial Message SYS PGM NO gt Note e If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button substitute it with the PAUSE button e If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM or PAUSE button is pressed it is cancelled e The System Password entered is not shown on the display The System Password can be changed by System Programming Refer to Section 4 3 107 System Password e During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension e Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 4 6 System Programming 4 1 2 Programming Ways Advancing to the next stage When SYS PGM NO gt is displayed you can select one of the following e To go to program 000 press the NEXT button e To go to another program enter the 3 digit program address Rotation of jack number Each jack of the Digital Super Hybrid System supports the connection of a digital proprietary telephone and a single line device with different extension numbers eXtra Device Port XDP function To program this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each jack The first part of jack one is 01 1 The second part of jack one is 01 2 The first part of jack two is 02 1 and so on The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack to jack as required in programs 003 004 601 through 609 611 612 621 and 623 Example NEXT N
169. 4 CO Line Unit or 1 1 2 2 ISDN SO Line Unit CO Line 8 12 24 ISDN SO Line 4 6 12 8 Station Line Unit 1 2 4 Extension Jack 16 32 64 Station Terminal 32 64 128 including DSS Consoles DSS Console 4 4 8 Remote Card 1 2 Doorphone 2 2 4 Door Opener 2 2 4 External Pager 2 2 4 External Music Source 2 2 4 1 12 System Outline 15 Specifications System Data Item Max Quantity Operator J System Speed Dialling 500 One Touch Dialling 24 per station proprietary telephone Station Speed Dialling 10 per station Call Park 10 Absent Message 9 CO Line Group Toll Restriction Level 8 Extension Group 16 Class of Service 8 Message Waiting 128 1 5 4 Ports Port type classification PORT NAME BRIEF DESCRIPTION PORT TYPE EXTN PORT CONNECT TO ITS SLT 1AS PSTN PORT CONNECT TO NETWORK PAI ISDN 2 PORT CONNECT TO DIGITAL NETWORK PD1 PAGING PORT i EXTERNAL PAGING 4F EXT MUSIC PORT EXTERNAL MUSIC 4F BATTERY PORT CONNECT TO KX A46 4C DOORPHONE PORT CONNECT TO KX T30865 4E DOOR OPENER PORT DOOR OPENER 4F These ports do not respond to address signalling These ports provide DTMF and Loop Disconnect Signalling System Outline 1 13 15 Specifications Port types between which call paths can be established TO EXT PSTN PAGING EXT MUSIC DOOR Battery DOOR ISDN 2 FROM PHONE OPENER EXTN A A A X A X X A PSTN A A X X X X X X PAGING X X X X X X X X EXT MUSIC A A A
170. 4 are for the Slave if available System Programming 4 89 402 4 6 CO Line Programming Dial Mode Selection conta e To assign all lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 If DTMF is assigned set the DTMF time of the line in program 404 DTMF Time e If pulse or call blocking is assigned set the pulse speed of the line in program 403 Pulse Speed Selection and set the pulse break ratio and inter digit pause in program 990 System Additional Information Field 17 and in Field 21 if needed Feature References Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection 4 90 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 403 Pulse Speed Selection Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References A CO line set for pulse or call blocking mode in program 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two pulse rates 10 pps low and 20 pps high This program sets the pulse speed for each CO line set to pulse or call blocking mode CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e 10 pps 20 pps All CO lines 10 pps 1 Enter 403 Display Pulse Speed 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 10pps 4 Keep pressin
171. 424 ISDN Configuration Used for Extension only 4 Version 4 00 PROGRAM VERSION 3 STEP Extension Group Assignment 603 604 Ringing DIL 1 N As Version 4 Day Night DDI Number Transformation Refer to program step 618 613 ISDN Extension COS 1 DESCRIPTION 615 616 O G Permitted ISDN Extension As Version 4 Pie Wee e 618 ISDN DDI Number Extension Number As Version 4 eee ere ISDN DDI Number ISDN Extension Number As Version 4 fee ee Extension Intercept Routing Day Extension Intercept Routing Night Incoming Call Display CLIP CLOP Number Assignment 6 6 6 CLIP CLOP Number Assignment for ISDN As Version 4 Eo eee 6 6 6 622 623 650 PSRegistration ENA N A not available 9 0 2 0 2 2 2 2 2 5 2 3 3 Version 4 00 VERSION 2 As Version 4 Includes Group Ringing Assignment As Version 4 Refer to program step 618 As Version 4 As Version 4 As Version 4 As Version 4 As Version 4 As Version 4 Refer to program step 112 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 1 Group max per Extn Panasonic VERSION 1 One Class of Service only No Primary Secondary COS Includes Group Ringing Assignment 1 Group max per Extn 2 ring delay N A Maximum length 6 digits Not programmable Station Feature only Refer to program step 610 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION STEP 7001 DELETED m LCR Area Leading Di
172. 431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7235 only Station Speed Dialling Number Name Assignment Features 3 131 S 3 Features For operator extension PT only CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock Clear Live Call Screening Password Control Remote Station Lock Control Detailed information and programming instructions are described in the User Manual Station Programming Conditions During Station Programming the PT is considered to be in busy status Programming References Station Programming 0cccccceeceseeeeeeneeeeenteenseees User Manual Operator Service Features cccccccesceesseesteeteeeteees User Manual CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock Clear Live Call Screening Password Control Remote Station Lock Control Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Station Programming Data Default Set Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to return all the following items programmed on the telephone to default setting Programming Items Default Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Tone 1 Full One Touch Dialling Assignment On Handset Headset Selection Handset Intercom Alerting Assignment Tone Call Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Ringing Line Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Intercom Line Station programming is used to set or cancel these items at individual telephones Conditions None Programming References Station Programming ccccceeccesee
173. 5 2 Default Values Programming References Feature References No programming required None Operation References Section 2 Installation 2 8 System Data Clear System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Description This system can be programmed and administered using a personal computer The EIA Remote Programming amp Diagnosis floppy is required to perform this feature The KX TD816 cannot perform the diagnosis There are two programming methods On Site Programming By connecting a personal computer PC to your system system programming and maintenance can be performed locally There are two ways available to perform the above Method 1 Using the EIA RS 232C port Connect the PC to the EIA RS 232C port provided The main unit has an EIA RS 232C port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR Method 2 Using a modem Install the optional Remote Card Connect the PC to an extension jack Assign the floating number of the modem in system programming Dial this number from the PC Remote Programming You can perform system programming and maintenance from a remote site using a PC Install the Remote Card and assign the floating number of the modem in system programming Starting system administration from a remote location can be done in the following ways Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 135 S 3 Features e Call an extension probably the operator
174. 8 Extension Programming 601 Class of Service Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Programs each extension for a Class of Service COS The COS determines the call handling abilities of each extension A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per extension e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e COS number 1 through 8 All jacks 1 2 COS 1 COS 1 1 Enter 601 Display COS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 COS1 COS1 4 Enter a COS number for primary number To change the current entry enter the new number Press gt 6 Enter a COS number for secondary number To change the current entry enter the new number Press STORE To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END e There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services Every extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming of programs 500 through 519 and 991 The restriction of program 991 field 1 applies only for analogue outside lines In the case of KX TD1232 jack n
175. 816 0 KX TD1232 0 Master 1 Slave Not applicable 1 Enter 116 Display ROM Version Press NEXT Display System NO gt Enter the System Number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system To confirm the other system press SELECT and enter the System Number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system Press END e The out of service system number is unacceptable e For KX TD816 you can enter the system number 0 only Skip step None 4 56 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 117 Charge Display Selection Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Selects the display format used for charge display Pulse Pound Pound 1 Enter 117 Display Charge Meter 2 Press NEXT Display example Pulse 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END None Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference Display Call Information System Programming 4 57 LIS 4 3 System Programming Charge Fee Reference Extension Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns extensions that can refer to charges e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 x all jacks KX TD1232 01 through 64 x all jacks e Enable Disable All jacks Enable 1 Enter 118 Display Charge Refer Ex
176. 86 VM 23 287 VM 24 288 1 Enter 127 Display VM EXT NO Set 2 Press NEXT Display VM NO gt 3 Enter a voice mail number To enter voice mail number 01 you can also press NEXT Display VM 01 02 1 265 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To program another voice mail number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired voice mail number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END You cannot leave an entry empty For the KX TD1232 VM 01 through VM 12 are for the Master system and VM 13 through VM 24 are for the Slave system if available Double entries and incompatible entries for extension numbers are invalid To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers in programs 003 Extension Number Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment and 813 Floating Number Assignment The display shows VM XX Y Y 1 ZZZ in step 3 XX means the voice mail number YY means the jack number of the voice mail port programmed in 126 Voice Mail Number Assignment 1 of YY 1 means the first part of jack number in digital line YY 2 means the second number of the jack number in digital line Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones f Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Sys
177. A Conditions e Class of Service programming determines which extensions are able to perform this feature e You can select receiving Call Waiting tone Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA or none of these at your extension However the setting may change depending on each telephone setting or the telephone type as listed below Calling Party s Called party s call waiting mode OHCA OFF ON COS mode 0 Cancel 1 Call Waiting 2 OHCA 3 Whisper OHCA Disable Call Waiting disabled Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA OHCA Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Enable default Call Waiting disabled Call Waiting tone lt Example gt If the user selects 3 Whisper OHCA mode If using the KX T7400 series telephone handset Whisper OHCA If using the KX T7400 series telephone SP PHONE Call Waiting tone Othe E S E Call Waiting tone If the Whisper OHCA sender does not use a KX T7400 series telephone it will work as OHCA If the receiver does not use a KX T7400 series telephone the announcement may also be heard by the other party It is possible to enable the Whisper OHCA by any telephone by system programming However it may not work properly E g the announcement may be heard by the other party Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call waiting 519 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA
178. AC Cord one one Templet one one Screw three four Pager Connector two two Music Source Connector two two Expansion line cord holder one one 6 pin plugs for extension connection eight sixteen 4 pin plugs for doorphone or door opener connection two two Overlay one one 2 2 2 Name and Location Overview of the Main Unit Power Indicator sta AC Inlet EIA RS 232C Connector ere Earth Terminal Battery Adaptor LI Connector Earth Terminal EIA RS 232C Connector Battery Adaptor j E Connector Power Switch D AC Inlet Power Switch Power Indicator 2 4 Installation 22 Installation of the Main Unit Inside View of the Main Unit KX TD816 Extension Connectors _ Paging Jack 2 Paging Jack 1 External Music Jack 2 External Music Jack 1 System Clear Switch Reset Button Door Opener and Doorphone Connectors iG E ri ce iag e O Front Cover KX TD1232 Door Opener and Doorphone Co
179. After pressing the Reset button return the system clear switch to NORMAL at step 3 while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds Otherwise the system is not cleared e When System Connection is executed the system will not accept incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after returning the system clear switch to NORMAL The system needs time to establish the LCR data Installation 2 57 Section 3 Features This section describes every basic optional and programmable features in alphabetical order It also provides information about the conditions connection references programming required related features and operation for every feature A 3 Features Absent Message Capability Description Once set this option provides a message on the display of the calling extension to show the reason for the called extension s absence Nine messages can be programmed as desired which are available for every extension user There are six pre programmed default messages Setting or cancelling a message can be done by individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone can receive the message Conditions e Six default messages which are changeable are shown below The means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at individual extension 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext WP extension number 4 Back at hour minute 5 Out Until
180. Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Note If connection is made using a TJF Test Jack Frame ensure the maximum cable length between the TJF and the point on entry into the CO card is less than 30 m minimum distance 0 m Installation 2 31 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional cara 4 ISDN S0 Line Connection with KX TD281 2 ISDN S0 Line Connection with KX TD282 Preparation Connection Use 4 pin plugs included to connect ISDN SO lines There are two plugs to connect two ISDN SO lines for KX TD816 and four plugs to connect four ISDN SO lines for KX TD1232 A single plug is able to connect one ISDN SO line Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 2 Connection before connection For KX TD281 only Not necessary for KX TD282 1 Take the appropriate jumper cover out of the first and second pins from the left on the jumper of the P board S0 side Jumper 1 for Port number 03 Jumper 2 for Port number 04 2 Cover the jumper cover on the first and second pins from the right on the jumper of the P board EXT side Jumper 1 O i eE 1x4d lt 0S F SO External Jumper 2 EXT Internal b st slo xil o t gt t Bly Ble Use 4 pin plugs included to connect ISDN SO lines A single plug is able to connect one ISDN SO line Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly
181. B wire H High 2 12 Installation 2 3 2 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 Digital Proprietary Telephone Connection With the KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 and KX T7250 model digital proprietary telephones 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins L and H only A and B are only needed for Paralleled Telephone or XDP operation Single Line Telephone Connection With the single line telephones 2 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins A and B DSS Console Connection Notes Station Wiring A maximum of four DSS Consoles models KX T7440 KX T7441 KX T7240 or KX T7040 can be installed per system The DSS Console must be connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone System Programming is required to designate paired jack numbers of DSS Consoles and proprietary telephones With the KX T7440 KX T7441 KX T7240 and KX T7040 model DSS Consoles 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins L and H only A and B are not necessary If a telephone or answering machine with an A A1 relay is connected to the main unit set the A A1 relay switch of the telephone or answering machine to OFF position 1 Proprietary Telephone analogue
182. CB m 6 DR DSR CC 8 CD DCD CF Printer IBM Personal Computer 9 pin Connection Chart If you connect an IBM PC or printer with 9 pin EIA RS 232C connector to your system see the chart below EIA RS 232C port on the main unit EIA RS 232C port on the printer IBM PC Note unit to the printer cable ey Signal Pin Pin Signal ay EIA Name No No Name EIA AA FG 1 BA SD TXD 2 m 2 RD RXD BB BB RD RXD 3 M7 3 SD TXD BA CA RS RTS 4 4 ER DTR CD CB CS CTS 5 5 SG AB CC DR DSR 6 6 DR DSR CC AB SG 7 7 RS RTS CA CD ER DTR 20 8 CS CTS CB 25 pin 9 pin Please read your printer manual and connect the first EIA pin FG of this Installation 2 3 7 Printer Connection EIA RS 232C Signals Frame Ground FG Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord Transmitted Data SD TXD c cc cccccceeceseteeeeees output Conveys signals from the unit to the printer A Mark condition is held unless data or break signals are being transmitted Received Data RD RXD cc ccc ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee input Conveys signals from the printer Request to Send RS RTS ccccccceseceseeeeseeeesteeees output This lead is held ON whenever DR DSR is ON Clear To Send CS CTS cccccccccccccccee
183. CO Line DDI All jacks Caller 1 Enter 622 Display Incoming Display 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Caller 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e For the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01 Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Display Display Call Information 4 142 4 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 623 CLIP COLP Number Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Selects the type of additional number to the CLIP and COLP information when making and answering a call through an ISDN line You can select the type from one of the following DDI Subscriber number DDI number None Subscriber number Optional number e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second Types DDI Any number 1 through 6 digits All jacks DDI 1 Enter 623 Display CLIP COLP NO
184. CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming cccccccccsceeseceeeceeeeeeeeeneeenees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button 3 92 Features 3 Features L Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO CO Line Connection Assignment Button Loop CO L CO Outgoing Button Single CO S CO DPT Features Outward Dialling Line Access Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Line Access Individual Line Access Individual Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user one button access to a CO line without having to dial a line access code e Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines available to access e This feature requires a Single CO S CO button assignment on a proprietary telephone e The system waits for a programmed time before dialling after a CO line is seized Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming 0 0 ccccccecceeeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeesees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment
185. CR Programming LCR Exceptional Code Set conta e The same code with different digits may be assigned in this program or in program 7XOY LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 In this case the code which has smaller digits takes the more expensive route is priority To prevent this enter wild card after the code with the smaller digits Examples are shown below lt Examples gt 1 The code priority is as follows 33 in program 7102 gt 333 in program 7101 In this case 33 should be assigned in program 7102 2 The code priority is as follows 44 in program 7201 gt 444 in program 7101 In this case 44 should be assigned in program 7201 3 The code priority is as follows 332 in program 7120 gt 3323 in program 7120 In this case 332 should be assigned in program 7120 Feature References Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR 4 152 System Programming 4 9 LCR Programming 7X21 LCR Carrier Code Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns carrier access codes used for LCR feature e Program address 7X21 X 1 8 carrier number e Carrier code 10 digits max Program 7121 carrier 1 131 Other programs carriers 2 8 Not stored 1 Enter a program address 7X21 Display example Carrier Code Cl 2 Press NEXT Display example 131 3
186. Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Service Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Enable Disable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 517 Display COLR 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Feature References Section 3 Features Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR System Programming 4 125 0 S18 4 7 COS Programming CFU CFB CFNR Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program determines which Class of Service COS can perform CFU CFB and CFNR features e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Enable Disable All COS Disable 1 Enter 518 Display CFU CFB CFNR 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program anothe
187. Connection DECT Portable Station Section 8 45 653 8 4 Description Selection Default Programming Feature References DECT PS System Programming PS Extension Name Set Assigns names to the PS extension numbers programmed in program 671 PS Extension Number Set e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Name 10 characters max All PSs Not stored 1 7 8 Enter 653 Display PS EXT Name Set Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Not Stored Enter the name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters in the KX TD816 KX TD 1232 Installation Manual To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name Press STORE To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features Digital Wireless Connection 8 46 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 654 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References SXDP Assignment Disables or enables the Super EXtra Device Port SXDP feature for wired extensions e Jack number KX TD816
188. DN SO bus should be terminated with two 100Q terminating resistors TR Main e te AE TR Unit TR RB TE 1 TE8 TR 100Q TA TB J TR 100Q Power Supply for ISDN Terminal Equipment TE The system does not provide a power supply to terminal equipment TE Depending on the type of TE s the external power supply is required on ISDN SO line to operate 2 34 Installation 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation Installation Diagram A lightning protector is a device to be installed on a CO line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging equipment A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line Troubles due to lightning surges have been showing a steady increase with the development of electronic equipment In many countries there are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200 000 volts This system should be installed with lightning protectors In addition connection to earth ground is very important for the protection of the system CO Lightning Protectors CO CO Main Distribution Main Unit Frame EXTN EXTN EXTN Earth Terminal eed ee Frame SLT PT Earth Earth ES Installat
189. DSET proprietary telephone KX T7130 nothing is audible e When using the speaker phone monitor mode with the KX T7130 is set to the HEADSET position The HEADSET mode is selected by station pro selector to the HANDSET position e When the headset is not used select the HANDSET mode by Selector is set to OFF a digital proprietary gramming station programming telephone nothing is Handset Headset audible Selection The unit does not ring The Ringer Volume Set to HIGH or LOW During a power interrup tion extensions connected to Power Failure Transfer jacks do not operate e A DPT or APT is connected to the jack e The dialling mode tone or pulse is improper e Disconnect the DPT or APT and connect a single line telephone e Set the Tone Pulse switch to the other position 6 4 Troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION e During system connection operation originating an intercom outside call from a system to the other system is not possible e The indication System Link Down is displayed on the proprietary telephone of Operator 1 Connect the interface between the systems and press the Reset Button on both systems Interface between the systems is disconnected Originating an outside call Call Transfer or Conference cannot be performed
190. Description Conditions If Direct In Lines DIL 1 N is established a telephone set is originally set to ring instantly This setting can be changed to delayed ringing no ringing or no incoming call disable on a CO line number basis e This feature does not apply to DIL 1 1 calls e If delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable is assigned to an extension the extension can answer an incoming call during no ring or the delay time by pressing the flashing button Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Operation References Not applicable Ringing Discriminating Description Conditions Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the ringing pattern See Section 5 1 Tone Ring Tone e When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from off hook to on hook the calls are rung according to the following priority lt 1 gt Consultation Hold Recall lt 2 gt An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line Preference Incoming function has been set with a proprietary telephone only lt 3 gt Call Waiting lt 4 gt Incoming calls Hold Recall Transfer Recall e If multiple incoming calls arrive at an on hook extension simultaneously priority as to which calls should be rung is generally on a first come first served
191. Description Selection Default Programming Sets the DTMF signals inband that are transmitted to the Voice Processing System VPS by the Panasonic telephone system under all the dial and connect events which the VPS can occur The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF signals RBT ringback tone This signal is sent when calling an extension BT busy tone This is sent when the called extension is busy ROT reorder tone This is sent when the dialled number is invalid DND DND tone This is sent when the other extension has DND assigned Answer This is sent when the other extension answers the call Disconnect This is sent when the other extension hangs up Confirm confirmation tone This is sent when the feature number for Message Waiting Lamp is valid FWD VM RBT FWD to VM ringback tone Not available reserved FWD VM BT FWD to VM busy tone This is sent when the called extension has set Call Forwarding to VPS FWD EXT RBT FWD to extension ringback tone Not available reserved RBT BT ROT DND Answer Disconnect Confirm FWD VM RBT FWD VM BT FWD EXT RBT e DTMF signal number 3 digits max RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 1 Enter 113 Display VM Status Set 2 Press NEXT to program ringback tone status To program anot
192. Digtal Super Hybrid System Panasonic NSTALLATION ANUAL Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System MODEL KX TD816E KX TD1232E KX TD816 KX TD1232 Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX TD816E KX TD1232E Digital Super Hybrid System System Components Model Description Service Unit KX TD816E Digital Super Hybrid System Main Unit KX TD1232E Digital Super Hybrid System Main Unit Telephone KX T7420E Digital proprietary telephone KX T7425E Digital proprietary telephone KX T7431E Digital proprietary telephone with 1 line display KX T7433E Digital proprietary telephone with 3 line display KX T7436E Digital proprietary telephone with 6 line display KX T7220E Digital proprietary telephone KX T7230E Digital proprietary telephone with 2 line display KX T7235E Digital proprietary telephone with 6 line display KX T7250E Digital proprietary telephone KX T7130E Proprietary telephone with 1 line display KX T7020E Proprietary telephone KX T7050E Proprietary telephone Optional KX T7440E Digital DSS Console Equipment KX T7441E Digital DSS Console KX T7240E Digital DSS Console KX T7040E DSS Console KX TD170E 8 Station Line Unit KX TD180E 4 CO Line Unit KX TD181E 8 CO Line Card KX TD182E 4 CO Line Card KX TD192E System Inter Connection Card two
193. Direct Dialling mode when operator number is sent as a 1 Operator In DDI Direct Dialling In number 52 Assigns the operation when the Master and 0 Reset 0 None Slave system of KX TD1232 are automatically disconnected 1 Not reset 2 11 If an outside party is parked or transferred 0 extension 0 e Call Park and unanswered assigns whether Transfer 1 Operator 1 e Call Transfer Recall occurs at the park or transfer Unscreened originating extension or at Operator 1 to Extension 12 If Limited Call Duration is enabled in 0 both calls 0 Limited Call program 502 Extension to CO Line Call 1 outgoing calls Duration Duration Limit assigns if Limited Call only Duration is done for both outgoing and incoming calls or for outgoing calls only 13 Allows you to remove confirmation tone 4 0 disable 1 Confirmation By default a beep tone sounds when a 1 enable Tone three party conference is started ended 14 Determines if the dialled and will 0 no check 1 Toll Restriction be checked by Toll Restriction This 1 check assignment is required for certain central offices CO to prevent toll fraud Some CO ignore the user dialled and If your CO is such a type select 0 no check 15 Enables or disables the Recall function 0 disable 0 Recall when receiving an outside call ata locked 1 enable or toll restricted station Recall if enabled allows
194. Display MSN Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT 4 Press NEXT or PREV until the desired location number is displayed Display example 01 01 Not Stored 5 Enter a MSN To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To program another location press NEXT or PREV Repeat steps 5 and 6 S p Nn A To program another port press SELECT and the desired port number 10 Repeat steps 4 through 8 11 Press END Each MSN consists of 0 through 9 e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available Section 3 Features Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 4 113 1 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 438 439 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN MSN Description Selection Default Programming Determines the extension which receives a call on a multiple subscriber number MSN basis of the ISDN SO port in both day and night modes e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 12 e Location number 01 through 10 e Extension number 2 through 4 digits All ports All locations Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 438 for day or 439 for night Display example MSN Ring Day 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To ent
195. E iiie aun e e ee an 4 77 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times cee eeeeeceeeeeceseeeesteeeennees 4 78 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time cccceessssececceeceeeenesees 4 79 21 1 Dial Start TNS sa cede oases AER E AE E 4 80 212 Call Duration Count Start Time 0 0 0 0 ccceccessecececeeeeeesenseseees 4 81 214 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 4 82 215 Ring Off Detection Time ssssseseeessseesseessessseesseessseesseesseessee 4 83 ERS Programminp 5 siesic ssrasenesecaencsseavscctencence suvevssavoassvacssvivcsGeacensts 4 84 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 4 84 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 4 85 311 Emergency Dial Number Set eee eeeececeeneeceeeeceeeeeeeteeeesaes 4 86 CO Line Programming oi5 cicccesiecessdivesscoscestvercsscecesacsvovessasesescsseeonensae 4 87 400 CO Line Connection Assignment ccceeececeereeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaes 4 87 401 CO Line Group Assignment 00 eee eeeeeenceceeeeneeteeeeeaeeeaeens 4 88 402 Dial Mode Selection ccccccssssscecececeseessssecececeesesessnteaeees 4 89 403 Pulse Speed Selection iiss sicieascijsiatasesscdvssesdeatssashaasteacdevsaceantes 4 91 PAO DIME Time estore tect eibar atest Ea lam act eeuadtion on 4 92 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 93 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night eeeeeeeeeee 4 95 409 410 Intercept Ext
196. ECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Press END e To assign all PSs to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference DECT Portable Station Section 8 49 657 8 4 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References DECT PS System Programming PS Class of Service Programs each PS a Class of Service COS The COS determines the call handling abilities for each PS Primary and secondary COS numbers can be assigned for each PS e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e COS number 1 through 8 All PSs Primary Secondary COS 1 1 Enter 657 Display PS COS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 COS1 COS1 4 Enter a primary COS number To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press m gt 6 Enter a secondary COS number To change the current entry enter the new number Ts Press STORE 8 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the des
197. EXT NEXT 1 1 1D OD HO PREV PREV PREV Note The first part of a jack is fora DPT of a XDP assigned jack The second part is for a single line device Program 600 EXtra Device Port assigns which jacks are XDP Storing your data Press STORE to store your data e The STORE indicator lights red and a confirmation tone is emitted Confirmation tone one beep After pressing STORE you will hear a beep This informs you that storage is completed Alarm tone three beeps If you hear this alarm your entry is not valid Making another selection within the same program address e To make the next higher selection press NEXT To make the previous selection press PREV e To make a specific selection press SELECT and then enter the number System Programming 4 7 4 1 2 Programming Ways Going to another program address After pressing STORE you can go to another program with either of the following two methods 1 To go to the next larger program address Press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME v DOWN e To go to the next smaller program address Press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME UP 2 To go to a specific program address Press END then enter the Program Address Method 1 is useful when you want to perform a series of programs consecutively For example to change the programming in addresses 000 to 008 use this method You can move from 000 to 001 from 001 to 002 and so on by pressing the SKP
198. Extension c Intercept Routing destination 4 Digital Test Access used for testing One DTA is available The FN can be used as an extension Conditions Floating numbers cannot be used for setting a feature such as Call Forwarding etc Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 7 Remote Card Installation Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks 813 Floating Number Assignment Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 67 F 3 Features Full One Touch Dialling Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to make a call or have access to a system service with one button There is no need to turn the SP PHONE MONITOR button on before pressing the button which is required for One Touch Dialling Handsfree operation is automatically provided by pressing the One Touch Dialling DSS REDIAL or SAVE button Conditions e It is necessary to program automatic handsfree dial mode e This feature is also available with DSS buttons on a DSS Console e This feature is also available with the display operation for KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7431 or KX T7436 Special Display Features Programming References Station Programming cccccceecceseeseeeteeeeenteeeeees User Manual Full One Touch Dialling Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Button Dire
199. Hunting Overflow 134 135 Hunting Intercept Day Night Feature References Section 3 Features Hunting group Ring Group Log In Log Out Uniform Call Distribution UCD No Reply Group Operation References Not applicable Features 3 128 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s 3 Features S Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Station Message Detail Recording SMDR automatically records detailed call information for outside calls A printer connected to the EIA RS 232C port can be used to print incoming and outgoing outside calls as well as print a hard copy of system programming To print the record of system programming items that have been assigned use the program 802 System Data Printout To print the charge fee use the station programming To print the call records use the program 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout which allows you to print out the following records e Record all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls e Record all incoming outside calls An example of a printed call record 24 06 96 24 06 96 24 06 96 24 06 96 24 06 96 24 06 96 24 06 96 a 10 00AM 10 10AM 10 20AM 10 30AM 10 38AM 10 40AM 10 42AM 2 3 Dial Number ANS Duration Cost Acc CD 0344853233 00 05 12 00012 00 12345 lt I gt 0344853233 0 12 12345 TR lt I gt 0344853233 0 10 00 20 12 12345 FW lt I gt MARY WARD RC lt I gt 0924312111 0 22 AN
200. ISDN feature ISDN 62 Assigns whether the operator can set the 0 enable 1 Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb DND feature 1 disable DND 63 Reserved 7 64 Enables or disables the LCR with DTMF 0 enable 1 Least Cost function 1 disable Routing LCR 65 Assigns the incoming bell frequency for 0 32 Hz 1 None single line telephone SLT 1 25 Hz 66 Reserved 68 69 Determines the telephone which can 0 any telephone 1 Whisper OHCA activate the Whisper OHCA feature 1 KX T7400 series telephone only 70 Selects a beep tone or a music source for 0 beep tone 1 Music on Hold Music on Hold of the Music Source 1 1 music source 71 Selects the bearer when using the single 0 Speech 1 None line telephone SLT For Orange 1 3 1k Audio Network select Speech System Programming 4 174 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s 4 11 Option Programming 990 System Additional Information contd Selection e Area code 01 through 12 08 through 12 are reserved e Selection See Selection on pages 4 169 through 4 174 for each area Default See Default on pages 4 169 through 4 174 Programming 1 Enter 990 9 10 Conditions None Display System Add Inf Press NEXT Display Area NO gt Enter an area code 01 through 12 Display example 0010100011000001 Keep pressing gt or lt to move the cursor to the desired field Enter
201. Itemized Code S t retano een asinis ta e arie 8 67 681 PS Radio System ID Setyive costs aeesssauttansdacssensateaetedancataansenaders 8 68 Template for the Cell Station ccssccssssccssscsssccsssscesssscessescess 8 69 20 Section 1 System Outline This section provides general information on the system including system capacity and specifications 1 1 System Capacity Module Expansion System Highlights Basic Module System System Expansion Connection KX TD816 CO line ISDN SO line 0 8 4 Extension 8 16 KX TD1232 CO line ISDN SO line 0 12 6 24 12 Extension 16 32 64 Expansion modules are used to increase the system capacity CO line modules and extension modules can be added to the basic system to add CO lines ISDN SO lines and extensions EXtra Device Port XDP Each extension jack in the system supports the connection of a digital proprietary telephone DSS console and a single line device The devices have different extension numbers and are treated as two completely different extensions Parallelled Telephone Connection Super Hybrid System System Connection Every jack in the system also supports the parallel connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line device They share the same extension number and are considered by the system to be one extension This system supports the connection of digital and analogue proprietary telephones DSS Consoles and single l
202. J 5 S i Panasonic 1 PRI ISDN i Line Unit KX TD290 Remove the cover plate s on the front cover L Notes ISDN card unit installation should not be done only in the Slave system for system connection e When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data Clear the application for location will use practical installation instead of the system default setting e System Programming is required for location identification Refer to program 109 Expansion Card Unit Type in Section 4 Default Area 1 4 CO Line Unit Area 2 3 8 Station Line Unit 7 4 PRI Section 7 2 2 Installing the Unit KX TD290 The following procedures can be used to install the Primary Rate Interface PRI ISDN Expansion Unit KX TD290 Default KX TD816 bottom 4 CO Line Unit top 8 Station Line Unit KX TD1232 bottom 4 CO Line Unit middle and top 8 Station Line Unit Note The KX TD12372 is illustrated as a main unit 1 Loosen the two the screws on the cover 3 Hook the cabinet on the main unit and slide plate Insert fingers into the slits to the cabinet to the left until it is secured E ty LLETLLEELLLL Ut we g 4 Loosen the outside screw and slide the y Rard Slit cover to the right Slit AE Note Any of the cover plates can be p removed as needed mi Ji Ji Ji Fi VE eas
203. KX TD816 the maximum number of available CO lines is limited to 12 and when it is installed in the KX TD1232 for the system connection the maximum number of available CO lines is limited to 38 Therefore if another CO card or unit is used it is required to program which area it is installed in by program 450 beforehand One PRI ISDN line adds 8 CO lines CO 09 through 16 to the KX TD816 and adds 30 CO lines CO 25 through CO54 to the KX TD1232 This unit cannot be installed in the KX TD1232 Slave system Hit i ymi ATT L 41 PRT ISDN line can be added 1 PRI ISDN line can be added Programming References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Assign S3 to the desired area Section 7 3 System Programming 450 PRI Configuration 451 PRI Reference CO Station Programming 0cccccceecceseeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button Assign the following buttons to Flexible CO buttons Single CO button s 09 through 16 for KX TD816 25 through 54 for KX TD1232 Group CO button s Assign the CO line group number which CO lines 09 through 16 or 25 through 54 belong to Loop CO button s
204. LT oog Di WOuU0 JOE FAULT pgn 0000 0000 oon SS FAULT opot O000 0000 Godu OS FAULT 6000 0000 0000 oo00 Js FAULT oo00 000o 0ogo ooo ous FAULT p000 0080 000 oo00 OL FAULT ooo00 nono opa p 15 FAULT poang q lt CS ID number 10 digits Example The CS ID number of CS number 03 is 8012301260 The CS ID number of CS number 04 is 8012300360 The location of the CS numbers are shown below KX TD816 CS 01 through 04 KX TD1232 CS 01 through 16 i EXP3 gt EXP3 4 Se fees DA mill i o Ltt 12 EXP2 EXP2 b ih es easa d A CS 11 EXP1 gt EXPI te _ oT cs 10 CS 09 Master Slave EXP 2 RF Interface Unit with 4 Station Line KX TD144 One EXP for the KX TD816 and a maximum of two EXPs for the KX TD1232 can be installed per system CS connection for the KX TD1232 Slave System is not possible now It will be possible in the future 8 18 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 5 Site Survey Assigning the Cell Station ID Number to the PS 1 Set the PS Power Switch to ON while pressing Talk Ce Flash FUNCTION lt 0 4 gt and at the same time 2 Press CS NO 1 8 3 Enter the Cell Station number Example cS ID1 gt 4 Press Talk Example CS ID1 gt 5 Enter the Cell Station ID number Example e To enter letters press the following but m x D 3 o D CS ID1 CF Function gt 01
205. MUTE This dual function button is used for extension auto answer and microphone mute during a conversation AUTO DIAL STORE Used for System Speed Dialling and storing program changes CO Central Office line Can make or receive an outside call or can be re assigned to a different CO or to various feature buttons CONF Conference Used to establish a three party conference FLASH RCL Allows you to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up Recall Sends a Register Recall signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access their features External Feature Access Function Used to perform the displayed function operation FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Used to program Call Forwarding set Do Not Disturb HOLD Used to place a call on hold INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls Jog Dial Used to adjust the ringer speaker handset and headset volume and the display contrast With the KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 it can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display MESSAGE Used to send a message or display current message MODE Used to shift the display in order to access various features MONITOR Used for handsfree operation PAUSE Inserts a pause in a speed dial number With an analogue proprietary telephone it is used as the PROGRAM button PF Programmable Feature This flexible button can be programmed
206. Manual Message Waiting Voice Mail Integration Microphone Mute Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone for privacy reasons Conditions e This is effective for the microphone only only your voice will be muted during a handsfree conversation e The user can hear the other party s voice during Microphone Mute Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References DPT Features User Manual Microphone Mute Mixed Station Capacities Description This system supports a wide range of telephone sets not only Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT and Analogue Proprietary Telephones APT in the Digital Super Hybrid System but also single line LD telephones 10 pps 20 pps employing dial pulse signals and single line MF4 telephones The super hybrid method used in this system allows any telephone to be connected to an extension jack without an adaptor 3 100 Features 3 Features M Conditions e If a telephone is replaced by another one the stored data such as feature button storage is held for the new one e Itis possible to ignore the pulse dial by system programming In this case a single line LD telephone does not function Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 2 Extension Connection 2 4 5 Extension Connection Optional Unit Programming References Section 4 System Programming 121 Pulse Dial Reception Assignment Feature
207. N A X X X A DOORPHONE A X X X N A X X X Battery X X X X X N A X X DOOR OPENER X X X X X X N A X ISDN 2 A A X X X X X X A Allowed X Not allowed N A Not applicable Maximum associated cable loss for EXT port ITS Max cable loss 0 34 dB 240 m max for 0 5 mm SLT Max cable loss 0 87 dB 620 m max for 0 5 mm Port to port loss Loss across switch PAS gt 1AS Loss 1 13 dB Not through fed system Send and receive loudness ratings on port to port basis Send loudness rating LAS PAS 3 dB 0 km Receive loudness rating PAS gt 1AS 6 dB 0 km Extension 1AS port 3 ringers can be supported with extension wiring up to 620 m Notes EXTN Jack 1 to EXTN Jack 16 for KX TD816 or EXTN Jack 1 to EXTN Jack 32 for KX TD1232 may be used for off premise extension in which case cabling would be required by BS6701 Part 1 1986 to be equipped with over voltage protection e When using separately approved extension telephones the best overall performance of the PBX system will be obtained by using extension telephones of impedance class A clause 4 3 2 1 of BS6305 1982 1 14 System Outline Section 2 Installation This section contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions as well as how to install the optional cards and units 2 1 Before Installation Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the system Safety In
208. N and doorphone call to the corresponding extensions You can pick up calls by pressing the corresponding flashing DSS buttons Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming cccccccccceteeseeereeeeceteeneees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Direct Station Selection DSS Button 3 10 Features 3 Features B Feature References Section 3 Features Button Direct Station DSS Console Selection DSS Operation References Not applicable Busy Station Signalling BSS Description When attempting to call a busy extension Busy Station Signalling allows you to signal the user on the phone to answer your call The called extension user hears a Call Waiting tone and is able to answer the call Conditions e This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting If it is activated the caller will hear ringback tone e If the called party has been set to activate the Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA function the caller can announce the call through the speaker or the handset e If none of three features Call Waiting OHCA or Whisper OHCA is set at the called party the caller will hear a reorder tone Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Call Waiting Whisper OHCA Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Fea
209. NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 40 verifiable account codes Each code has a maximum of 5 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e Program 508 Account Code Entry Mode is used to select the Account Code Entry mode e Account codes having 99 in any part or ending with 9 are invalid as 99 is used as a delimiter when entering an account code e The account code recorded in location 01 is not printed out on the SMDR Private Call feature Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Private Call Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry System Programming 4 43 106 4 3 System Programming Station Hunting Type Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type for each hunting group There are six Station Hunting types available Circular Uniform Call Distribution UCD Voice Mail VM Automated Attendant AA Ring and No Reply If circular hunting is assigned for a group all of the extensions in the group are hunted until an idle one is found If VM hunting is assigned all of the VM ports of an extension group are hunted until an idle one is found to permit Voice Mail Service If AA hunting is assigned all of the AA ports of an extension group are hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service If
210. Night SETVICE oense etse ie i ant uted aas 3 103 N Reply Grop esie e ee EA e Ea 3 104 0 Notebook PUMGHION resserre nen ia seeng oa Eni 3 104 1 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA sssssssssseseesseseesseseessssrsssssee 3 104 2 OTE HOOK MOnitot sener e a aE a eas aeons 3 104 2 One Touch Dialling cirerers isties iN aa 3 105 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button essseessessesssesesssesssresseessessees 3 106 OPEL ALON n aer E D EE E E R reaa 3 107 Oper tor Call spasmon n E a a a E Aa 3 108 PAGING FEATURES SUMMARY 0 ecceccceceteceeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeteeeees 3 108 Pao rte 2A eo teal acct n a N 3 109 Paging lt Extertal oscicesasesentecnsaayatosauanbncetastaeadaeaybuevsaeeatodanneneseeanaasea 3 109 Pag ine Groupies he ieee oes ae cea tens 3 110 Parallelled Telephone cats etc eat E a aes 3 111 Pause Insertion AUtOMAtiC ccccccecesesessssssssssssssssssssessssssssseseseeees 3 112 0 Phantom Extensions nesini ann 3 112 1 Pickup Diall geina sainia naa eii 3 113 Power Failure REStart i 2225 mennina ii 3 113 Power Farlure Transfer aa A a aia a et 3 114 Predikis a e ance meneee 3 115 Privat Call ainesosien aake aisin 3 115 P ls to Tone Conv rsioh nioe si ea e ias 3 116 Q ick Dialling shanin a a e i e an 3 116 12 Installation Manual Contents R Recall osni n Ge Mailes oben a ra N E tonsa ates 3 117 Redial Amtomatic neeseire innean eda a a i ds 3 118 Redial East NUM Dei a A rie eee 3 118 Redial Saved Number 0
211. O gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display example 03 CO 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port e After this assignment you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective Section 3 Features ISDN Extension System Programming 4 107 423 4 6 CO Line Programming ISDN Layer I Active Mode Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the active mode of Layer 1 on ISDN port basis e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 x all ports KX TD 1232 01 through 12 all ports e Permanent Call All ports Permanent 1 Enter 423 Display L1 Active Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port you can also press NEXT Display example 03 Permanent 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV
212. OS Level 1 Day Night 511 Door Opener Access All COS Enable 513 Night Service Access All COS Enable 514 Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call All COS Disable 516 Calling Line Identification Restriction All COS Disable List 5 7 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 517 Connected Line Identification All COS Disable Restriction 518 CFU CFB CFNR Assignment All COS Disable 519 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA All COS Enable Extension Programming 600 ExXtra Device Port All Jacks Disable 601 Class of Service All Jacks 1 2 COS 1 COS 1 602 Extension Group Assignment All Jacks 1 2 Extension Group 1 Enable 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed All Jacks 1 2 All CO Lines Immediate Ringing Day Night Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night All Jacks 1 2 All CO Lines Enable Day Night 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Jack 01 1 All Doorphones Other Jacks No Day Night Doorphone Day Night 609 Voice Mail Access Codes Not Stored 611 Extension Connection Assignment All Jacks Connect 612 Data Line Security All Jacks Off 613 ISDN Class of Service All Ports COS 1 Assignment Day Night for ISDN All Ports All CO Lines Enabl Day Night Extension 617 Live Call Screening Recording Mode All Jacks Stop Reco
213. Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming cccceccccsceeseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Feature References Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line Line Access Direct CO Line Group Ringing Delayed 3 14 Features 3 Features B Operation References User Manual LED Indication CO Line Ringing Tone Selection for CO Line Access CO Line Group Buttons Basic Operation Making Calls Receiving Calls DPT Features Answering Direct CO Line Outward Dialling Line Access CO Line Group Button Loop CO L CO Description Conditions All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone PT The assigned button serves as a Loop CO L CO button An incoming call on any CO line arrives at the L CO unless there are no S CO or G CO buttons associated with the line or unless the button is already in use To make an outside call the PT user can simply press the dedicated L CO button e No L CO button is originally provided on a PT A flexible CO button can be assigned as an L CO button in either system or station programming It is possible to assign more than one L CO button on a PT Pressing the L CO button provides the same operation as dialling the automatic line access code This results in Automatic Line Access or Least Cost Routing LCR if
214. P Switch to the normal mode and plug in the cable See page 8 26 8 16 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 5 Site Survey Checking the Cell Station ID Number Use a personal computer to check the Cell Station CS ID number File E1232BE EXE Main Menu Display Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System DECT Operating Maintenance Tool Ver3 XXBE C COPYRIGHT 1997 KYUSHU MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CO LTD System Data Programming BATCH System Data Programming INTERACTIVE Disk File Management DSHS Management DSHS Connect Disconnect Quit Select the number ih Enter the number and hit ENTER key HELP Input Format 1 In the Main Menu Display Enter 2 and press the ENTER key to select System Data Programming INTERACTIVE 2 In the System Data Programming Main Menu Display Enter 2 and press the ENTER key to select Station 3 In the Station Menu Display Enter 24 and press the ENTER key to select CS Information The CS Information Display appears as shown on the next page DECT Portable Station Section 8 17 8 2 5 Site Survey CS Information Display S Infermation In line RS 23520 Large Small FOH Info Into Version A000 FALUT FAULT 200 300 goan FALUT FAULT 000 1230 1260 INS INS 0131 230 0360 FALUT INIWAI 0131 pooo ooon FALUT FAULT 0000 0000 0000 oo00 FALUT FAULT ogu Ono0 gogg ggg I FAULT 6000 Oooo 020 600 OOS FAULT HUU 0060 poga pog AUS FAU
215. PS Itemized Code Set Registers an itemized code applied to each PS The registered code is inserted into the T command position stored in program 7X22 LCR Carrier Modify Command e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Itemized code 4 digits max All PSs Not Stored 1 Enter 677 Display PS Itemized Code 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter a port number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 Not Stored 4 Enter an itemized code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END There is a maximum of 16 itemized codes for KX TD816 and 64 itemized codes for KX TD1232 Each code has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR DECT Portable Station Section 8 67 681 8 4 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References DECT PS System Programming PS Radio System ID Set Assigns a radio system ID which is required for each PS to distinguish its registered PBX The radio system ID must be eight digits starting with 00 and followed by the last six digits of the master syste
216. Panasonic House Willoughby Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 4FP Printed in the United Kingdom PSQX1047SA KS0299MT1039PJ To expand the sub menu left click the mouse on the symbol located to the left of the selected text gt for version 3 Adobe Reader for version 4 Adobe Reader Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD 816E KX TD 1232E Version 4 Program differences with reference to previous versions This addendum should be used in conjunction with the current version 4 Installation Manual This document highlights differences in programming on previous versions with reference to the current Version 4 system PROGRAM DESCRIPTION VERSION 3 VERSION 2 VERSION 1 STEL PF Button Assignment As Version 4 Voice Mail Transfer Assigned to button code 8 Button code 81 N A Button code 82 N A Button code 83 N A Button code 84 N A Button code 85 N A Button code 86 N A Button code 87 N A Button code 88 N A Button code 88 N A Button code 8 N A Button code 8 N A Button code 8 N A Button code 8 Ya Button code 9 Daa a Ge e in default in default DSS Console Number As Version 4 As Version 4 KXTD816 1 through 4 KXTD1232 1 through 4 for Master 5 through 8 for Slave 009 Quick Dial As Version As Versiond NA N A not available Version 4 00 1 Panasonic PROGRAM DESCRIPTION VERSION 3 VERSION 2 VERSION 1 STEP PS
217. Press END Conditions None Feature References Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION Check In Check Out System Programming 4 3 012 4 2 Manager Programming ISDN Extension Number Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Assigns an extension number to each port which is connected to the ISDN SO unit or card e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 e Extension Number 1 through 3 digits All ports Not stored 1 Enter 012 Display ISDN EXT Num Set 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display 03 Not Stored 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Each extension number can be one two or three digits consisting of 0 through 9 The and keys cannot be used e A multiple subscriber number MSN is determined regarding to this assignment The MSN consists of the assigned extension number and an additional digit 0 through 9 Example In case that the ISDN extension number is assigned 3 30 through 39 are effective as MSN s The extension user can call any terminal equipment on the ISDN SO bus with MSN individually Pressing 3
218. Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on proprietary telephones from a centralized telephone Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Button Code plus parameter if required Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO KX TD816 01 through 16 CO line number KX TD1232 01 through 54 CO line number 1 DSS 2 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch 16 digits max Telephone number 3 Message Waiting None 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 7 Conference None 80 Log In Log Out None 81 Hurry Up 2 through 4 digits Extension number 82 Voice Mail Transfer 2 through 4 digits Extension number 83 Two Way Record 2 through 4 digits Extension number 84 Two Way Transfer 2 through 4 digits Extension number 85 Live Call Screening t None 86 Live Call Screening Cancel None 87 Alert None 88 Phantom 2 through 4 digits Phantom extension number 8X Night None 8 One Touch Dialling with Auto Hold 16 digits max Telephone number 9 Terminate None Loop CO None Group CO 1 through 8 CO line group number CO ringer frequency 1 through 8 ring tone type number Default e KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons 1 through 8 Single CO 01 through 08 Ring tone type 2 e
219. REV or SELECT and the desired external pager number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The external pager is a user supplied item Two external pagers can be installed per system For KX TD1232 external pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e Program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment is used to assign an extension as an operator e Program 803 Music Source Use is used to select the music source to be used for BGM Section 3 Features Background Music BGM External System Programming 4 161 805 4 10 Resource Programming External Pager Confirmation Tone Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers The default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers before paging is broadcast This programming applies to all the external pagers On Off On 1 Enter 805 Display Ext Pag Ack Tone 2 Press NEXT Display example Tone On 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END The external pager is a user supplied item Two external pagers can be installed per system For KX TD1232 external pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available Section 3 Features Confirmation Tone Paging External Paging All
220. References None Operation References Not applicable Module Expansion Description The KX TD816 starts with 8 extension jacks and the KX TD1232 starts with 16 extension jacks It can be expanded by installing optional cards and units For both systems e An 8 Station Line Unit adds 8 extension jacks e A 4 CO Line Unit adds 4 CO line jacks e A 2 ISDN SO Line Unit adds 2 ISDN SO lines For KX TD816 only e A 4 CO Line Card adds 4 CO line jacks e A 2 ISDN SO Line Card adds 2 ISDN SO lines For KX TD1232 only e An 8 CO Line Card adds 8 CO line jacks e A 4 ISDN SO Line Card adds 4 ISDN SO lines The KX TD816 can have a maximum of one 8 Station Line Unit one of 4 CO Line 2 ISDN SO Line Cards and one of 4 CO Line 2 ISDN SO Line Units The KX TD1232 can have a maximum of two 8 Station Line Unit one of 8 CO Line 4 ISDN SO Line Cards and one of 4 CO Line 2 ISDN SO Line Units Features 3 101 M 3 Features Conditions e The number of extension jacks may be different from the number of telephones if the Parallelled Telephone or the eXtra Device Port feature is enabled These features allow one extension jack to have two telephones e When an expansion unit is installed the unit identification is set by system programming Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card 2 4 4 CO Line Connection Optional Unit 2 4 5 Extension Connection Optional Unit Programming Reference
221. SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e The operator extension cannot reject the call regardless of setting Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call System Programming 4 123 516 4 7 COS Programming Calling Line Identification Restriction Description Enables or disables the Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Service on a Class of Service COS basis Selection e COS number 1 through 8 x x all COS Enable Disable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 516 Display CLIR 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 4 124 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 517 Connected Line Identification Restriction Description Enables or disables the
222. Set the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position 2 Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool 3 Return the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing approxi mately within 10 seconds C If the system still does not work switch the power off and on again after five minutes D If the system still does not work 1 Switch the power off Set the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position Switch the power on Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool Set the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds E If the system still does not work switch the power off If car batteries are connected to the system disconnect them too Then consult an authorized service person AUN When the power supply stops extensions connected to Power Failure Transfer jacks are automatically connected straight to specific CO lines KX TD816 CO 1 CO 2 and CO 5 KX TD1232 CO 1 CO 2 CO 9 CO 13 CO 14 and CO 21 Connect single line telephones to the Power Failure Transfer jacks 6 6 Troubleshooting Section 7 PRI Section This section provides information on using the Primary Rate Interface PRI ISDN line with the optional expansion unit 7 1 Overview The KX TD290 Primary Rate Interface PRI ISDN Expansion Unit adds one PRI ISDN line When this unit is installed in the
223. System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming O16 Charge Rate Assignment Description Assigns the rate to each CO line Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 09 9 for KX TD290 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 25 25 for KX TD290 all CO lines e Charge rate 9 digits max including the decimal point Default 0 01 Programming 1 Enter 016 Display Charge Rate Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example C001 0 01 4 Enter a charge rate to the left of the decimal point To delete the current entry press CLEAR 5 Press m 6 Enter a charge rate to the right of the decimal point To delete the current entry press CLEAR 7 Press STORE 8 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 7 10 Press END System Programming 4 35 2 016 4 2 Manager Programming Charge Rate Assignment conta Conditions e A maximum of nine digits consisting of 0 through 9 can be assigned as the rate The number of decimal places depends on the assignment in program 015 Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment When the ISDN card or unit is installed to the system the rate cannot be assigned per CO line The rate which is assigned to the lowest CO line number is used for the other lines For examp
224. TD1232 only 3 Features C Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold or Consultation Hold In this case if the extension user remains off hook after the completion of an outgoing outside call the system does not release all the switches used to establish the connection and a CO line connected will continue to be seized To prevent this it is administrable to make CPC Signal Detection work on outgoing outside calls Note Some Central Offices may send CPC like signals during the dialling sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated If your CO does not send such signals it is recommended to make CPC Signal Detection work on outgoing outside calls If your Central Office does not send CPC like signals it is also effective to limit the dialled numbers during a call by the program 991 COS Additional Information on a Class of Service basis to prevent unauthorized calls e If CPC Signal is detected during a Conference call the line is disconnected and the remaining two parties maintain the call Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set 991 COS Additional Information Field 1 None Not applicable Call Pickup CO Line Description Conditions Allows any extension user to answer an incoming outside call that is ringing at another s telephone e Call Pickup starts with the lo
225. TORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e If the charge limitation is set 0 no restriction is applied e To assign all jack number to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by 125 Assignment of Denomination Section 3 Features Budget Management Charge Fee Reference 4 30 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming O11 Charge Margin and Tax Rate Description Assigns the margin rate of a telephone charge and the tax rate to the total charge This program is used for printing out the total charge when a guest checks out Selection Margin 0 0 through 999 9 Tax 0 0 through 99 9 Default Margin 0 0 Tax 0 0 Programming 1 Enter 011 Display Charge Margin 2 Press NEXT Display Margin 0 0 3 Enter a charge margin rate whole number part To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 4 Press gt 5 Enter a charge margin rate decimal fraction part To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 6 Press STORE 7 Press NEXT Display Tax 0 0 8 Enter a tax rate whole number part To delete the tax rate press CLEAR 9 Press gt 10 Enter a tax rate decimal fraction part To delete the tax rate press CLEAR 11 Press STORE 12
226. Use your display proprietary wired telephone for programming Programming with a PS is only required for program 650 PS Registration Note For location identification of the 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD 144 refer to program 109 Expansion Card Unit Type in Section 4 Then select E for the 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 with the KX TD816 or E1 or E2 with the KX TD1232 This is the same for an 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 8 38 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 020 PS Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine how the flexible CO buttons are used on PSs Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Flexible CO button number 1 through 3 e Button Code plus parameter if required Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO TD816 01 through 16 CO line number TD1232 01 through 54 CO line number 1 DSS 2 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch Dialling 16 digits max Telephone number 3 Message Waiting None 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 7 Conference None 80 Log In Log Out None 82 Voice Mail Transfer 2 through 4 digits Extension number 83 Two Way Record 2 through 4 digits Extension number 84 Two Way Transfer 2 through 4 digits Extension number 8 One Touch Dialling with Auto Hold 16 digits max
227. V or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Section 3 Features Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialling 4 120 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming S511 Door Opener Access Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Enables or disables to unlock the door opener by feature number on a Class of Service COS basis e COS number 1 through 8 x x all COS Enable Disable All COS Enable 1 Enter 511 Display Door Opener 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 Section 3 Features Door Opener System Programming 4 121 S13 4 7 COS Programming Night Service Access Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Enables or disables the ability to switch the Day Night service on a Class
228. X TD1232 16 max 32 max with XDP CO lines ISDN SO lines 12 max 6 max Extensions 32 max 64 max with XDP Stored Program CPU 16 bits CPU Non Blocking PCM Time Switch Primary Secondary Power Failure 230 VAC 50 Hz Station Supply Volt 30V Circuit Volt 5V 15V e Memory back up duration seven years by factory provided lithium battery e Power Failure Transfer 3 CO lines max assigned to extensions e System operation for several hours by recommended batteries consisting of two 12 VDC car batteries Dialling Outward Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialling Internal Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialling Mode Conversion DP DTMF DTMF DP Connector CO lines 4 pin connector Stations 6 pin connector Paging Output Pin Jack RCA JACK External Music Input Two conductors Jack MINIJACK 3 5 mm diameter 1 10 System Outline 15 Specifications Extension Connection Cable Single line telephones 1 pair wire A B KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 1 pair wire L H or KX T7436 KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 2 pair wire A B L H KX T7250 KX T7130 KX T7020 KX T7050 2 pair wire A B L H KX T7440 KX T7441 KX T7240 KX T7040 1 pair wire L H SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Interface EIA RS 232C Output Equipment Printer Detail Recording Date Time Extension Number CO Line Number Dialled Number Call Duration Cha
229. X TD281 Adds four ISDN SO lines 8 CO lines 4 ISDN SO lines can be added 4 CO Line Card KX TD182 2 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD282 One of the following cards can be installed for KX TD816 KX TD182 Adds four CO lines KX TD282 Adds two ISDN SO lines 4 CO lines 2 ISDN SO lines can be added _ System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 Permits two Digital Super Hybrid Systems to be connected together to double system capacity Connection Cable I Available for KX TD1232 only System Outline 1 7 2 Available for KX TD816 only 14 Options Remote Card KX TD196 The Remote Card allows programming and maintenance of the system from a remote location Central Office A S a 2 2898 BBB BBE FA Telephone Line Personal Computer with modem Battery Adaptor KX A46 Supports the connection of two car batteries 12 VDCX2 for power backup in case of a powe
230. XT Display example Attempt 4 3 Enter the number of times To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of times 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e Program 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time is used to set the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Redial Automatic 4 78 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts Time seconds 3 through 120 X10 is the actual time 12 120s 1 Enter 210 Display Interval Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 120 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e You enter a number from 3 through 120 The actual time is 10 times your input e Program 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times is used to set the number of times Automatic Redial is tried e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Redial Automatic System Programming 4 79 211 4 4 Timer Programming Dial Start Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialling after a CO line is seized Time milliseconds 0 through 40 x100 i
231. YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician WARNING THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT The wires in this mains leads are coloured in accordance with the following code Green and yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured GREEN AND YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN AND YELLOW The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED How to replace the fuse Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse and fuse cover Important Information This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2 wire Loop calling unguarded clearing with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signalling The equipment must be connected to di
232. a main unit Installation 2 9 2 3 2 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 Wire Specifications In making an extension line connection use twisted pair cable for installation The wire specifications for extensions are as follows Wire Solid wire Diameter of conductor 0 4 0 65 mm Diameter including coating 0 66 1 05 mm Connection Use 6 pin plugs included There are 8 plugs to connect extensions to jacks 1 through 8 for KX TD816 and 16 plugs to connect extensions to jacks 1 through 16 for KX TD1232 Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 1 Installation and 6 1 2 Connection before connection 1 Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Note Do not strip the wires Insert the wires all the way into the plug S 2 Insert the plug into an extension jack in the main unit 6 pin plug KX TD816 g Jack 4 g Jack 3 l Jack 2 P2 L A Jack 1 B H P1 Jacks 1 through 8 are 4 located from bottom to top To extensions Jacks 8 2 10 Installation 2 3 2 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones
233. able Timer Programming 200 Hold Recall Time 60s 201 Transfer Recall Time 12 rings 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 3 rings 203 Intercept Time 12 rings 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time ls 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration 10 min Time 207 First Digit Time 10s 208 Inter Digit Time 10s 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 4 times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time 120s 211 Dial Start Time 0 ms 212 Call Duration Count Start Time Os 214 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 0 min 215 Ring Off Detection Time 6s TRS Programming 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Not Stored Levels 2 through 6 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Not Stored Levels 2 through 6 311 Emergency Dial Number Set Location 01 999 Location 02 112 Others Not Stored CO Line Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment All CO Lines Connect 401 CO Line Group Assignment CO01 TRG 1 CO02 TRG 2 CO03 TRG 3 CO04 TRG 4 CO05 TRG 5 CO06 TRG 6 CO07 TRG 7 KX TD816 CO08 through CO16 TRG 8 KX TD1232 CO08 through CO54 TRG8 402 Dial Mode Selection All CO Lines DTMF 403 Pulse Speed Selection All CO Lines 10 pps 404 DTMF Time All CO Lines 96 ms 5 6 List 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set All CO Lines 352 ms All CO Lines Disable Day Night All CO Line Groups Disable Day Night
234. acansnataaanundnnadsenassaenanssiecenatercnas sees 3 23 0 Call Forwarding Dy ISDN Line jcciiscacsenenedecassasavadncnaddseniqerecnsbedncede 3 23 1 Call Hold CO LEren a EE NERE 3 24 Call Hold Intercom ernie enar E EE ETE E 3 24 Call Hold Exclusive CO Line ccccccccecceesesesssesesesssesssesssersseessees 3 25 Call Hold Exclusive Intercom ccccccccesesssssesssssesssesssssssssenseees 3 26 Available for KX TD1232 only Installation Manual Contents Call Hold Retrieve CO Line sas gpic nec cndsieaied bicadeiatja deca aoe Call Hold Retrieve litercomi s 2 2 ccu i tana be a awide Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIPS COLP eisiseiok Gciee eal ea ieee sisia Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 0 eee eeeeeeseeeeeees Cal Paik eieaa ceed deceit ot egata Raves aa E A E SERN Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Call Pickup CO DINE siiri mi tn nase estara Aa E E E Call Pickup Directed isisisi anon e oad e ni Call Pick p Group scat ohcaes i en a Call Pick up GIy 58 5s Be less dele See aha EREA EE dd aol Call Spottt 5 sete areas ah ee race eure cadena weap eatetnaed aes CALL TRANSFER FEATURES SUMMARY orreee Call Transfer Screened to CO Line cece ccceeseseeseeeseesseseeeseeees Call Transfer Screened to Extension ccccccsessseseessssseseseeeseees Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension cccccsessssseseeeseese
235. adios and televisions both the main unit and proprietary telephones Do not obstruct area around the main unit for reasons of maintenance and inspection be especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the main unit Make sure to keep the following instructions when wiring 1 Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source computer telex etc If the cables are run near those wires shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields If cables are run on the floor use protectors or the like to protect 2 2 Installation 2 1 Before Installation the wires where they may be stepped on Avoid wiring under carpets Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers telexes and other office equipment Otherwise the system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such equipment Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of telephone equipment such as single line telephones data terminals answering machines computers voice processing systems etc except proprietary telephones e g KX T7235 KX T7436 The Power Switch of the system must be off during wiring After all the wirings are completed turn the Power Switch on Mis wiring may cause the system to operate improperly Refer to Section 6 1 1 Installation and Section 6 1 2 Connection If an extensi
236. ailbox of the extension When a call is transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or Intercept Routing No Answer features the mailbox number is sent to the VPS automatically with DTMF signalling Follow On ID Up to eight extension jacks can be connected to VPS as extensions in the system System Explanation 1 Voice Mail Service 1 1 Call Forwarding to VM If an extension user sets Call Forwarding C FWD whose destination is the VPS an incoming call is forwarded to the VPS under the proper conditions The system sends to the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that time Therefore the calling party can leave his her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number 3 152 Features 3 Features VV Outside call DIL 1 1 Syst Intercom vere Call VPS C FWD Extension gt __7 gt VM 1 7 7 gt 7 gt VM2 A VM Hunting A Chain VMX amp VM 3 Outside call DIL 1 1 System VPS C FWD Operator gt gt Extension ___7 gt _ VM 1 fp gt VM2 Transfer I 1 VM Hunting i Chain y VMX 7 VM 3 1 2 Intercept Routing to VM If a CO line is set as Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA whose destination is the VPS an outside call
237. ake an outside call Up to four codes can be stored for a CO line group assigned the line e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Access code 1 or 2 digits four different entries max All CO line groups Not stored 1 Enter 411 Display TRG Host PBX NO 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRGI A 4 Enter an access code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new access code Display example TRG1 01 5 To enter more access codes for the same CO line group press m and enter the access codes until all the required entries are completed Display example TRG1 01 08 10 22 6 Press STORE 7 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END System Programming 4 97 411 4 6 CO Line Programming Host PBX Access Codes contd Conditions Feature References e This program is only required if a host PBX line is connected to the system Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign the line to a CO line group There is a maximum of four access codes per CO line group Each code has one or two digits consisting of 0 through 9 and If conflicting access codes such as 8
238. amples gt 1 The code priority is as follows 033 in program 7102 gt 0333 in program 7101 In this case 033 should be assigned in program 7102 2 The code priority is as follows 044 in program 7201 gt 0444 in program 7101 In this case 044 should be assigned in program 7201 3 The code priority is as follows 0332 in program 7120 gt 03323 in program 7120 In this case 0332 should be assigned in program 7120 e When making a call to an ISDN line using the memory dialling and the number has a pause in it the number after the pause will be sent to the line as DTMF signals This function is useful when accessing a special network service which can be accessed only by the DTMF signaling Program 990 field 64 is used to enable or disable this function default disabled Programming References Section 4 System Programming Note X carrier number 1 8 Y table number 1 8 100 103 311 7000 7002 7003 7004 7XO0Y 7X1Y 7X20 7X21 7X22 7X23 7X24 990 Flexible Numbering Automatic line access LCR Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment Emergency Dial Number Set LCR Mode BTL Access Code Itemized Code Set Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 LCR Time and Fee Set 1 through 8 LCR Exceptional Code Set LCR Carrier Code LCR Carrier Modify Co
239. an enter a pre assigned account code only when the user needs to override toll restriction In Option mode the user can enter any account code if needed Conditions e An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling System Station Speed Dialling Notebook Function One Touch Dialling Pickup Dialling Call Forwarding to CO Line e The Account button may be used in place of the feature number A flexible button on the proprietary telephone set can be programmed as the Account button e Account code entry after CPC detection must be done within 15 seconds Otherwise SMDR call record is activated and entry becomes impossible afterwards e If disconnection signal is selected in program 990 field 3 and Recall function is enabled in field 15 the Verified All Calls extension is allowed to make an outside call using the same line with Recall function e If an account code is appended to a call specified display telephone users can see the charge for the call Charge Fee Reference e In any mode emergency dial numbers stored in program 311 Emergency Dial Number Set can be dialled out without an account code entry If the account code stored in location 01 of the programming table is used the dialled number is not printed out to SMDR Private Call Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Account code entry 105 Account Codes 508 Acco
240. and B For APT Secondary E socket Single Line Proprietary Telephone Telephone The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Installation 2 15 2 3 3 Parallelled Telephone Connection for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone Method 2 for Digital Proprietary Telephone only 2 conductor wiring cord 4 conductor wiring cord Connect pins A and B Connect pins A B L and H Master socket lt Back of the KX T7400 Series DPTs gt To single line telephone To system Single Line Digital Proprietary SEAE A E Ae ee T e nse Oa Telepnone POE OOE lt Back of the KX T7200 Series DPTs gt To single line To system telephone Notes e Not only a single line telephone but a single line device such as an answering machine a facsimile or a modem personal computer etc can be connected in parallel with a digital proprietary telephone e The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Feature References Section 3 Features Paralleled Telephone 2 16 Installation 2 3 4 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone Method 1 4 conductor wiring cord Connect pins L and H only A and B are not necessary Digital Proprietary Telephone Note Method 2
241. and 81 are stored for the same CO line group the 1 digit code 8 only will be in effect When the programmed codes are dialled Automatic Pause Insertion and Toll Restriction are applied to the calls The programmed pause time in program 412 Pause Time is automatically inserted after the access code To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 Section 3 Features External Feature Access Pause Insertion Automatic Host PBX Access 4 98 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 412 Pause Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the pause time The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access code or a host PBX access code programmed in 411 Host PBX Access Codes or manually inserted if the PAUSE button is pressed by the user e CO line group number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Time seconds 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 All CO line groups 3 5 s 1 Enter 412 Display TRG Pause Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 3 5sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or
242. annot be used for handsfree conversation e A single press of a One Touch Button DSS button REDIAL button or a SAVE button also provides handsfree mode if Full One Touch Dialling is enabled Features 3 69 H 3 Features Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Hold Recall Description Conditions No programming required Section 3 Features Full One Touch Dialling DPT Features Handsfree Operation Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a pre determined time If the timer expires ringing or an alarm tone is generated as a reminder to the user who held the call If the user is on hook and its speaker phone is off the phone is rung If the user is off hook or in speakerphone mode when the timer expires an alarm tone is sent from the built in speaker of a proprietary telephone PT or from the handset receiver of a single line telephone at 15 second intervals e Hold Recall can be disabled by programming e The display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds at 15 second intervals synchronized with the tone e Alarm tone is sent as follows Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Section 3 Features Call Hold CO Line Call Hold Exclusive CO Line Call Hold Intercom Call Hold Exclusive Intercom Not applicable 3 70 F
243. another expansion unit is mounted above which would prevent finger access via the cable knock out open ing This safety requirement is necessary to prevent user access to network voltages 11 Fix the cords to the wall as shown so that the front cover can be opened DECT Portable Station Section 8 15 8 2 5 Site Survey Site Survey Specification The KX TD7500 portable station has Radio Signal Test Mode which monitors the state of link as one of the means to determine the site planning for the KX TD142 In the mode the frame loss and signal strength of a synchronous slot and the signal strength of the other slots can be measured when the portable station is linking with the KX TD 142 Flow Chart of the Site Survey Check the Cell Station ID number See pages 8 17 and 8 18 Assign the Cell Station ID number to the PS See page 8 19 Unplug the cable from the Cell Station See page 8 20 Prepare the DIP Switch of the Cell Station for the Radio Signal Test mode Ore Paes eet Locate the Cell Station temporarily and con nect the AC power cord See page 8 22 Survey the site using the PS See pages 23 through 25 Were the correct results obtained No Disconnect the AC power cord set the DI
244. another jack number Display example Slav2 14 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter other jack numbers 15 Press STORE 16 Press END e A maximum of six jacks can be assigned twelve jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 e Neither Jack number 01 nor the manager extension can be assigned as a voice mail port jack e The jack numbers correspond to the voice mail port in numerical order Example Stored jack numbers Jacks 02 03 05 08 11 13 Jack 02 Voice mail numbers 01 02 Jack 03 Voice mail numbers 03 04 Jack 05 Voice mail numbers 05 06 Jack 08 Voice mail numbers 07 08 Jack 11 Voice mail numbers 09 10 Jack 13 Voice mail numbers 11 12 Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 4 66 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment t Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the extension number for the voice mail number These numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access e Voice mail number VM KX TD816 01 through 12 KX TD1232 01 through 24 e Extension Number 2 to 4 digits VM 01 265 VM 02 266 VM 03 267 VM 04 268 VM 05 269 VM 06 270 VM 07 277 VM 08 278 VM 09 281 VM 10 282 VM 11 283 VM 12 284 VM 13 271 VM 14 272 VM 15 273 VM 16 274 VM 17 275 VM 18 276 VM 19 279 VM 20 280 VM 21 285 VM 22 2
245. arding No Answer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination e An ISDN extension can be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Station Programming ccccceecceeeeseeeteeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding No Answer Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding Follow Me Description If you forget to set Call Forwarding All Calls before you leave your desk this allows you to set the same function
246. art 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 Connect 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The extension of the jack number 01 should be set to Connect e In case of the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01 Section 3 Features Extension Connection Assignment 4 136 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 612 Data Line Security Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets or cancels the Data Line Security mode on an extension basis e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e On Off All jacks Off 1 Enter 612 Display Data Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display exampl
247. ating numbers are subject to program 100 Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks e Floating numbers and extension numbers should be unique Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 e You can leave the entry empty e To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension number in programs 003 Extension Number Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment and 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment The default of each extension number is as follows 003 Extension Number Set KX TD816 201 through 216 301 through 316 KX TD1232 201 through 264 301 through 364 012 ISDN Extension Number Set Not stored 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 265 through 280 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment Not stored Feature References Section 3 Features Floating Station 4 166 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 814 Modem Standard Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the modem standard There are two standards available BELL and CCITT BELL CCITT CCITT 1 Enter 814 Display MOD 2 Press NEXT EM Standard Display example MODEM CCITT 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection
248. atures 3 Features I Intercom Calling Description Conditions Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the system e Extension numbers are assigned to all extensions by system programming An extension number is programmed to be two three or four digits The ISDN extension number is programmed to be one two or three digits e Names can be given to extension numbers by system programming An extension number and a name if programmed is shown on the display PT during an intercom call e DSS buttons permit one touch access to an extension and provide Busy Lamp Field e KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 users can make an extension call with an extension dialling directory on the display e After dialling an extension number the user will hear one of the following Ringback tone indicates that the other extension is being called Confirmation tone indicates that the user can perform Voice Calling Busy tone indicates that the other extension is busy Do Not Disturb tone indicates that the other extension has DND assigned Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 013 ISDN Extension Name Set 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Station Programming
249. ault Programming Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 500 numbers from 000 through 499 e Speed dial number 000 through 499 Telephone number 24 digits max All speed dial numbers Not stored 1 Enter 001 Display 001 SYS SPD DIAL Press NEXT 2 Display SPD Code Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number Press STORE To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 9 8 Press END d w 2 wa 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Press either Soft 3 NEXT shown on the display 11 The message line advises you to enter a speed dial 12 If the telephone number has already been stored 13 Enter the telephone number that you want to store 14 Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry 15 Your entry is now stored 16 Select the best way for you to store another speed Program address This address is printed at the top of every page to allow you to quickly find the desired program Running title tells you which group the program belongs to Program
250. ber is displayed Display example PS01 0 4 Enter a charge limit To delete the charge limit press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e If the charge limit is set 0 no restriction is applied To assign all PSs to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by program 125 Assignment of Denomination Section 3 Features Budget Management Charge Fee Reference 8 48 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 656 PS Charge Verification Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the PS which is allowed to refer or clear the charge information on the extension CO line department code account code and total e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e Enable Disable All PSs Enable 1 Enter 656 Display PS Charge Refer 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 Enable 4 Keep pressing SEL
251. ber of available B channels Programming example 1 To install TD290 and TD281 to the Master system 30 Y NN 2 To install TD290 to the Master and TD280 to the Slave systems 30 N NY e ISDN layer mode L1 Permanent Call e ISDN data link mode L2 Permanent Call ISDN TEI mode TEI Fix 0 through 63 Automatic PRI Section 7 7 450 Default Programming Conditions Feature References 7 3 PRI System Programming PRI Configuration conta KX TD816 8 Y Permanent Permanent Fix0 KX TD1232 30Y NN Permanent Permanent Fix0 1 Enter 450 Display PRI Config 2 Press NEXT Display example 0 YYYY 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired combination of the channel number and the card status is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT Display example Ll Permanent 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired ISDN layer mode is displayed 7 Press STORE 8 Press NEXT Display example L2 Permanent 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired ISDN data link mode is displayed 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT Display example TEI Fix 0 12 Enter the desired TEI 0 through 63 or press CLEAR TRANSFER to select Auto 13 Press END e For KX TD1232 when system connection is activated the maximum number of available CO lines is limited to 38 Therefore this program is required e For KX TD1232 when you assign the number of B channels to 18 22 or 26 ISDN Fractional Servi
252. cabinet to go down through the cabinet covers To guard the cords smooth the cut edge 9 Close the cabinet cover and secure the outside screw Cut here 7 6 PRI Section 7 3 PRI System Programming 450 PRI Configuration Description Assigns the number of B channels which are actually used out of the 8 PRI line channels for KX TD816 or 30 PRI line channels for KX TD1232 and the installation location of the CO line card KX TD181 or KX TD182 or BRI card KX TD281 or KX TD282 the CO line unit KX TD180 or BRI unit KX TD280 The ISDN layer 1 active mode ISDN data link mode and ISDN TEI mode can be also assigned Selection KX TD816 e B channel number and installation spot 8 Y 0 YY Y the card can be installed this area is not changeable ex 8 Yo LL Not available Status of the expansion area of the system Status of the basic area of the system the number of available B channels Programming example 1 To install TD290 and TD282 8 Y KX TD1232 e B channel number and installation spot 30 Y NN 30 N YN 30 N NY 26 Y NY 26 N YY 22 Y YN 18 Y YY 0 YYYY Y the card can be installed this area is not changeable N the card is not installed ex 30 Y NN Esta of the expansion area of the slave system Status of the basic area of the slave system Status of the expansion area of the master system _ Status of the basic area of the master system L the num
253. cards with Connection Cable KX TD196E Remote Card KX TD280E 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD281E 4 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD282E 2 ISDN SO Line Card KX T30865E Doorphone KX A46E Battery Adaptor System Components Table Note The models marked can be installed only in KX TD1232 The models marked can be installed only in KX TD816 In this Installation Manual the suffix E of each model number is omitted The Digital Super Hybrid System is abbreviated as DSHS The Digital Proprietary Telephone is abbreviated as DPT Other proprietary telephone analogue type is abbreviated as APT A Single Line Telephone is abbreviated as SLT Important Information FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience A 5 amp fuse is fitted in this plug Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 Check for the ASTA mark gt or the BSI mark Y on the body of the fuse If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN
254. ce must be provided by a telephone company e The available CO line numbers in program 400 are changed according to this program but CO09 through CO16 for KX TD816 and CO25 through COS54 for KX TD1232 are not assignable None 7 8 PRI Section 7 3 PRI System Programming 45 Description Selection Default Programming PRI Reference CO Assigns which CO line number system data each PRI line uses except for the following programs e 401 CO Line Group Assignment e 419 Subscribers Number Assignment e 421 CO Line Name Assignment After assigning this program the following program data will become available for PRI line CO 09 through CO16 for KX TD816 or CO 25 through 54 for KX TD1232 e 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night e 420 Direct Dialling In Day e 429 Direct Dialling In Night e 603 604 DIL 1 N extension and Delayed ringing Day Night e 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night e 615 616 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension e 661 662 PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night KX TD816 e CO line number of PRI line 09 through 16 x all CO lines e CO line number 1 through 8 KX TD1232 e CO line number of PRI line 25 through 54 x all CO lines e CO line number 01 through 24 KX TD816 All CO lines PRI line CO 5 KX TD1232 All CO lines PRI line CO 9 1 Enter 451
255. ceived You can select the display type from one of the following Caller The incoming caller s telephone number and name are displayed CO Line The CO line number and name assigned in the 421 program are displayed DDI The called party s DDI number and extension name is displayed e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e Display Type Caller CO Line DDI All PSs Caller 1 Enter 676 Display PS Incoming Disp 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 Caller 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all PSs to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number e If the receiving call is in the 1 N status the display only shows CO Line Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Display Display Call Information 8 66 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 677 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References
256. cess Description Conditions Allows the extension user to have access to the features of a host PBX or Central Office such as Call Waiting etc Register Recall signal can be sent out to the CO line e This feature is effective only during an outside call e The Register Recall Signal must be assigned as required by the host PBX or CO line e With a proprietary telephone the RECALL or FLASH RCL button or the feature number is used to perform this function With a single line telephone the feature number is used to perform this feature e During outside calls a RECALL or FLASH RCL stored in System Speed Dialling Station Speed Dialling or One Touch Dialling functions as External Feature Access not as Recall Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering External feature access 413 Register Recall Signal Time 990 System Additional Information Field 3 Section 3 Features Host PBX Access Recall Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual External Feature Access ExXtra Device Port XDP Description Conditions EXtra Device Port XDP expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension jack to contain two telephones A digital proprietary telephone DPT and a single line telephone SLT or DSS console and SLT can be connected to the same jack but have different extension numbers so
257. coming lines are ringing Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment DPT Features Answering Direct CO Line Features 3 5 A 3 Features Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Description Allows the caller to be informed when the called party or the selected line becomes free Automatic Callback Extension If the caller answers the callback ringing the called extension automatically starts ringing Automatic Callback CO Line If the caller answers the callback ringing the line is automatically selected to allow the user to make an outside call Conditions e If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings within 10 seconds the callback is cancelled e More than one extension user can set this function to one extension or CO line at the same time Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic callback busy cancel Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Automatic Configuration Description The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension number configuration information and the VPS automatically creates mailboxes with this data Quick Setup Conditions e The data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jack port e If two or more line
258. ct Station Redial Last Number Selection DSS Redial Saved Number One Touch Dialling Special Display Features Operation References DPT Features User Manual Full One Touch Dialling 3 68 0 Features 3 Features H Handset Headset Selection Description The system supports the use of headsets on proprietary telephones Conditions e The headset is an user supplied item e To set headset mode on a digital proprietary telephone PT use station programming To set headset mode on an analogue PT use the handset headset selector provided on the set and or on the headset Programming References Station Programming ccecccecceseereeeneeeeceteeeeees User Manual Handset Headset Selection Feature References None Operation References None Handset Microphone Mute Description Allows the KX T7400 series digital proprietary telephone user to turn off the handset microphone for privacy Conditions e This is effective for the handset microphone only Only your voice will be muted during a handset conversation e The user can hear the other party s voice during Handset Microphone Mute Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References DPT Features User Manual Handset Microphone Mute Features 3 68 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s 3 Features H Handsfree Answerback Description Conditions Allows the speakerphone telephone user to
259. ction Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Assigns the phantom extension number e Location number 001 through 128 e Phantom extension number 2 through 4 digits All locations Not stored 1 Enter 130 Display Phantom NO 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO 7 gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 001 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 Not Stored 4 Enter a phantom extension number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 128 phantom extension numbers Each number has two to four digits consisting of numbers 0 through 9 e The first one or two digits of the phantom extension numbers are subject to program 100 Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks Phantom extension numbers and other extension numbers should be unique Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 To avoid making an invalid entry check the other extension numbers in programs 003 Extension Number Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Numbe
260. current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number 4 Press gt to enter another jack number 5 Repeat steps 3 through 4 to enter another jack number 6 Press STORE 7 Press NEXT to program another jack number Display example Mast2 8 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter another jack number 9 Press STORE 10 Press END KX TD1232 1 Enter 126 Display VMS Port Asn 2 Press NEXT to program the Master System Display example Mastl 3 Enter a jack number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new jack number Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital System Programming 4 65 Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 126 4 3 System Programming Voice Mail Number Assignment conta Conditions Feature References 4 Press to enter another jack number 5 Repeat steps 3 through 4 to enter another jack number 6 Press STORE 7 Press NEXT to program another jack number Display example Mast2 8 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter another jack number 9 Press STORE 10 Press NEXT to program the Slave System Display example Slavl 11 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to enter another jack number 12 Press STORE 13 Press NEXT to program
261. d Channel 2 m m Channel 5 gy E Channel 8 E E m 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 E Channel 3 mmi mm Channel 6 gy ma Channel 9 E 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Note e To see the signal strength of more than one Cell Station the channel for each Cell Station needs to be set e Up to eight Cell Stations can be surveyed at the same time If more than one Cell Station is in Radio Signal Test mode each DIP Switch channel must be different DECT Portable Station Section 8 21 8 2 5 Site Survey Connecting the AC Adaptor to the Cell Station After setting the DIP Switch connect the AC Adaptor KX A11BS1 230 ACV 50Hz to the Cell Station Note e Only use the AC Adaptor for the Site Survey 8 22 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 5 Site Survey Radio Signal Test using the PS After locating the Cell Station s temporarily execute the Radio Signal Test using the PS The PS scans whether there is a Cell Station it can link with on channel 0 right after entering the Radio Signal Test mode The channel to be scanned can be changed by pressing the appropriate 0 through 9 keys 1 Set the PS Power Switch to ON while pressing Talk Ce Flash FUNCTION lt 0 4 gt and at the same time 2 Press e To survey other slots scroll by pressing Next or Previous To survey other channels enter the chan nel number 0 through
262. d function button System programming of extension numbers and names is required Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 013 ISDN Extension Name Set 100 Flexible Numbering Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks eS a a None Special Display Features Extension Dialling Features 3 125 S 3 Features Station Speed Dialling Description Conditions A list of the names and telephone numbers stored for One Touch Dialling is displayed allowing the user to make a one touch call by name without having to know the number e It is necessary to program One Touch Dialling Numbers and Names into the 10 function buttons F1 through F10 e It is programmable to select the first display number or name Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 990 System Additional Information Field 19 Station Programming 0 cccccceececeereeeteeeteeeteeeeeees User Manual Station Speed Dialling Number Name Assignment KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 only Section 3 Features One Touch Dialling Special Display Features Station Speed Dialling System Feature Access Menu Description Conditions This feature provides a display of the system features available a
263. de insert H between the codes as aaaHbbb If nothing is stored it will operate as H e If X F is stored for GETMSG a mailbox number programmed in program 609 Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the port succeeding the Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration 4 54 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 115 Adjust Time Description Used to set the time for checking the normality of the system Every day at the programmed time system data is checked If an error is checked it is recorded onto error log Selection e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 e AM PM Default 1 00 AM Programming 1 Enter 115 Display Adjust Time 2 Press NEXT to program hour Display example 1 00 AM 3 Enter the hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new hour 4 Press m to program minute 5 Enter the Minute To change the current entry enter the new minute 6 Press m to program AM PM 7 Press SELECT for AM or PM 8 Press STORE 9 Press END Conditions You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References None System Programming 4 55 116 4 3 System Programming ROM Version Display Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Confirms the version of the ROM of Master and Slave Systems Display example P111A50101A Version Date System Number KX TD
264. de at the same time in one range PS DECT Portable Station KX TD7500 Up to 16 PSs in the KX TD816 system and up to 64 PSs in the KX TD1232 system can be assigned as extensions For more details about the PS please refer to the User Manual The Cell Station KX TD142 in this product is a Restricted Product subject to the laws of your country It should not be exported or brought out of your country with out authorisation from the appropriate governmental authorities 8 2 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 Wireless System Installation 8 2 1 Wireless System Outline System Capacity CO Line KX TD1232 x 2 System Connection KX TD816 KX TD1232 4 16 KX TD180 x 1 8 Extension Line KX TD816 KX TD1232 a Cee Wired Wireless Wired Wireless Wired Wireless Basic 8 0 16 0 32 0 KX TD170 x 1 16 0 24 0 48 0 KX TD170 x 2 32 0 64 0 KX TD144 x 1 12 16 20 64 40 64 KX TD144 x 2 m 24 64 48 64 Note KX TD180 4 CO Line Unit KX TD170 8 Station Line Unit For details about the optional units refer to the main Installation Manual RF Specifications Radio Access Method Multi Carrier TDMA TDD Multiplex 12 Carrier Frequency Interval 1728 KHz Transmission Speed 1152 Kbps Frame Structure 10 msec frame TX12 slots Rx12 slots Modulation Scheme Roll off factor 0 5 50 roll off in the transmitter Data Coding for Modulator Differential Coding
265. department code for ISDN port apply to all terminal equipment on the same SO bus Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card 2 4 4 CO Line Connection Optional Unit Programming References Section 4 System Programming 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 013 ISDN Extension Name Set 014 Budget Management on ISDN Port 422 ISDN Port Type 3 76 Features 3 Features 423 424 425 426 427 428 437 438 613 615 t a a a a a es a E aaar ISDN Extension ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode ISDN Configuration ISDN Data Link Mode ISDN TEI Mode ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number ISDN Extension Progress Tone Multiple Subscriber Number Set 439 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN MSN ISDN Class of Service 616 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night for e The possible parameter combinations are listed below The underlined selections are recommended The selections marked are activated regardless of the assignments 422 ISDN 423 ISDN 424 ISDN 425 ISDN 426 ISDN Program Port Type Layer 1 Active Configuration Data Link TEI Mode Mode Mode Permanent Point Permanent Fix Automatic CO Multipoint Patainster Call Call e Permanent Point Permanent 2 Extension Call ae i a Permanent Multipoint Call Automatic Feature References None Operation References ISDN Telep
266. desired quick dial number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of eighty quick dial numbers A maximum of sixteen digits consisting of 0 through 9 RECALL or FLASH PAUSE or hyphen can be assigned to a quick dial number e Before programming assign a feature number for each location first in program 104 Quick Dial Assignment Section 3 Features Quick Dialling System Programming 4 29 010 4 2 Manager Programming Budget Management Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the extension basis e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD 1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Charge limitation Charge 0 through 99999999 All jacks 0 1 Enter 010 Display Charge Limit 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 0 4 Enter a charge limitation To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 5 Press S
267. ding Version description See Version 4 description See Version 4 description Disconnect default Connects or Disconnects the CO line if nothing is dialled Do not disconnect within the pre set time after seizing the CO line Version 1 description See Version 4 description See Version 4 description 0 Transform default Assigns whether the system transforms an incoming DDI Do not transform call number directly to a specific extension Version description See Version 4 description See Version 4 description Automatic Assigns whether the LCR is applied to any CO line or Any CO default only to CO lines selected by Automatic Line Access Program Step 103 Version 1 description See Version 4 description See Version 4 description Hold Retrieval Assigns if pressing the HOLD twice acts as Exclusive Hold default Exclusive Hold or Hold Retrieval Version 1 description See Version 4 description See Version 4 description 0 display Assigns whether the system displays the LCR do not display default Authorisation Code while programming N A not available Version 4 00 7 Panasonic Program step 990 Option Programming PBX version changes Versions 2 description See Version 4 description 0 Do not add Assigns whether to add the extension number to the 1 Add default subscriber number for the CLIP and CLOP Bm Fr a Uses the new program step 111 m e e o 42 Version 4 Reserved 0 Transform
268. display during System Speed Dialling or One Touch Dialling Numbers can be assigned to Programmable Feature buttons on PT and DSS Consoles When a display telephone user makes a call to the telephone number that is set to Secret Dialling all or part of the number does not appear on the display Additionally KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 model telephones are capable of secret dialling for Station Speed Dialling numbers Conditions e When storing a number press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the number to be concealed e You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number e The concealed part will be printed out by SMDR Programming References Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set 990 System Additional Information Field 53 Station Programming 0 cecccceceseeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment One Touch Dialling Button Feature References Section 3 Features One Touch Dialling System Speed Dialling Special Display Features Station Speed Dialling Operation References DPT Features User Manual Secret Dialling 3 123 1 Features Page left blank for future upgrade s S 3 Features Special Display Features The KX T7235 KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 feature a display that allows the user to originate calls or to access system facilities with ease The display prompts the user with information rela
269. e 01 1 Off 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In case of the KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Section 3 Features Data Line Security System Programming 4 137 613 4 8 Extension Programming ISDN Class of Service Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Programs each ISDN port for a Class of Service COS The COS determines the call handling abilities of each port A primary and a secondary COS numbers can be assigned per port e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 all ports KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 all ports e COS number 1 through 8 All ports COS 1 COS 1 1 Enter 613 Display ISDN COS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first number you can also press NEXT Display example 03 COS1 COS1 4 Enter a COS number for primary number To change the current entry enter the new number
270. e N N L X L pos 61 Selects which itemisation code is used by a Doorphone See Field 59 N A N A with the Call Forwarding feature Assigns if the Operator can set DND feature N A Determines the telephone which can activate Whisper N A OHCA N A N A not available N A Enables or Disables LCR with DTMF function re ooo i i N A A A A N A N A N A N A N A A Assigns incoming bell frequency for SLT s Version 4 00 9
271. e COS Description COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions Each extension is assigned a primary and a secondary COS numbers Eight Classes of Service are available Conditions e The operator can switch the extension s COS between a primary and a secondary e The programmable items are shown below 1 Forwards a call to an outside party 2 Transfers a call to an outside party 3 Overrides Do Not Disturb of the called extension 4 Account Code Entry operation verified all calls verified toll restriction override option 5 Outgoing call restriction level Day mode Night mode 1 through 8 6 Restriction of outside call duration 7 The number of permitted dialling digits during an outside call 8 Call Forwarding Follow Me 9 System speed dialling call restriction level Day mode Night mode 10 Switches the Day Night service 11 Unlocks the door opener 12 Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call 13 Connected Line Identification Restriction 14 Calling Line Identification Restriction 15 Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU Busy CFB No Reply CFNR 16 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Programming References Section 4 System Programming 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line 507 Do Not Disturb Override 508 Account Code En
272. e TRG1 2 0sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The disconnect time must be longer than the requirements of the central office or the host PBX e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features Recall System Programming 4 101 415 4 6 CO Line Programming CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Description Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between the originated outside call and the established outside call If this is enabled the system disconnects the line with the time set in program 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set when CPC Signal is detected Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Enable detection Disable no detection Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 415 Display CPC Outgoing Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired
273. e This is enabled by storing an extension number a telephone number or a feature number of up to 16 digits on a One Touch Dialling button The number of buttons available depends on the type of PT One Touch Dialling buttons can be programmed to flexible buttons CO DSS or PF Programmable Feature Conditions e It is possible to store an account code into a One Touch Dialling button e Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling manual dialling Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used together e It is possible to store a number consisting of 17 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in two One Touch Dialling buttons In this case a line access code should not be stored on the second button e If the Full One Touch Dialling is enabled there is no need to go off hook before pressing the One Touch Dialling button Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming 0 cccccceecceeeeteeeteeeteeeeeeaeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment One Touch Dialling Button Full One Touch Dialling Assignment DSS Console Features 0 0 00ccccccccccccesssssesscseeesssseesees User Manual Station Programming One Touch Dialling Assignment Section 3 Features Full One Touch Dialling DPT Features One Touch Dialling DSS Console Features One Touch Dialling One Touch Access fo
274. e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Disable Enable All COS Disable 1 Enter 504 Display Call FWD to CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Call Forwarding to CO Line System Programming 4 117 507 4 7 COS Programming Do Not Disturb Override Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform Do Not Disturb DND Override e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Disable Enable All COS Disable 1 Enter 507 Display DND Override 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT
275. e Do Not Disturb feature is assigned Do Not Disturb b If Call Forwarding All Calls to extension 223 is assigned FWD A11 Ext223 c If Call Forwarding Busy to extension 234 is assigned FWD BSY Ext234 d If Call Forwarding No Answer to extension 345 is assigned FWD NA Ext345 e If Call Forwarding Busy No Answer to extension 200 is assigned FWD B NA Ext200 f If Call Forwarding To CO Line number 91201431 is assigned FWD CO 91201431 Features 3 51 D 3 Features e If the display characters exceed 16 digits the mark amp is shown at the right hand edge e This is used to display the data programmed for each PF Programmable Feature DSS SAVE or REDIAL button If Full One Touch Dialling is enabled on the telephone Full One Touch Dialling will be active instead Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Display Self Extension Number Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to display their own jack number and extension number in station programming mode Conditions Display example If the jack number is 02 and the extension number is 202 Jack02 lt gt EXT202 Programming References Station Programming cceecceecceseereeeteeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Self Extension Number Confirmation Feature References None Operation References Not applicable
276. e Fee Reference Account Code Set Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Account Code Entry Features 3 115 P 3 Features Pulse to Tone Conversion Description This feature allows the extension user to change from pulse dial to tone DTMF dial so that the user can access special services such as computer accessed long distance service Conditions e This feature works only on CO lines set to Pulse Dialling mode or Call Blocking mode e Dial Type Selection provides selection of a dial mode for each CO line e Changing tone to pulse is not possible Programming References Section 4 System Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection Feature References Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Pulse to Tone Conversion Quick Dialling Description Quick Dialling offers the extension user one touch access to a desired party This is enabled by storing an extension number or a telephone number up to 16 digits as a quick dial number Conditions e Up to eighty quick dial numbers can be stored e For example Quick Dialling is convenient for room service calls in a hotel e You must assign a feature number first in program 104 Quick Dial Assignment and then a quick dial number in program 009 Quick Dial Numb
277. e is a maximum of 8 carriers each of which can be given a maximum of 16 commands Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR 4 154 System Programming 4 9 LCR Programming 7X23 LCR CO Line Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns CO line groups that correspond to an LCR carrier e Program address 7X23 X 1 8 carrier number e CO line group number 1 through 8 eight entries max Program 7123 carrier 1 12345678 Other programs carriers 2 8 Not stored 1 4 5 Enter a program address 7X23 Display example Trunk Group C1 Press NEXT Display example 12345678 Enter CO line group numbers in succession To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new numbers Press STORE Press END There is a maximum of 8 carriers each of which can be given a maximum of 8 CO line groups Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR System Programming 4 155 7X24 4 9 LCR Programming Authorization Code Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Registers an authorization code applied to a CO line The registered code is inserted into the A command position stored in program 7X22 LCR Carrier Modify Command e Program address 7X24 X 1 8 carrier number e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08
278. eans the first part of jack number in digital line Y Y 2 means the second part of the jack number in digital line To assign all voice mail numbers to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for voice mail number 01 Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones 4 68 System Programming Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 4 3 System Programming 129 Operator Queue Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Assigns the limited number of queue and the number of Hurry Up e Queue 0 through 8 e Number of Hurry Up 0 through 8 Queue 8 H UP 4 1 Enter 129 Display Operator Queue 2 Press NEXT Display example Queue 8 H UP 4 3 Enter a queue To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 4 Press gt 5 Enter a number of Hurry Up To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 6 Press STORE 7 Press END The queue should be longer than the number of Hurry Up Section 3 Features Automatic Overflow and Hurry Up Transfer System Programming 4 69 0 130 4 3 System Programming Phantom Extension Number Assignment Description Sele
279. eature number includes x or LD single line telephones cannot use it Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set 100 Flexible Numbering System speed dialling 509 510 Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling Day Night Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialling Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual System Speed Dialling Features 3 137 S 3 Features System Working Report Description The Digital Super Hybrid System automatically records the system s working state A printer connected to the EIA RS 232C port can be used to print the recorded data Recorded contents are as follows 1 Date of record e The date and time when cleared e The date and time when printed out 2 Incoming calls The number of incoming calls The number of answered incoming calls e The number of unanswered incoming calls e The ratio of the answered calls to the incoming calls Number of answered calls X 100 Number of incoming calls e The average time from receipt of call to answer of the incoming and answered calls e The average duration time of talk of the answered calls 3 Outgoing calls e The number of access requested e The number of access succeeded The number of access failed e The ratio
280. eatures 3 Features H Host PBX Access Description Conditions The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX This is performed by connecting a line from the host to a CO line in the Digital Super Hybrid System e To enable Host PBX Access put the host PBX line in a CO line group The user accesses the host PBX by selecting that CO line e A Host PBX Access Code is required to access CO lines of the host PBX e A pause if programmed can be inserted between the user dialled Host PBX Access Code and the following digits Automatic Pause Insertion Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that CO line group e Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible External Feature Access Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time Section 3 Features External Feature Access Pause Insertion Automatic Not applicable Features 3 71 H 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION Description Allows the operator to handle the front operator services such as check in check out timed reminder wake up call and room management This operation is applicable to only the operator extension with the KX T7235 or KX T7436 Check In Check Out Description Allows the operator to operate the check in check out service This feature can control the usage of an outside call by switching the Class of Ser
281. ecceccceseeeeeeeteeeeceteeeeees User Manual Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Feature References None Operation References Basic Operation User Manual Receiving Calls 3 94 Features 3 Features L Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line Description A proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences 1 Idle Line Preference When you go off hook you are connected to an idle line An idle line is automatically selected from the pre assigned lines 2 No Line Preference No line is selected when you go off hook You must select a line to make a call 3 Prime Line Preference When you go off hook you are connected to the pre assigned line Assign a line as your prime line beforehand Conditions e Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting e To set Prime Line Preference one prime line is selected from intercom or CO lines e The CO lines used by users must be connected by programming e To select Idle Line Preference CO lines available for the user should be programmed Also CO lines available for Automatic Line Access should be assigned e The user can override the Idle Prime Line Preference temporarily to select a specific line To select it press the desired line access button INTERCOM or CO button before going off hook or pressing the SP PHONE MONITOR button or if Full
282. ecords the error logs if necessary e If System Connection is established the Slave system makes a copy of the restored data of the Master system e In the event of a power failure system memory is protected by the factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Camp On and Call Park However if the system finds the wrong system data the indication Memory data loss is displayed on the display proprietary telephone of Operator 1 Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 113 P 3 Features Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Power Failure Transfer Description If a power failure should happen or during a system off line state single line telephone SLT which is connected the Power Failure jack should be connected straight to specific CO lines Connections between the CO lines and the SLTs are as follows KX TD816 The power failure transfer jacks CO 1 2 5 KX TD1232 The power failure transfer jacks of Master System CO 1 2 9 The power failure transfer jacks of Slave System CO 13 14 21 Conditions e Only SLT is available during a power failure If the power is restored during a call using a SLT the call is disconnected Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 2 Extension Connection 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer
283. ect Point If multiple equipment are connected select Multipoint e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port e After this assignment you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective Section 3 Features ISDN Extension System Programming 4 109 425 4 6 CO Line Programming ISDN Data Link Mode Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the data link mode on ISDN port basis e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 x all ports KX TD 1232 01 through 12 all ports e Permanent Call All ports Permanent 1 Enter 425 Display Data Link Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display example 03 Permanent 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port e After this assignment you should reset the s
284. ection will not work properly e When you install an ISDN SO Line Unit or and Card you should install it to the Master System first and then the Slave System If only installed to the Slave System noise may occur Programming References Section 4 System Programming 115 Adjust Time Feature References Section 3 Features System Connection Available for KX TD1232 only Installation 2 49 2 4 10 Battery Adaptor Connection User supplied car batteries can be used as a backup power supply in the event of a power failure In case of power failure the batteries automatically maintain the power to the main unit instantly The optional Battery Adaptor model KX A46 is required The Battery Adaptor should not be exposed to direct sunlight Keep the adaptor and car batteries away from heating appliances and fire Place car batteries in airy place Connection When connecting the battery adaptor keep the following in mind e Make sure of the polarities of batteries and wires e Make sure do not short the batteries and wires e To connect the two batteries use accessory wire 1 Assemble the cords and two car batteries Car batteries Red Yellow 12VDC each as shown Batt ay Adaniok B g 12 VDC J J Blue Accessory yee S je 12 VDC Fuse Holder 2 Insert the plug of the battery adaptor into Ground Wire the battery adaptor connector on the main unit
285. ed 1 Enter 006 Display Operator Manager 2 Press NEXT to program Operator 1 Display OP 1 Day Jack0Ol To program another item you can also keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired one is displayed 3 Enter a jack number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another item press NEXT or PREV 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END e Up to two operators and a manager can be programmed e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e The manager cannot be assigned the jack number of the DSS Console Port set in program 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment e If the assigned jack is in eXtra Device Port mode the proprietary telephone jack is treated as the manager operator extension e If there is no operator or manager press CLEAR in step 3 Section 3 Features Manager Extension Operator System Programming 4 25 007 4 2 Manager Programming DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment Description Assigns the jack numbers for the DSS Console and the paired extension Selection e DSS Console number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 08 for Master 09 through 16 for Slave e Jack number for DSS Console KX TD816 02 through 16 KX TD1232 02 through 32 fo
286. edial Call Park and Message Waiting features e The system automatically changes the current connection when the power supply stops If DC power is available from backup batteries in the event of an AC power failure the system does not change the current connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Feature References Section 3 Features Power Failure Transfer Installation 2 53 2 6 KX TD816 Starting the System for the First Time Set the power switch to OFF Set the system clear switch to CLEAR Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet Turn the power switch on Press the Reset button with a pointed tool The power indicator will flash 6 Slide the system clear switch to NORMAL while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds an amp WN The system will be initialized with default values The system will also check the CO lines extensions and optional cards and units _ System Clear Switch Reset Button o o o i iic a Te fet MCC M Power Indicator b To AC Outlet
287. eeceseeereeeteeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Hurry UP Button Voice Mail VM Transfer Button None Operator Service Features Features 3 107 O P Operator Call Description Conditions 3 Features Allows the extension user to call an extension operator by dialling the feature number if at least one operator is assigned There can be one or two extensions assigned as Operator 1 and 2 When an operator call default 0 is made the call is connected to Operator 1 If the Operator 1 s line is busy the call is connected to Operator 2 None Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Night 100 Flexible Numbering Operator call Operator 1 call Operator 2 call None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Operator Call PAGING FEATURES SUMMARY Description Paging allows you to make a voice announcement to multiple persons at the same time Your message is announced over the built in speakers of proprietary telephones and or external speakers external pagers The paged person can answer your page from a nearby telephone Making and answering a page is possible from either a proprietary or single line telephone You can do paging with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging and Transfer Itis also possible to deny the page Paging fea
288. eeeeneeeseenteenseees User Manual Station Programming Data Default Set 3 132 Features 3 Features S Station Speed Dialling Description Conditions Allows an extension user to store frequently dialled numbers in order to place a call with abbreviated dialling It is performed by dialling the feature number and a speed dial number from 0 through 9 Up to 10 numbers can be stored for each telephone e Station Speed Dialling can be followed by manual dialling to supplement the dialled digits e You may make a call with One Touch Dialling button instead of Station Speed Dialling e The single line telephone SLT may be replaced with a proprietary telephone PT temporarily to store one touch dialling into memory The Function Buttons F1 through F10 are corresponded to speed dial numbers as follows Fl 0 F6 5 F2 1 F7 6 F3 2 F8 7 F4 3 F9 8 F5 4 F10 9 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Station speed dialling Station speed dialling programming Section 3 Features One Touch Dialling Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Station Speed Dialling Features 3 133 S 3 Features System Connection Description System Connection allows two main units KX TD1232 to work together as one system This expands the capacity of the system number of extensions CO lines
289. eened to Extension Description Conditions Allows the extension user to voice announce to the extension and transfer the call None 3 32 Features 3 Features C Programming References Feature References Operation Reference User Manual Section 4 System Programming 990 System Additional Information Field 1 None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Transfer to Extension Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension Description Conditions Allows the user to transfer an intercom or outside call to directly transfer to an extension party After dialling the destination extension the user replaces the handset while hearing ringback tone e If the destination party does not answer within the transfer recall time the call will return to the user or Operator 1 You can select the desired one by system programming e This function is possible when the destination is sending ringback or busy tone If the destination is busy Camp On Transfer occurs e The ringing signal pattern follows the regular ringing pattern depending on the party being transferred outside or extension call ringing e It is possible for any extension user to transfer a call to the modem for remote maintenance e If music on hold is enabled music is sent to the caller while being transferred It is system programmable whether to send ringback tone or music on hold to the caller by program 990 Field 1 P
290. eferences Enables or disables to send the progress tone to ISDN extension on ISDN port basis e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 x all ports KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 x x all ports Enable Disable no tone All ports Disable 1 Enter 428 Display ISDN EXT Tone 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display example 03 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To assign all ports to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port Section 3 Features ISDN Extension System Programming 4 113 0 437 4 6 CO Line Programming Multiple Subscriber Number Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns a maximum of ten multiple subscriber numbers MSN on an ISDN SO port basis e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 01 through 12 e Location number 01 through 10 e MSN 16 digits max All ports All locations Not Stored 1 Enter 437
291. em programming To alternate the display press the CO button e The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by system programming 3 50 Features 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set Feature References 004 117 125 212 Extension Name Set Charge Display Selection Assignment of Denomination Call Duration Count Start Time 421 CO Line Name Assignment Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference CO Incoming Call Information Display Operation References Not applicable Display Extension Programmed Data Description Conditions Allows the display proprietary telephone user to confirm the features assigned on the buttons on the telephone When it is on hook that is when the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off pressing a button displays the use of the button or the information assigned to the button for five seconds e Display examples 1 If REDIAL SAVE or One Touch Dialling button is pressed the stored number is displayed 950 1001PP12345 amp 2 If the DSS or MESSAGE button is pressed the extension number and the name if assigned stored under the DSS button or the source of the Message Waiting is displayed 223 Tony 3 If Account button is pressed the display shows Account 4 If FWD DND button is pressed the selected feature assigned on the button is shown as follows a If th
292. ension Day Night eee eeeeeeeeeeee 4 96 411 Host PBX Access Codes ccccccecsssscecececeseesensecececeeseeessnteaeees 4 97 AT 2 PAS Oe TIS a shies aa lesa tuede uae boss steationes Las besa aot teen ates 4 99 413 Register Recall Signal Time iced as ead eee ens 4 100 414 Disconnect Time ccccccccccccecsesessnsecececececeessnsececeecesesenssteaeees 4 101 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set 00 0 eee eeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeees 4 102 416 Reverse Circuit ASSigNMent eeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeenaes 4 103 419 Subscriber Number Assignment cc ceceesceceeceeceeeeeeeneeeeeees 4 104 420 429 Direct Dialling In Day Night 00 eee eeeeeeeeeee 4 105 421 CO Line Name Assignment ceeeceeeececeeeeeceeececseeeeeeeeeeesaes 4 106 422 ISDN Port Fy Pe a aR aN R E a S 4 107 423 ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode sssseeessseesseessesssesesssesssresseesseessee 4 108 424 ISDN Configuration aise sess cies sasndceeadesgesdguvencavddisahiies ccavguncstennhcebeass 4 109 425 ISDN Data Link Mode cccccsessccecececeeeesessecececeeseeesenteaeees 4 110 16 Installation Manual Contents 4 7 4 8 F426 ISIN TEE Mode nnen onnee ea r na a 4 111 427 ISDN Extension Multiple Subscriber Number 00 4 112 428 ISDN Extension Progress Tone csscccesseeeeececeeeeeeseeeeesees 4 113 0 437 Multiple Subscriber Number Set cee eeeeeeeseceecseeeeeeneeeeeees 4
293. ension block 01 through 16 it is required to change the corresponding numbers assigned in programs 003 Extension Number Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment and 813 Floating Number Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Flexible Numbering Feature Number List Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 2 02 2nd hundred extension block 3 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 18 Automatic line access LCR 9 19 CO line group line access 8 20 System speed dialling x 21 Station speed dialling 6x 22 Station speed dialling programming 60 23 Doorphone call 61 24 Paging external 62 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 63 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup CO line 4 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 System Programming 4 37 100 4 3 System Programming Flexible Numbering contd Number Feature Default 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve CO line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 Door ope
294. enteeeeees 4 142 5 624 CLIP COLP Number for ISDN Extension Assignment 4 142 6 625 626 Doorphone Call Forwarding Day Night 4 142 7 4 9 LCR Programming ys scssecssessecssessssvsecsseeessondesssesvnsevnsnsesvonssonesessnsesens 4 143 POOO CCR MOG 25 5 2 a n A ess O O N seas 4 143 7002 BTL Access Codeine E eN 4 145 7003 Itemized Code S tnieks 4 146 0 7004 Internal ISDN Itemized Code Seto eccecccecccccceeeeeserseeees 4 146 1 7XOY LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 0 0 4 147 7X1Y LCR Time and Fee Set for Plans 1 through 8 1 0 4 149 7X20 LCR Exceptional Code Set iciuah Aeris deracniuigevsacae sabia 4 151 FXATECER Carrier Coders a a a T eis ase tees 4 153 7X22 LCR Carrier Modify Command eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 154 7X23 LCR CO Line Group Assignment eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 155 7X24 Authorization Code Set o ccccccccsccccccccessessssececeeeesesensnteaeees 4 156 4 10 Resource Programming cccccccccssssssccssssscccssscssccssssssssscsssssseees 4 157 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 4 157 S01 SMD Form ts gns ai ain 4 158 02 System Data Printouts ane a E 4 159 803 Music Source Use ccccceeeeessssesessessesssssssessssssssssssssseseseeees 4 160 04 External Pager BGM isp cc2st Gets etn oQied oh a a Gan 4 161 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone cceeecceceseeeesseeeeeteeeeeee
295. er Extension Number Transformation ISDN DDI Number ISDN Extension Number Transformation System Additional Information Fields 37 38 50 and 51 Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call Not applicable Features 3 48 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s 3 Features D Direct In Lines DIL Description Conditions Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to one or more answering points DIL 1 1 puts an incoming outside call to a single destination Assignable destinations are 1 extension 2 modem or 3 external pager This CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls but can be used by only one extension to receive calls DIL 1 N puts an incoming outside call to multiple destinations Assignable destinations are extensions only This CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make and receive calls Both DIL 1 1 and 1 N can have different destinations for day and night modes Night Service e Ifa CO line is programmed for both DIL 1 1 and DIL 1 N it is regarded as a DIL 1 1 line e DIL 1 1 to the modem allows the caller to perform remote administration DIL 1 1 to an external pager causes the pager to ring when receiving incoming calls TAFAS feature Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day
296. er 63 62 61 60 59 58 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 Area 7 There are 8 fields available in Area 7 as follows Display e ese a ELL xt Y cals abe sabe Sb oaks Abe ose Field number unused 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 System Programming 4 169 990 4 11 System Additional Information contd Option Programming Explanation Area Field Description Selection Default References 1 1 Sound source during transfer 0 ringback tone 1 e CALL 1 Music on Hold TRANSFER FEATURES e Music on Hold 2 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 Consultation 0 Consultation and then placing down the handset during Hold Hold an outside call single line telephones only 1 disconnection 3 Result of pressing the RECALL or 0 disconnection 1 e External FLASH RCL button on proprietary signal Feature Access telephones during an outside call 1 register recall e Recall signal 4 Enables or disables the dial tone between 0 disable 1 None obtaining a CO line and dialling the phone 1 enable number when using the one touch dial redial or speed dial function 5 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 Consultation 0 Consultation single line telephones only Hold Hold 1 disconnection 6 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent 0 80 ms 0 Voice Mail to the Voice Processing System VPS ports 1 160 ms Integration 7 Sets the time the
297. er Set in order for Quick Dial to be effective Example If you want to dial 1 to call extension 201 1 Change or clear the feature numbers which have 1 in the first digit in program 100 2 Assign 1 in the location number 01 in program 104 3 Assign 201 in a quick dial location number 01 same location number as the location number 01 in program 104 in program 009 Now you can dial the quick dial number 1 to call extension 201 e Quick Dialling is available even if the toll restriction level is 6 which denies the intercom callings 3 116 Features 3 Features R Programming References Feature References Operation Reference User Manual Recall Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 009 Quick Dial Number Set 104 Quick Dial Assignment None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Quick Dialling The RECALL or FLASH RCL button is used to allow a digital proprietary telephone user to disconnect from the current call and originate another call without hanging up first e By default setting pressing RECALL or FLASH RCL button with a digital proprietary telephone works as External Feature Access By changing the programmed data it works as Recall disconnection e Pressing the RECALL or FLASH RCL button re starts the conversation duration outputs an SMDR record inserts the automatic pause and checks toll restriction level again e It is required to
298. er Set conta Feature References An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits disagree with the setting of the program 100 Flexible Numbering 01 16 Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have two digits and some have three digits If two digits are assigned some have three digits and some have four digits Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack If XDP is disabled for the jack in program 600 EXtra Device Port the extension number of the second part XX 2 is not available XX jack number For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment of program 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment and 813 Floating Number Assignment Valid entry examples 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry examples 10 and 106 210 and 21 Program 004 Extension Name Set is used to give names to extension numbers Section 3 Features Display Call Information EXtra Device Port XDP Flexible Numbering Intercom Calling Special Display Features Extension Dialling System Programming 4 21 004 4 2 Manager Programming Extension Name Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditi
299. er jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice Mail or Automated Attendant ports e Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the display press gt or lt Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration System Programming 4 135 611 4 8 Extension Programming Extension Connection Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns whether the extension can perform all accesses or not e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Connect No Connect All jacks Connect 1 Enter 611 Display Ext Connection 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second p
300. er port number 01 you can also press NEXT 4 Press NEXT or PREV until the desired location number is displayed Display example 01 01 Disable 5 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 6 Press STORE 7 To program another location press NEXT or PREV 8 Repeat steps 5 and 6 9 To program another port press SELECT and the desired port number 10 Repeat steps 4 through 8 11 Press END System Programming 4 113 2 438 439 4 6 COLine Programming Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN MSN contd Conditions Feature References e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e When Enable is chosen in the programs 420 Direct Dialling In Day or 429 Direct Dialling In Night this program becomes effective Each extension number consists of 0 through 9 The and keys cannot be used You can set the extension numbers in programs 003 Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number and also floating numbers of the hunting groups and pagers in program 813 Floating Number Assignment To assign the operator enter 0 in step 5 When Multipoint is assigned in the program 424 ISDN Configuration an incoming outside call is received by
301. er to program step 420 Ver ISDN Line No Assignment N A for Analogue Lines Subscriber Number Assignment ISDN CO Lines only A 31 8 214 Message Waiting SLT Ring Default setting 10 min 00 N Off Hook Monitor N 417 CLIR Assignment CO As Version 4 As Version 4 N A per Extn By COS eee a a iy Cony Used for Analogue amp ISDN lines N A not available Version 4 00 3 Panasonic PROGRAM DESCRIPTION VERSION 3 VERSION 2 VERSION 1 Direct Dialling in Day Mode As Version 4 No separation for Day and Refer to program step 418 ee eee ee es eee Layer 1 Activation Mode Used for Extension only i A ISDN Data Link Mode Used for Extension only ISDN TEI Mode Used for Extension only MSN ISDN Extension i A ISDN Extn Progress Tone Direct Dialling In Night 437 Multiple Subscriber Number 438 439 Extension Ringing Assignment for ISDN MSN As Version 4 N A N ee SC 509 510 Toll Restriction System Speed Dial As Version 4 As Version 4 Refer to program step 300 Day Night Door Opener Access 513 Night Service Access As Version 4 As Version 4 Not programmable Operator function only N A N A N A CFU CFB CFNR As Version 4 N A Call FWD Unconditional Busy No reply Network Feature Enable Disable by COS 519 Off Hook Call Announce OHCA See 990 Field 47 See 990 Field 47 N A Can be assigned on a COS basis N A not available 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 437 50
302. eration Notice This PBX should only be used on BeT lines on which specific BT services or facilities are provided CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Attention e The apparatus is designed to be installed and operated under controlled conditions of ambient temperature and a relative humidity not greater than 60 e Avoid installing the apparatus in damp or humid environments such as bathrooms or swimming pools e The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing e Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps motors and televisions These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the Digital Super Hybrid System This unit should be kept free of dust moisture high temperature more than 40 C 104 F and vibration and should not be exposed to direct sunlight Never attempt to insert wires pins etc into the vents or other holes of this unit If there is any trouble disconnect the unit from the telephone line Plug the telephone directly into the telephone line If the telephone operates properly do not reconnect the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired If the telephone does not operate properly chances are that the trouble is
303. ergency number after seizing the CO line e Emergency numbers are allowed to call even in the following cases e in Account Code Verified mode e in any toll restriction level e after the pre assigned charge limit is reached e in Electronic Station Lockout e A maximum of ten emergency numbers are assignable Any number can be stored as an emergency number 999 and 112 are already stored by default settings e The LCR feature is not available for the emergency call Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 311 Emergency Dial Number Set None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Emergency Call End to End DTMF Signalling Tone Through Description Conditions DTMF signalling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies This system allows the proprietary telephone user to send DTMF signals to the line during an established call e If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF Tone Through mode is established automatically after the dialling sequence is finished and the call is established e If the dial type of the line is assigned to dial pulse Tone Through mode is established after the dialling sequence is finished and the buttons are pressed Pulse to Tone Conversion e This function also applies to extension and conference calls Programming References Feature Reference
304. ering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 Section 3 Features Direct Dialling In DDI 4 142 0 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 619 ISDN DDI Number ISDN Extension Number Transformation Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Used to convert a DDI number to an ISDN extension number in order to send an incoming DDI call to a specific extension if you do not want to use your ISDN extension number as the DDI number e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 e DDI Number 1 through 6 digits Blank no number All ports Blank no number 1 Enter 619 Display ISDN EXT DDI 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 or 03 you can also press NEXT Display example 03 4 Enter a DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To assign no number press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 4 DDI numbers for KX TD816 and 8 DDI numbers for KX TD1232 Each DDI number can be one through six digits consisting of 0 through 9 e For the KX TD1232 port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see
305. ering system programming mode and for maintenance from a personal computer Password 4 through 7 digits 1234 1 Enter 107 Display System Password 2 Press NEXT Display example Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e The password can be from four to seven digits long The valid numbers are from 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they are not stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer System Programming with Proprietary Telephone System Programming 4 45 108 4 3 System Programming One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Enables or disables the function of automatically holding the outside call when a DSS button on the DSS Console or proprietary telephone is pressed Enable Disable Enable 1 4 5 Enter 108 Display DSS Auto Hold Press NEXT Display example Auto HLD Enable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END This assignment applies to all DSS buttons on all DSS Consoles and on all proprietary telephones in the system Section 3 Features One Touch Transfer by DSS Button 4 46 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Un
306. ery en aa a al T a R RS a 4 127 602 Extension Group Assignment sssessseesssesseesseeesseeesseessersseessee 4 128 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day PINE Mie cghtaceicctaactonloodetest ecco btivaeitalaaaconleheesatencesaaae 4 129 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night ronn shaga ncaa aetedica sndacn teehee daugeaateneoeens 4 131 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night 4 133 609 Voice Mail Access Codes cccccccccssssesessssssssessssssssssssssssssrseees 4 135 611 Extension Connection Assignment eeceeceeeeeceereeeeteeeeees 4 136 612 Data Line Security isi cisssceciiccscsadissseaetasencadsaseredeasscceiae sededetawerace 4 137 613 ISDN Class of Service ccc ccccccsessssssssssssssssssssssssssssesssssesseees 4 138 615 616 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night for ISDN Extension eee eeeeseeeeceeeeeeeee 4 139 617 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment 4 14 618 ISDN DDI Number Extension Number Transformation 4 142 0 619 ISDN DDI Number ISDN Extension Number Transformation cceeeceeeeeeeeeee 4 142 1 Installation Manual Contents 620 621 Extension Intercept Routing Day Night 000 0 4 142 3 622 Incoming Call Dis play escics i ewtides eoeeaanele Bite le Boece 4 142 4 623 CLIP COLP Number Assignment eccceeseceeeseee
307. es selections LV MSG Leave Message This command is transmitted to a VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port AA SVC Automated Attendant Service If AA Service is set to Start in program 990 field 10 the AA SVC command is sent toa VM port if an incoming outside call is answered by the VM port e Other programming required program addresses 106 602 609 990 field 10 990 field 18 2 Hearing the message at the extension If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button indicator of the concerned telephone the telephone user can hear the message by pressing the MESSAGE button e Required entries selections GETMSG Get Message This command is transmitted toa VM port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted preceding the GETMSG command above This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the MESSAGE indicator e Other programming required program addresses 609 990 field 18 B If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant AA Service An AA port answers an incoming outside call to provide AA services such as call transfer receiving a message e Required entries selections VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted before LV MSG code if Operator transfers a call to an extension and then it
308. es delet oeenesdeaies elapsed Display m and Date pean Gitta n aas 10 Installation Manual Contents Display Contrast Adjustment c csceseseccetseecoreescenseccenseeceeesees 3 53 DO N t Dist rb COND tata sienstien Manca tar eR Gnu i Sided a SaT Bes 3 54 Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call 3 55 Do Not Disturb DND Override cccccecsecceceesenseeeeseneeeesssseeeees 3 55 Door Opener sesira reni apea A TE ETA NES 3 56 Doorphione Callisia aaa e a RETE Ss 3 57 0 Doorphone Call Forwarding to ISDN ssesseseeseseesesesesresserererrersesere 3 57 1 DSS Consolen i r aE A A E TSS 3 58 E Electronic Station Lockout ois scccccsss oslo sienceseadsagtesdeentecckeeshoed aces tencaeess 3 60 Emersency Call utes county eteaieat Senate fe a ana Sankar tuna e R cen tees 3 61 End to End DTMF Signalling Tone Through 3 61 Exclusive Hold Call Hold Exclusive CO Line Intercom 3 25 26 Extension Connection ASsignMent ceceesecsseceseceseeeeeesnaeeeseenees 3 62 Extension Group cssicevseckevish sev ersavavadsaeeaeianeavcati sees Aa Ni 3 62 External Feature ACCOSS 2iicsesincectadsiicess nuieedeneutleaneedecericeeaneteetit 3 63 Extra Device Port XDP ices crs i S cases auatsic mauve aAA AEEA A Ta 3 63 F Flexible Button Button Flexible 00 0 0 cecceeseeseeeeesesesreeeees 3 12 Flexible Numbering 34 5 213 eu Co eee eck 3 64 Floating SAULT gsc cet esters ats mela eee c a e ae atau Ne ite eet 3 67
309. escription Conditions This system offers two methods of Intercom Calling Ring Calling and Voice Calling Ring Calling informs the called party of an incoming call with a ring tone while the Voice Calling uses the calling party s voice The proprietary telephone user can select tone or voice calling by station programming If the user selects Voice Calling the calling party can talk to the user immediately after confirmation tone The calling extension user is able to change the calling method pre selected once at a time by the called extension by pressing Ring Calling can be switched to Voice Calling and vice versa This operation is available for both proprietary and single line telephone users during calling Single line telephone users receive calls with Ring Calling only Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Station Programming cceecceecceseeceeeneeeeenteenaeees User Manual Intercom Alerting Assignment Section 3 Features Handsfree Answerback DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Alternate Calling Ring Voice Answering Direct CO Line Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to answer an incoming call by simply pressing the appropriate CO button without lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE MONITOR button This feature permits the user to specify the desired line to be answered if multiple in
310. ew extension group number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END e There is a maximum of 16 extension groups Each PS can only belong to one group e To assign all PSs to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number Section 3 Features Call Pickup Group Extension Group Paging Group DECT Portable Station Section 8 51 659 660 8 4 DECT PS System Programming PS DIL 1 N Extension Day Night Description A DIL 1 N line can be assigned to call more than one extension All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to the specified PSs This program assigns the PSs for each CO line in both the day and night modes Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 all CO lines e Enabl enable Disab disable Default All PSs all CO lines Disable Day Night Programming 1 Enter a program address 659 for day or 660 for night Display example PS DIL 1 N Day 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desi
311. ews are included choose the one that is appropriate for use depending on your wall type pmm Type 1 When the doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall ps Type 2 When you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall 3 Connect the wires from the main unit to the screws located in the front cover To the main unit See the Z following page lt q 4 Re attach the halves and re install the screw Installation 2 43 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Connection Use 4 pin plugs included to connect doorphone or door opener A plug is able to connect up to two doorphones or door openers 4 conductor wiring is required 1 Insert required wires into the holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Note Do not strip the wires Insert the wires all the way into the plug Door opener 2 or Doorphone 2 B Door opener 1 or Doorphone 1 4 pin plug 2 Insert the plug into the connector in the main unit 3 Connect the wires to the doorphone 1 or and 2 or door opener 1 or and 2 E Doorphone
312. f 32 itemized codes for KX TD816 and 128 itemized codes for KX TD1232 Each code has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through 9 e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR 4 146 0 System Programming 4 9 LCR Programming 7004 Internal ISDN Itemized Code Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Registers an itemized code applied to an ISDN extension The registered code is inserted into the T command position stored in program 7X22 LCR Carrier Modify Command e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 e Itemized code 4 digits max All ports Not Stored 1 Enter 7004 Display ISDN Itemized CD 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter port number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 03 Not Stored 4 Enter an itemized code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 4 itemized codes for KX TD816 and 12 itemized codes for KX TD1232 Each code has a maximum of 4 digits consisting of 0 through
313. fter Hold Recall results the held call can be retrieved from any other extension e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Field 44 Feature References Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold Operation References DPT Features User Manual Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold Retrieve CO Line Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a specified outside call that has been placed on hold by another extension Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the feature number Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold retrieve CO line 990 System Additional Information Fields 16 44 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Hold CO Line Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Hold Retrieve 3 26 Features 3 Features C Call Hold Retrieve Intercom Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a call that has been placed on hold by another extension Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the feature number Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold re
314. g The following three types of Flexible Buttons are provided on proprietary telephones PT and DSS Consoles e Flexible CO buttons provided on PT only e Flexible DSS buttons provided on DSS Console only e Programmable Feature PF buttons 3 12 Features 3 Conditions Features B The table below shows all of the features which can be assigned to Flexible Buttons Button Features to be assigned Single CO Voice Mail Transfer AQ So In the table indicates that the feature can be assigned to the button e A CO line can only appear on one Single CO button of any given telephone A station can only appear on one DSS button of any given telephone or DSS Console e It is possible to have multiple appearances of the same Group CO or Loop CO buttons on the same telephone Incoming and outgoing calls on the line are shown on the button in the following priority Single CO gt Group CO gt Loop CO Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming 0 0 0 0 ccceceeceeeeeeeeneeeeceteeeeees Flexible Button Assignment User Manual Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 Features 3 13 B 3 Features Feature References Section
315. g SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e The pulse speed required is determined by the CO or PBX line e Program 990 System Additional Information Field 17 and Field 21 are used to select a pulse break ratio and inter digit pause if needed Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection System Programming 4 9 404 4 6 CO Line Programming DTMF Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References A CO line set to DTMF mode in program 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This program sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent to a CO line set to DTMF mode e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Time milliseconds 96 160 All CO lines 96 ms 1 Enter 404 Display DTMF Time 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 96msec 4 Keep
316. gh 12 e Name 10 characters max All ports Not stored 1 Enter 013 Display ISDN EXT Name 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display 03 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available Section 3 Features ISDN Extension 4 34 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming O14 Budget Management on ISDN Port Description Assigns the charge limitation of a call on the ISDN port basis Selection e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 all ports KX TD1232 03 through 06 09 through 12 x all ports e Charge limitation Charge 0 through 99999999 Default All ports 0 Programming 1 Enter 014 Display ISDN Charge Lim 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display example 03 0 4 Enter a charge limitation To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another po
317. ght If all incoming outside calls are set to ring at the operator extension telephone in program 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night assigning the DSS Consoles to the operator extension makes the operator s job much easier If a DSS Console assigned jack is programmed for eXtra Device Port an SLT can be connected to the jack in parallel with the console If an SLT is assigned as the pair extension the paired DSS Console will not function Section 3 Features DSS Console Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 27 008 4 2 Manager Programming Absent Messages Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to program the absent messages An absent message if set by the station user is displayed on the calling extension s telephone to show the reason for the user s absence e Message number 1 through 9 e Message 16 characters max 1 Will Return Soon 5 Out Until 2 Gone Home 6 In a Meeting 3 At Ext 7 through 9 Blank not stored 4 Back at 1 Enter 008 Display Message Asn 2 Press NEXT Display MSG NO gt 3 Enter a message number To enter message number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example MSG1 Will Return 4 Enter the message For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and
318. gits First digit has been included in 7X0Y Floating Number Assignment 55 56 57 65 67 68 70 72 73 74 75 76 00 13 15 VERSION 3 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A LCR First Digit Default 0 VERSION 2 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A LCR First Digit Default 0 Hunt Groups 01 32 N A Use Extn Groups 16 Panasonic VERSION 1 LCR First Digit Default setting O01 Hunt Groups 01 32 N A System Working Reports Operator Manager function Operator Manager function Start Stop N A not available Version 4 00 Panasonic Program step 990 Option Programming PBX version changes FIELD DESCRIPTION VERSION 3 VERSION 2 VERSION 1 See Version 4 description See Version 4 description See Version 4 description 24 Prevents or allows a call originated by an AA port of a 0 Prevent 0 Prevent 0 Prevent default VPS to another AA port 1 Allow default 1 Allow default 1 Allow 25 27 See Version 4 description See Version 4 description See Version 4 description Version 1 description See Version 4 description See Version 4 description 0 Disable default Enables or Disables the sending of dial tone after the CO 1 Enable has been seized PP Lontbstneasareeo a a On ID when call is directed to it by Call Forwar
319. gned as a manager For more information and programming instructions refer to Section 4 System Programming Conditions e During system programming the system operates normally e During system programming the extension is considered to be busy 3 136 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features S e The display on the PT permits interactive programming e Only one access is allowed to system programming at any one time e To access system administration a valid password must be entered The password is factory programmed and can be changed e A personal computer can be used to perform system programming Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Night 107 System Password Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Operation References Not applicable System Speed Dialling Description Conditions This feature supports 500 abbreviated dial numbers available to all users A system speed dial number is dialled out by pressing the AUTO button and a 3 digit code 000 through 499 It is possible to store five hundred 24 digit telephone numbers per system maximum For proprietary telephone users only e Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling manual dialling Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used in combination For single line telephone users only e If a stored f
320. going calls All all calls Toll toll calls only Off no printing e Incoming calls On all calls Off no printing Default All calls Off Programming 1 Enter 800 Display Duration Log 2 Press NEXT to program outgoing calls Display Outgoing Off 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program incoming calls Display Incoming Off 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 7 Press STORE 8 Press END Conditions e It is necessary to connect a printer to the EIA RS 232C port provided on the system e After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer in 10 seconds Otherwise the usage of the EIA port is changed to system programming and printout will not occur e If Toll is selected the system will print out all the calls starting from the numbers stored in programs 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Feature References Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 157 SO1 4 10 Resource Programming SMDR Format Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer Page length determines the number of lines per page Skip perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every
321. h 0 None system programming or when printing out 1 Germany the data to SMDR 29 Assigns whether the system sends the 0 disable 1 Voice Mail Follow On ID code to the VPS or not when 1 enable Integration a call is directed to the VPS by Call Forwarding 30 Assigns whether the system sends the 0 disable 1 Voice Mail Follow On ID code to the VPS or not when 1 enable Integration a call is directed to the VPS by Intercept Routing 31 Assigns how an SLT user replies to a 0 off hook and 1 Message Waiting message left by the Message Waiting feature number feature 1 off hook 32 Assigns how to treat the extension user 0 sends an alarm 1 Budget who reaches the pre assigned limit of the sound and then Management Budget Management feature disconnects the line in 15 seconds 1 sends an alarm sound 33 Assigns whether the data the date and 0 enable 1 HOTEL room number is printed out or not whena_ 1 disable APPLICATION guest checks in and checks out 34 Assigns whether to send an absent 0 SMDR printer 1 e Absent message No 6 9 to an extension or to 1 extension Message output it to the printer when the feature Capability number is dialled Outputting the message e HOTEL to the printer is useful when informing a APPLICATION receptionist of the cleaning status of a room or the total of the minibar at the hotel System Programming 4 173 990 4 11
322. h 6 digits All PSs Not stored 1 Enter 670 Display PS DDI NO Trans 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Not Stored 4 Enter the DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Each DDI number can be one through six digits consisting of 0 through 9 Section 3 Features Direct Dialling In DDI 8 60 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 67 PS Extension Number Set Description Assigns an extension number to each PS Selection e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e PS extension number 2 through 4 digits Default All PSs Not stored Programming 1 Enter 671 Display PS EXT NO Set 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 Not Stored 4 Enter the PS extension number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name Display example PS01 EXT 281 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT
323. he Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA feature If a call is not answered before the programmed number of rings the call is redirected to the programmed station Number of rings 3 through 48 12 rings 1 Enter 203 Display Intercept Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to five seconds Programs 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night are used to program the destination of Intercept Routing on a CO line group basis in day and night modes e If the original extension has set Call Forwarding No Answer Intercept Timer starts after the Call Forwarding e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Intercept Routing System Programming 4 73 204 4 4 Timer Programming Pickup Dial Waiting Time Description Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialling If the telephone user lifts the handset the programmed party is called when the time expires Selection Time seconds 0 through 8 Default ls Programming 1 Enter 204 Display Pickup Dial Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 1 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry enter the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic dialling proce
324. he called extension s telephone and causes the telephone to ring Class of Service COS programming determines the extension users who can perform DND Override Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 507 Do Not Disturb Override Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Do Not Disturb DND Override Features 3 55 D Door Opener Description Conditions Connection References 3 Features Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from their telephones The door can be unlocked by extension users who have been programmed to receive doorphone calls However while engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in e It is needed to install a user supplied door opener on each door to be opened Two door openers can be installed on each system System Connection provides for four door openers e When a visitor presses the Call button on the doorphone the system may automatically open the door if the doorphone has a built in door opener It is required to set by system programming Section 2 Installation 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Door opener 122 Automat
325. he external ringer hunting groups and pagers in program 813 Floating Number Assignment Section 3 Features Intercept Routing System Programming 4 69 6 136 4 3 System Programming ISDN DDI Number Phantom Extension Number Transformation Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to convert a DDI number to a phantom extension number in order to send an incoming DDI call to a specific extension e Location number 001 through 128 DDI Number 1 through 6 digits Blank no number All locations Blank no number 1 Enter 136 Display Phantom DDI 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 001 4 Enter a DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To assign no number press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 128 phantom DDI numbers Each DDI number can be one through six digits consisting of 0 through 9 Section 3 Features Direct Dialling In DDI 4 69 7 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 148 Off Hook Monitor Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Enables or disables to perform the
326. he new number To disable Intercept Routing press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You can set the extension numbers in programs 003 Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number and also floating numbers of the external ringer hunting groups and pagers in program 813 Floating Number Assignment e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for jack 01 e When Disable is selected Intercept Routing is provided according to the assignment in program 409 410 Section 3 Features Intercept Routing System Programming 4 142 3 622 4 8 Extension Programming Incoming Call Display Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Allows you to choose between three display types when an incoming call is received Caller means the incoming caller s telephone number and name are displayed CO Line means the CO line number and CO line name assigned in the program 421 are displayed DDI means the called party s DDI number and extension name are displayed e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 x X all jacks e Display Types Caller
327. her status keep pressing NEXT until the desired status is displayed Display example RBT te System Programming 4 5 113 4 3 System Programming VM Status DTMF Set conta 3 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that is assigned as VM or AA in program 106 Station Hunting Type Feature References Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration 4 52 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 114 VM Command DTMF Set Description Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice Processing System VPS There are four commands available Leave Message Get Message Automated Attendant Service Voice Mail Service These commands are used in the following ways A If your VPS is used for Voice Mail VM Service 1 Call Forwarding Intercept Routing to Voice Mail If a call is forwarded to the VPS your system will send a mailbox number to the VM port This allows the caller to leave a message without knowing the mailbox number e Required entri
328. hese allow you to specify the numbers which are toll restricted for each toll restriction level as follows Program 301 restricts levels 2 through 6 Program 302 restricts levels 3 through 6 Program 303 restricts levels 4 through 6 Program 304 restricts levels 5 through 6 Program 305 restricts level 6 i l d ee e Location number 01 through 20 Toll call number 7 digits max All locations Not stored 1 Enter a program address 301 through 305 Display example TRS Deny LVL 2 Z Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a toll call number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for each program Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character can be used as a wild card character e Programs 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 are used to assign exceptions to these numbers Programs 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night are used to set the toll restriction value for each COS Section 3
329. hone which is connected with a proprietary telephone in parallel can be also used to monitor a recording message Be sure that the Live Call Screening on the connected proprietary telephone has been activated This feature is useful when you are out with a portable handset of a cordless telephone SLT The handset sounds an alert tone to let you know that a message is being recorded To intercept the call lift the handset and flash the hookswitch e When the extension user is having a conversation a call waiting tone is sent The user can put an existing call on hold before accessing LCS e A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Live Call Screening button e To prevent unauthorized monitoring a three digit password must be set by the LCS user If the user forgets his password it can be cleared by Operator 1 e Each extension can be programmed to either close the mailbox or keep recording the conversation after the call is intercepted 3 96 Features f Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 3 Features L Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Lockout Description Conditions System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 617 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment Station P
330. hone Features User Manual Features 3 77 L 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR Description Least Cost Routing LCR is a system programmable feature that automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time a long distance call is made Previous programming eliminates the necessity for the user to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier The appropriate CO line group is selected and an appropriate access code is added before the number is outpulsed General Description The dialling plan for long distance call is as follows OINX NXX XXXX OINXX NXXXXX N 2 9 X 0 9 lt Example gt London 0171 0181 Birmingham 0121 Edinburgh 0131 Glasgow 0141 Liverpool 0151 Manchester 0161 Tyneside 0191 Wearside 0191 Other Areas OINXX The charged fee is decided by three digits NXX following 0 of the area codes and time zone per carrier For example if charged fee by a carrier is as follows program the carrier s fee in time zones The system compares each carrier s charged fee and selects the least expensive carrier for the call 3 78 Features 3 Features L Example of Charged Fee for Carrier Area Area 1 Area 2 coo Area 8 021 0333 0444 031 0344 0455 061 091 0355 Area Code 0555 0666 0566 0677 0577 0588 Peak Rate 9 a m 1 p m Mon Fri 1 00 2 00 5 00 Standard Rate 8 a m 9 a m and 1 a m 6 p m Mon Fri Cheapest Rate 6 p m
331. ial tone patterns are available to give some information about features enabled on the telephone set Dial tone 1 Normal dial tone None of the features listed below are enabled Dial tone 2 Sounds when any one of the features below are set ls q Absent Message Capability Background Music BGM for proprietary telephones only Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Features 3 45 Conditions 3 Features Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND Electronic Station Lockout Pickup Dialling Timed Reminder ls I i i Dial tone 3 Sounds when performing Account Code Entry Also sounds when answering Timed Reminder call ls 1 i i 1 1 1 1 1 1 Dial tone 4 Sounds when messages are waiting for the extension 1 ls p None Programming References Feature References No programming required None Operation References Not applicable Dial Type Selection Description Allows you to select the desired dialling mode for each CO line regardless of the type of extension originating the call pulse or tone There are three dialling modes available DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Mode The dialling signal from an extension either in tone or pulse is converted to tone dialling DTMF signals are transmitted to the CO line 3 46 Features 3 Features D Conditions Pulse Dial Rotary Mode The dialling signal from an extension either in tone or pulse is converted to pul
332. ible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button 3 88 Features 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Operation References Not applicable LED Indication Intercom Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicator of the INTERCOM L Button Single CO S CO button indicates the line condition with a variety of lighting patterns This allows the user to see the current state of the intercom line The table below shows the lighting patterns and the intercom line conditions INTERCOM Button Intercom Status Off Idle Green on Intercom call Conference established Green slow flash Intercom call hold Green moderate flash Intercom call exclusive hold Consultation hold Green rapid flash Incoming intercom doorphone call Conditions None Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field Operation References Not applicable Features 3 89 L 3 Features Limited Call Duration Description Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that disconnects an outside call when a specified timer expires A warning tone is sent to the extension user 15 seconds 10 seconds and 5 seconds before the time limit Limiting the call duration can be enabled or disabled by Class of Service COS
333. ic Door Open Assignment 511 Door Open Access 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Section 3 Features Doorphone Call DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Doorphone Call 3 56 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features D Doorphone Call Description Conditions Connection References Your system supports two doorphones If a visitor presses the doorphone button pre assigned extensions are rung The extension who answers the call can talk to the visitor It is possible for any extension user to originate a call to a doorphone e You need to install an optional Doorphone e Two doorphones can be installed on each system System Connection provides for four doorphones e It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone during day and night mode e If no extension user answers an incoming doorphone call within 30 seconds the call stops ringing and is cancelled e While engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in Door Opener This requires a user supplied door opener Section 2 Installation 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Doorphone call 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Section 3 Features Do
334. ier 1 CPTAIH Other carriers Not Stored 7X23 LCR CO Line Group Assignment Carrier 1 12345678 Other carriers Not Stored 7X24 Authorization Code Set Not Stored Resource Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call All Calls Off Log Printout 801 SMDR Format Page Length 66 Skip Perforation 0 802 System Data Printout Not Applicable 803 Music Source Use Hold and BGM Music 1 804 External Pager BGM All External Pagers Disable 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone On 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters New Line Code CR LF Baud Rate 9600 Port 1 Port 2 Word Length 8 Parity Bit Mark Stop Bit 1 Port1 Port2 813 Floating Number Assignment e KX TD816 Pager 1 296 Pager 2 297 DTA 299 Hunting Groups 01 through 32 Not Stored e KX TD1232 Pager 1 296 Pager 2 297 Pager 3 396 Pager 4 397 MODEM 399 DTA 299 Hunting Groups 01 through 32 Not Stored 814 Modem Standard CCITT Option Programming 990 System Additional Information See pages 4 169 through 4 174 991 COS Additional Information See page 4 176 List 5 9 Section 6 Troubleshooting This section provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting 6 1 1 Installation PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Extension does not operate Bad printed circuit board Exchange printed circuit board for Extension Card another printed circuit board Bad connection between the sys
335. ifier e O om iN an ZN Q i a i H d Paging Equipment 2 Amplifier Paging Equipment 1 2 18 Installation 2 3 5 External Pager Connection KX TD1232 1 IL REMOTE Q C3 SYSTEM INTER CONNECTION R st SCOMSDN Paging Jack 2 Paging Jack 1 Amplifier Paging Equipment 1 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 804 External Pager BGM 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone Section 3 Features Background Music BGM External Paging External Paging All Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Installation 2 19 2 3 6 External Music Source Connection KX TD816 A maximum of two music sources can be connected per system Use a two conductor plug 3 5 mm in diameter Insert the plug to the earphone headphone jack on the external music source System programming is required for the Music
336. in mind that the following features are cleared when you restart the system e Camp on e Call Park The following features are cancelled when you restart the system Calls on Hold Calls on Exclusive Hold e Calls in progress 1 Make sure that the system clear switch is set to NORMAL 2 Press the Reset button with a pointed tool e If the system clear switch is set to CLEAR do not slide the system clear switch to NORMAL within 20 seconds of pressing the Reset button If you do the system programming data is reset to the default values Refer to Section 2 8 System Data Clear Wait over 30 seconds after pressing the Reset button and then slide the system clear switch to NORMAL When System Connection is executed the system will not accept incoming outside calls for about 4 minutes after pressing the Reset button The system needs time to establish the LCR data If the system still does not operate properly please see Section 6 1 4 Using Reset Button 2 56 Installation 2 8 System Data Clear Notes After storing or changing the system programming data you can clear the programming data stored in the system The system will restart with the default settings 1 Slide the system clear switch to CLEAR 2 Press the Reset button with a pointed tool 3 Return the system clear switch to NORMAL while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds e
337. incoming call is not answered by the operator and IRNA is activated 2 The operator is assigned as a destination of DIL 1 1 and the operator sets the Call Forwarding to VPS DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N System VPS C FWD IRNA Operator gt VM AA 1f gt VM AA 2 A i y VM gt AA X lt VM gt AA 3 1 5 Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message the VPS can turn on the MESSAGE button indicator of the corresponding telephone as a notification to the user of the telephone The VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his her mailbox When the MESSAGE button indicator is lit pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message 2 Automated Attendant AA Service 2 1 AA to Extension AA receives and answers an outside call and offers services such as transferring to a specified extension or the corresponding mailbox by the DTMF signalling which is sent from the calling party Features 3 155 Extension Conditions Connection References 3 Features Outside call DIL 1 1 System VPS Transfer AA 1 p gt AA2 A AA Hunting Chain AAX amp AA 3 e A VPS can be assigned as the destination of the following features Call Forwarding All Calls Call F
338. ine Unit to connect eight extensions e To prepare a 4 pin plug perform step 1 on page 2 30 or 2 32 e To prepare a 6 pin plug perform step 1 on page 2 10 7 Insert the plug into a jack on the unit Connect an earth wire to the earth terminal on the extension expansion unit in order to ground it KX TD170 KX TD180 Jacks for Power Failure Transfer COS or CO9 C06 or CO10 7 C07 or CO11 CO8 or CO12 To extensions u To Terminal Board or Modular jack numbers 9 16 Jacks from the Central Office 17 24 25 32 Jack Jack no no Lie or24 H12 0r20 32 pi 28 24150623 1 or 19 J eDi o 110 or 18 26 Brerryg w gt wp 14 or 22 30 2113 or21 K9 0 1705 p 29 BQ D Earth Terminal For details refer to Section 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer 2 40 Installation 2 4 6 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD280 8 Tie up all the cords into a bundle If other cords are coming from the upper 10 cabinets tie them too outside screw Cover the cords with the cord holder included Close the cabinet cover and secure the D1232 11 Fix the cords to the wall at the shown positio
339. ine devices such as single line telephones facsimiles and data terminals With the addition of optional System Inter Connection Card two Digital Super Hybrid Systems can be connected together to expand the system capacity The two systems function as one however some functions such as paging and music on hold are duplicated Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT The system supports nine different models of digital proprietary telephones which cover the range from a monitor set to a large display handsfree version 1 2 System Outline Available for KX TD1232 only 1 1 System Highlights Programming System The system can be programmed from a proprietary telephone or from a personal computer Voice Mail Integration The system supports Voice Processing Systems with in band DTMF signalling as well as DPT integration Least Cost Routing LCR Automatically selects the pre programmed least expensive route for outgoing toll calls Charge Fee Reference Allows the user to see charges and to print out the charges Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Ringing occurs over the external paging system call can be answered from any station Remote Station Lock Control Allows an operator to lock an extension so that outgoing calls cannot be made Budget Management Limits the telephone usage to a pre assigned amount Hotel Application Allows to handle the front and operator services such as check in check ou
340. ing NEXT or PREV the CO line number will not changed lt Example gt PSO1 CO06 Press NEXT PS02 CO06 Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Night Service DECT Portable Station Section 8 55 663 664 8 4 DECT PS System Programming PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References These programs assign which PSs will ring when a doorphone call is received during the day and night modes Programmed PSs are also allowed to open the door e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Doorphone number KX TD816 1 or 2 Disable two entries max KX TD1232 1 through 4 Disable four entries max All PSs Disable No doorphones Day Night 1 Enter a program address 663 for day or 664 for night Display example PS DPH in Day 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 1234 4 Enter the doorphone number To not assign a doorphone press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new doorphone number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e For the KX TD1232 Doorphone 1
341. int to multi point configuration Point to point A call sent through one ISDN SO port is reached to the pre assigned extension directly with Direct Dialling In DDI contract Point to multi point A call sent through one ISDN SO port is reached to the multiple extensions It is possible to assign the multiple telephone numbers on ISDN SO port basis When a call through the ISDN SO line with the point to multi point configuration is reached to your unit e The call is refused if the dialed number is not fitted with the stored MSN e The call is connected to the pre assigned extension if the dialed number is fitted with the stored MSN If no MSN number sent through the ISDN SO line is found the call is reached with standard method None Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection 2 4 6 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD280 Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 424 ISDN Configuration 437 Multiple Subscriber Number 438 439 Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN MSN None Not Applicable Features 3 73 2 I 3 Features Intercept Routing Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls There are two types of Intercept Routing In the first case a call cannot be placed to the called party This is called Rerouting In the second case the call is not answered within a programmed time pe
342. ion 2 35 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation Outside Installation Diagram If you install an extension outside of the main building the following precautions are recommended 1 Install the extension wire underground 2 Use a conduit to protect the wire Main Building Protectors CO s Another Building 4 Ea Main c9 Main EXTN PT 7 Distribution i AOIS Unit i Frame EXTN Lightning Protector EXTN exx ITEL ITEL Earth Note The lightning protector for an extension is different from that for CO 2 36 Installation 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation Earth Rod Installation Diagram The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil Consider the following recommendations Lightning Protector CO Earth Wire Main Unit Underground Earth Rod 1 Installation location of the earth rod 2 Check oObstructions ccccccccccceceeeeeenseeees None 3 Composition of the earth rod 0 0 eee Metal 4 Depth of the earth rod n 5 Size of the earth Wire 0 0 cccccceeeeeeeeeeeee than 1 6 mm Installation 2 37 2 4 Optional Cards and Units Installation 2 4 4 CO Line Connection Optional Unit To add four CO lines KX TD816 CO 5 through CO 8 KX TD1232 CO 9 through CO 12 use the optional 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180
343. ion of Arrow while pushing it in the direction of Arrow 5 Turn the power switch on e Back up Duration depends on the amp hour of the batteries used e g When using two 12 VDC batteries 20 amp hour maintenance free car batteries the power is maintained for about three hours Installation 2 51 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer Power Failure Transfer connects a specific single line telephone to selected CO line in the event of system power failure Single line telephones connected to the Power Failure Transfer jacks are connected directly to following CO lines KX TD816 CO1 CO2 CO5 KX TD1232 Master System CO 1 CO 2 CO 9 Slave System CO 13 CO 14 CO 21 The Power Failure Transfer jack is on the 8 CO Line Card 4 CO Line Card and 4 CO Line Unit KX TD181 Power Failure Transfer Jack KX TD180 y View of Connector To a single line telephone To a single line telephone 2 52 Installation 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer KX TD182 View of Connector A B aus Ni To a single line telephone Notes In the event of a power failure system memory is protected by the factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except for the saved values of the Camp on Saved Number Redial Last Number R
344. ions KX TD142 can be connected to the KX TD144 BARAR SA i 1 IKI 1 3 desme j oe 5 KX TD144 Expansion Unit Connector Note KX TD142 Lm m LI Remove the front cover plate s System Programming is required for location identification Refer to program 109 Expansion Card Unit Type in Section 4 Default Area 1 4 CO Line Unit Area 2 8 Station Line Unit Select E for the 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 This is the same for an 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 DECT Portable Station Section 8 9 8 2 3 Location of the Unit KX TD1232 Up to two 2 RF Interface Units with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 can be installed to any of the three expansion areas on the main unit KX TD1232 Up to two Cell Stations KX TD142 can be connected to the KX TD144
345. ired PS registration number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END e There is a maximum of eight Classes of Service Every PS must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to COS Programming in programs 500 through 518 and 991 e To assign all PSs to one COS press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number Section 3 Features Class of Service COS 8 50 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 658 PS Extension Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns each PS to an extension group Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup and Paging Group e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e Extension group number 01 through 16 e Enabl enable Disab disable All PSs Extension group 01 Enabl 1 Enter 658 Display PS EXT Group 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 EXG01 Enab l 4 Enter an extension group number You can also keep pressing m gt or lt until the desired extension group number is displayed To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the n
346. irern tirg sii 2 4 2 29 Wal MOUNN oe i a A ET 2 6 2 2 4 Frame Earth Connection 2 vectvs sxc cns Paiibadvcs asi cndtinsccseadiTediinale 2 7 2 2 5 Opening Front Cover iiissiswacsssaseceessascscscesseecaconsseveavebessacconsncease 2 7 2 3 COWMMC CUO sscedasiscoccensagstcesoacoodcocesancestavosdegsosussenssutscedeossescsendoedeesseckess 2 8 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram e ce eseeeseceseeeeeceeeecseeeeeeesees 2 8 2 3 2 Extension Connection for Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Consoles c cccccsecsscssssessscsescssescscscssesescsesseececseseseceesesessescscsesseecees 2 10 2 3 3 Parallelled Telephone Connection for a Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone 0008 2 15 2 3 4 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone 2 17 2 3 5 External Pager Connectonsisijc sscc100 ceicissceeieeeleteeeiedeniee 2 18 2 3 6 External Music Source Connection ceeeeeeseecseeceeeseeeenteeees 2 20 2 3 1 Printer COMME COM waissasiasiecs iieezassciassacegedadvsusead oasebearasasnad n 2 22 2 4 Optional Cards and Units Installation ccssccsssscessscsseescess 2 25 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units 2 0 cee ee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeee 2 25 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card eeeeeeeseeeeeteeeenteeees 2 28 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation ieee eeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeteeeees 2 35 2 4 4 CO Line Connection Optional Uni
347. is aardebecetens 3 78 LED Indication CO Line 20 cccceceeecececeesceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeees 3 88 LED Indication Intercom 0 ccccccccececececececeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeaneeeeees 3 89 11 Installation Manual Contents Limited Call DAU Os og ces Sate Rides coh E Cote ta aled oben Masa a vena tne 3 90 Line Access AUtOMAatiC cc0sceeeessssesssssssssessssssssssesessseseseseseseeees 3 90 Line Access CO Line Group aisiveaae een eed ede ietacniehaes 3 91 Line Access DireCt scccisiscclish ince hie Ste es eR ied 3 92 Line Access Individual cccccccscsssssssssssssssssssssssessessssssssseseseeees 3 93 Line Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line 3 94 Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line 3 95 Live Call Screening LCS iersinii os iisa ia 3 96 POU i erge i en aet e esi aa Sayeed esi 3 97 Toe lief Vee Quit sce cates a cates cote en a e n vant ehiees 3 98 Loop CO L CO Button Button Loop CO L CO ee 3 15 Manager Extension sccies debe tien sashes eles aad alee eet aes aed 3 99 Message Waitin ionien ian nn an a an ei aiao 3 99 Microphone M tesssiisniassisnsisnsiisseitiiniisa ainte 3 100 Mixed Station Capacities i 4 ccsascssdsccsiussaaensegocasacustaacounsdensa soseadeeceyedens 3 100 M d le 12 x PARIS UNS ity yc st caak e sense sees ada cossnztuacasts anor emcees 3 101 IVIL STOTT Holdre n Sonatas Sewcaueoemcde a E E a a 3 102
348. is not assigned c Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 129 Operator Queue Station Programming 0 ccccceecceseeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Hurry Up Button Feature References Section 3 Features Operator Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Automatic Overflow and Hurry Up Transfer Features 3 7 A B 3 Features Automatic Station Release Description After going off hook if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a specified time period the user will be disconnected from the line after reorder tone is sent To get a line again the user must go back on hook and then off hook Conditions This function works in the following cases When making a call 1 The first digit has not been dialled within 10 seconds 2 After a digit is dialled the next one is not dialled within five seconds Intercom call only Programming References Section 4 System Programming 207 First Digit Time 208 Inter Digit Time Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Background Music BGM Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to listen to background music from the monitor speaker on the telephone Conditions e It may be required to select a music source used for BGM by system programming e For Music Source 1 it is possible
349. is programmable Section 2 Installation 2 3 5 External Pager Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external answer TAFAS answer 813 Floating Number Assignment 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Section 3 Features Floating Station DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS 3 148 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features T U Two Way Recording into the Voice Mail Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to record the conversation into one s mailbox or another mailbox while talking on the phone Note When you record Two Way telephone conversations you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded e A flexible CO and DSS button can be assigned as a Two Way Record button or a Two Way Transfer button e When all the voice mail ports are busy pressing the Two Way Record button sends an alarm tone e When all the voice mail ports are busy pressing the Two Way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone Programming References Feature References Operation References System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming Flexible Button Assignment Two Way Record Button Two Way Transfer Button
350. isplay TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter the CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number To disable Intercept Routing press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You set the extension numbers in program 003 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers in program 012 ISDN Extension Number Set voice mail extension numbers in program 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment phantom extension numbers in program 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment or floating numbers of pagers in program 813 Floating Number Assignment You cannot assign the floating number of the modem e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features Intercept Routing 4 96 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 41 Host PBX Access Codes Description Selection Default Programming Assigns Host PBX access codes If the system is installed behind a host PBX system an access code is required to m
351. it Type Description Assigns the type of expansion cards units to be used in the Master and Slave Systems This allows the system to identify the card and or unit in each expansion location Selection KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 3 1 Inside the system C 4CO S 2S0 2 3 Expansion Area C 4CO S 2S0 S3 1 PRD E EXT KX TD1232 e Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 4 1 Inside the system C 8CO S 4S0 2 3 4 Expansion Area C 4CO S 2S0 S3 1 PRD E1 EXT1 E2 EXT2 Default KX TD816 C C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT Display example Mast C C E 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press gt 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed 7 Press STORE 8 Press END KX TD1232 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT to program Master System To program Slave press NEXT again Display example Mast C C E1 E2 System Programming 4 47 109 4 3 System Programming Expansion Card Unit Type conta 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press gt 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are com
352. l Station and pass the cord through the groove on the unit 8 26 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 6 Wall Mounting 1 Place the template included on the wall to mark the two screw positions 2 Install the two screws included into the wall 3 Hook the Cell Station on the screw heads Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Walls In step 2 drill two holes and drive the anchor plugs included with a hammer flush to the wall Then install the screws into the anchor plugs DECT Portable Station Section 8 27 3 DECT Portable Station Features Digital Wireless Connection Description Conditions The system supports the connection of a DECT Portable Station PS KX TD7500 It can be used in the system with other telephones e The KX TD816 system supports up to 16 PSs and the KX TD1232 sys tem supports up to 64 PSs e To support the PSs a 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 and a Cell Station KX TD142 are required e Up to four calls can be made at the same time in the range e If you do not want your PS to ring you can select the VIBRATION fea ture which is convenient while in a meeting etc The following procedures are required to utilise a PS 1 Assign the radio system ID in program 681 PS Radio System ID Set 2 Reset the system 3 Register a PS in program 650 PS Registration
353. l Waiting Tone 2 CO Call Waiting Tone 1 intercom CO intercom lt RING TONE gt Hold Recall Hold Tone Intercom Calls Outside Calls 5 3 List 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default Manager Programming 000 Date and Time Set 1 Jan 94 SAT 12 00 am 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set Not Stored 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set Not Stored 003 Extension Number Set e KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 201 through 216 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 301 through 316 e KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 201 through 264 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 301 through 364 004 Extension Name Set Not Stored 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e KX TD816 CO Buttons 1 through 8 of All Jacks Single CO 01 through 08 ringing tone type 2 e KX TD1232 CO Buttons 1 through 24 of All Jacks Single CO 01 through 24 ringing tone type 2 006 Operator Manager Extension Operator 1 Day Night and Manager Jack 01 Assignment Operator 2 Unassigned 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Not Stored Telephone Assignment 008 Absent Messages 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext 4 Back at 5 Out Until 6 In a Meeting 7 through 9 Not Stored 009 Quick Dial Number Set Not Stored 010 Budget Management o 011 Charge Margin and Tax Rate 0 0 012 ISDN Extension Number Set All Ports Not Stored 013 ISDN Extension Name Set All Ports No
354. layed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 Feature References Section 3 Features Reverse Circuit System Programming 4 103 419 4 6 COLine Programming Subscriber Number Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assign the subscriber number which is assigned to a CO line by a central office for Calling Line Identification Presentation or Connected Line Identification Presentation e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 16 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 54 x all CO lines e Telephone number 16 digits max All CO lines Not stored 1 Enter 419 Display Telephone Number 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The valid characters are 0 through 9
355. le when the KX TD280 is installed to the KX TD1232 the rate assigned to CO09 is used for CO 10 through 12 If a different rate is assigned to each CO line the extension charge fee account code charge fee and total extension charge fee meters will not be displayed correctly In this case the meter is calculated by the rate assigned to COO1 When the ISDN SO line unit or card is installed you have to restart the system after programming Otherwise the correct charge may not be displayed See the 2 7 System Restart section Feature References Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference 4 35 3 System Programming Page left blank for future upgrade s 100 4 3 System Programming Flexible Numbering Description Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features Selection e Selection number 01 through 78 See Feature Number List on page 4 37 and 4 38 for the corresponding features e Feature number 1 or 2 digits for selection numbers 01 through 16 1 through 3 digits for selection numbers 17 through 78 Default See Feature Number List on page 4 37 and 4 38 Programming 1 Enter 100 Display FLX Numbering 2 Press NEXT Display Select NO gt 3 Enter a selection number To enter selection number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 EXT BL 2 4 Enter the feature number To delete the feature number press CLEAR To change the cur
356. lephone the user can access an idle line only by going off hook Features 3 91 L 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering CO line group line access 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 401 CO Line Group Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming 0 00cccccccesceeeeceteceeeceeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Feature References Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO CO Line Group CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Outward Dialling Line Access CO Line Group Line Access Direct Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to select a CO line by pressing an idle CO button which automatically establishes handsfree operation mode and allows the user to perform On Hook Dialling The user need not press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button nor lift the handset Conditions e There are three types of CO buttons which can be programmed on an extension Single CO button Group CO button and Loop CO button e Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines available to access Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 211 Dial Start Time 400
357. line since a CO line is automatically selected from the designated CO line group All CO lines belonging to a CO line group follow the assignment determined for that CO line group A list of assignments for each CO line group is shown below e The destination of Intercept Routing e Disconnect Time e Register Recall Signal Time e Host PBX Access Code e Pause Time used in Speed Dialling and Recall Conditions e Each CO line can only belong to one CO line group e CO lines in a CO line group are selected uniformly if all lines belong to the same system If System Connection is employed a CO line group can include CO lines in both systems In this case a CO line is first selected from the user s system If all lines in the user s system are in use a line in the other system is selected 3 40 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features C Programming References Feature References Operation References Conference Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering CO line group line access 401 CO Line Group Assignment 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time 413 Register Recall Signal Time 414 Disconnect Time Po ig a ier SS a None Not applicable The system supports three party conference calls including outside or inside parties During a two party conversation the extension user can add a third
358. ll ring If either of the paralleled telephones is busy it is not possible to make a call from the other telephone e Types of incoming calls which are received while in SXDP mode are Outside calls DIL 1 1 Intercept Routing DDI MSN IRNA Intercom calls Extension Transfer Other type of calls will not be sent to the PS e When you receive a call reaching the paired telephone by the PS or when making a call from a PS the display message of the wired tele phone is shown on the calling or called party s display e g extension number and name e Paralleled telephones can call each other or transfer a call by dialling their own extension number e Ifa PS receives a call by its own extension number it works as usual 8 36 DECT Portable Station Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features The following list shows the conditions when using a certain feature while in SXDP mode FEATURE CONDITION Call Log Outgoing e The memory of Call Log is used together The call logged by the wired telephone can be used by the PS and vice versa Budget Management Call Forwarding The call charge of the PS is included with the wired tele phone If the pre assigned limit is reached both telephones cannot make further calls without authorisation Calls to the wired telephone due to the setting of the wired telephone The Call Forwarding All feature for the wired telephone can be set from a PS so that all inc
359. lling In DDI Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN SO line call to a specific extension Assignable destinations are 1 Operator 2 extension 3 Hunting Group 4 TAFAS 5 modem This requires a number received from the ISDN network The number is converted to a specific extension number by using a pre programmed conversion table Method 1 Default Extension DSHS 112 Network DDI 111 E E NO te DDI 112 Fo ee ee 3 A Called No DDE 113 L_ 555 4112 External telephone ISDN ees Explanation 1 An incoming call from the ISDN network reaches your DSHS Digital Super Hybrid System The ISDN network informs DSHS of the called number 2 DSHS converts the number as follows Received number 555 4112 subscriber number 5554 112 When DDI transformation number is selected the call is directed to extension 212 A e When extension is selected the call is directed to extension 112 B Method 2 Extension O DSHS _ 112 Network DDI 111 PPIE eae 12 O DDI 112 eee l 3 R A Called No 4512 DDI 113 PR External telephone ISDN pinnat Explanation 1 An incoming call from the ISDN network reaches your DSHS Digital Super Hybrid System The ISDN network informs DSHS of the called number 2 DSHS converts the number as follows Received
360. lly performed or accessed e g Call Hold Automatic Callback Busy c Sent when accessing external paging equipment e g Paging All Paging External Confirmation tone from external pagers can be enabled or disabled ls 1 w Confirmation tone 3 Sent when a conversation is established just after dialling For example when accessing the following features by the feature numbers e Call Park Retrieve e Call Pickup e Hold Retrieve e Paging Paging Answer e TAFAS Answer This tone can be eliminated by system programming so that the user can start talking instantly 1 ls l l 1 I I l gt i i I I j j I l l l co on E a a l 3 42 Features 3 Features C Confirmation tone 4 Sent when moving from a two party call to a three party call and vice versa These are caused by Conference Itis possible to eliminate this tone by system programming DRS i lt lt me Conditions Confirmation Tone 1 and 2 are provided to reconfirm the assigned feature Programming References Section 4 System Programming 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 990 System Additional Information Fields 13 16 Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Description Allows the extension user to restrict the presentation of the called party s number to the calling party when the calling party is making the call This feature is one of the ISDN se
361. lso press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 CO01 Enabl 4 Enter the desired CO line number or keep pressing m or lt until the desired CO line is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END System Programming 4 131 605 606 4 8 Extension Programming Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night contd Conditions Feature References e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 or 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or COO1 e To assign no CO line group for a station press CLEAR at step 4 Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Night Service 4 132 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions
362. lt Programming Conditions Feature References PS Data Line Security Sets or cancels the Data Line Security mode on a PS basis e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e On Off All PSs Off 1 Enter 668 Display PS Data Mode 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 0ff 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all PSs to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for the PS which has the lowest PS registration number Section 3 Features Data Line Security DECT Portable Station Section 8 59 670 8 4 DECT PS System Programming ISDN DDI Number PS Extension Number Transformation Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to convert a DDI number to a PS extension number in order to send an incoming DDI call to a specific extension e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 x KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e DDI Number 1 throug
363. m another time schedule press NEXT or PREV 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 12 Press END Conditions The times must be programmed in sequence from Time 1 to Time 4 Feature References Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR 4 150 System Programming 49 LCR Programming 7X20 LCR Exceptional Code Set Description Assigns dialling numbers that are excepted from LCR routing plans of the specified carrier They are sent out to a CO selected from automatic access CO line groups Selection e Program address 7X20 X 1 8 carrier number e Location number 01 through 80 e Exceptional code 7 digits max Default All locations Not stored Programming 1 Enter a program address 7X20 Display example EXCP Digit Cl 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter an exceptional code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of 80 exceptional codes for each carrier Each code has a maximum of 7 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character X can be used as a wild card character System Programming 4 151 7X20 4 9 L
364. m are unacceptable To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 You set the extension numbers in program 003 Extension Number Set ISDN extension numbers in program 012 ISDN Extension Number Set voice mail extension numbers in program 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment phantom extension numbers in program 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment or floating numbers of pagers in program 813 Floating Number Assignment If a CO line is also programmed for DIL 1 N in program 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night it is regarded as a DIL 1 1 line Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Night Service System Programming 4 95 409 410 4 6 CO Line Programming Intercept Extension Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Intercept Routing provides an automatic re direction of calls which cannot or have not been answered These programs set the destination in both day and night modes for each line group e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no Intercept Routing All CO line groups Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 409 for day or 410 for night Display example TRG Intercpt Day 2 Press NEXT D
365. m serial number lt Example gt Master system serial number 8BAVB123456 Radio system ID 00123456 e Radio system ID 8 digits Not stored 1 Enter 681 Display Radio Sys ID Set 2 Press NEXT Display Not Stored 3 Enter the radio system ID Display example 00123456 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e Be sure not to assign the same radio system ID to a different PBX or the PS may not operate properly e The radio system ID must be assigned to support the DECT system KX TD144 KX TD142 Otherwise the wired extension port of the KX TD 144 can be used e If the radio system ID is not assigned properly the registered PS may not work properly e If once assigned you should not change the radio system ID To change it you must remove all the PS registration first e After this assignment you should reset the system so that this assignment is activated None 8 68 DECT Portable Station Section LT 8 a8ed das s Ie JOpP SIOW 104 Speo MOIS IP UO Th GL XM VOLIS 19D oy YOoH puvyoriojog Joey e YIM TBM 0 ysnjz ssnjd soyoue OY SALIP TBM IEJOW JO 9 91DU0D L UO PUN Y JUNOU NOA Jy SMOIOS OY PISU Z Tem Oy UO aejdua sty ojd T DIIY MOIOS L J eISU DIIY MAIOS L eISUT wug9 T UOTILIS 9D OU 1037 IJdUJ L se sn pue ased sy Adoo se jd WOTJEIS I IY 1037 Xe dUIL S S 8 69 DECT Portable Station Section Panasonic Business Systems U K
366. make up a Denied Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited These numbers are defined as denied codes Each table can store up to 20 denied codes each of which consisting of seven digits Excepted Code Tables These tables are used to override a programmed denied code A call denied by the selected Denied Code Tables is checked against the selected Excepted Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made There are five system programs for these tables 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 each programming is used to make up an Excepted Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes These numbers are defined as excepted codes Each table can store up to 20 excepted codes each of which consisting of seven digits 3 142 Features 3 Features T Applicable Denied and Excepted Code Tables depend on the assigned toll restriction level of an extension as follows Denied Code Tables Excepted Code Tables Level 1 None None Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 to 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 to 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6 Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 to 6 Tables for Level 6 Level 7 N
367. mation Tone 990 System Additional Information Field 16 None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Paging External Paging ANSWER Paging DENY Paging and Transfer Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice announcement All the proprietary telephones in the group will receive the page If a member of the paged group answers your paging you can talk to the person through the connected line e To select all groups pages all extensions e Confirmation tone is sent when the page is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging group Paging group answer Paging deny 3 110 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features P Feature References Operation References User Manual 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Section 3 Features Extension Group DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Paging Group Paging ANSWER Paging DENY Paging and Transfer Parallelled Telephone Description Conditions Any proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a single line telephone The following two combinations of telephones are available 1 APT SLT an analogue proprietary telephone and a single line telephone device 2 DPT SLT a digital proprietary telephone and a single line telephone device When a parallel connection i
368. ming Call Information Display Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 3 27 1 Features 3 Features C Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Description Conditions Allows the extension user to restrict the presentation of the calling party s number to the called party when making a call This feature is one of the ISDN services If the presentation is enabled the called party can check the calling party s number before the called party is answered it Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP case by case Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering CLIR 419 Subscriber Number Assignment 516 Calling Line Identification Restriction None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Features 3 27 2 C 3 Features Call Park Description Allows the extension user to place a held call into a system parking area This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations The parked call can be retrieved from any other extension user Conditions e The system contains 10 parking areas each of which has its own call park number Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time in the system Under the System Connection all user
369. mmand LCR CO Line Group Assignment Authorization Code Set System Additional Information Fields 43 64 Features 3 87 0 L 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Outward Dialling Line Access Automatic 3 87 1 Features Page left blank for future upgrade s L 3 Features LED Indication CO Line Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicators of the buttons associated with CO lines tell the line conditions with a variety of lighting patterns This allows the user to determine which lines are idle and which lines are in use The table on the next page shows the lighting patterns and line conditions according to the CO button type LED Indicator CO Line Status Off Idle Green On I use Green slow flash I hold Green moderate flash I Exclusive Hold Green rapid flash Hold Recall Incoming call Red On Other use Red slow flash Other hold Flashing light winks patterns Slow flash Moderate flash i Rapid flash pds 3 3 Conditions Red slow flash indication appears on the S CO button only Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming 0 cccccceeceeeeteeeeeeseeneeneeees User Manual Flex
370. mming DDI Removed Digit Added Number Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the removed digits and added number to a subscriber s number and the DDI number sent from the network to make the extension which receives a call e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Removed digit 0 through 16 O no deleting e Added number 4 digits max All CO Lines Removed digit 0 Added number Not stored 1 Enter 111 Display DDI Removed Add 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example C001 0 4 Enter the digit s to be deleted To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press gt Display example C001 3 6 Enter the number s to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 7 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 8 Press STORE 9 Press END e To assign all CO lines to one press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e Example If the removed digits are assigned as 6 and the added number is assigned as 2 the number sent from the network is changed as follows 85492603 DDI number 2 digits Six digits a
371. n PS is not provided with a built in speaker Live Call screening LCS Microphone Mute Off Hook Monitor Operator As a PS cannot be assigned as an operator it cannot perform the operator service features Paging DENY Paralleled Telephone Phantom Extension Redial Automatic The list below describes the available feature conditions which are required with a PS TITLE PS CONDITION Budget Management Program 655 PS Budget Management is required to assign the charge limit of a call on a PS basis Button Flexible Program 020 PS Flexible Button Assignment is used to deter mine the use of the PS flexible buttons Call Forwarding FWD is displayed as notification while on hook The FWD DND button can be activated by selecting it on the display For details refer to the Key Operation in the User Manual The FWD DND button can be assigned on a flexible button However the LED of the flexible button does not work Calling Connected Line Program 673 PS CLIP COLP Number Assignment is required Identification Presentation for selecting the type of additional number to the CLIP and COLP CLIP COLP information of the PS Charge Fee Reference The charge fee reference allowed for a PS is determined by program 656 PS Charge Verification Assignment DECT Portable Station Section 8 29 8 3 TITLE DECT Portable Station Features PS CONDITION Class of Service
372. n Location of Optional Cards and Units Precaution Expansion Units KX TD816 Expansion area 2 Expansion area The location of the optional cards and units is shown below To protect the printed circuit boards P boards from static electricity do not touch parts on the P boards in the main unit and on the optional cards and units Either 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 and a 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 can be installed in any expansion area BEXT carnsremeneoe EEn Expansion Unit Connectors Remove the cover plate s on the front cover 8 Station Line Units KX TD170 Each unit adds eight extensions 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 Adds four CO lines 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 Adds two ISDN SO lines Installation 2 25 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units KX TD1232 Either 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 and a maximum of two 8 Station Line Units KX TD170 can be installed in any expansion area
373. n Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming ccccccceecceeseeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment None Operation References Refer to respective operating instructions User Manual Features 3 18 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s 3 Features C CALL FORWARDING FEATURES SUMMARY Description Call Forwarding Description Conditions Call forwarding features enable you to have your calls forwarded to a specified destination You may specify the circumstances under which your calls are forwarded The following Call Forwarding features are available Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding Follow Me Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Forwarding by ISDN Line All Calls This feature is used when you want all your calls to be automatically re directed to another extension e Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are Outside calls DDI DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to an extension which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting can be activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Wai
374. n Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Assigns a hunting group name to the hunting group When an incoming outside call is received the assigned name and the extension number of the group are displayed on the LCD Hunting group number 01 through 32 e Name 10 characters max All hunting groups Not Stored 1 Enter 132 Display Hunt Group Name 2 Press NEXT Display Group NO 3 Enter a hunting group number To enter hunting group number 01 you can also press NEXT Display 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired hunting group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END None Section 3 Features Hunting Group Station Hunting 4 69 3 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 133 Hunting Overflow Description Selection Default Programming Assigns the limited number of a queue and the management of an incoming call when the queue is full There are three types of management mentioned below Overflow When the queue is full a new incoming call is transferred to the Intercept destination for the group If the number in the queue is assigned as 0 and all extensions are
375. n for CO Buttons Description Conditions Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to select the desired ringer frequency for each CO button This provides discrimination of incoming outside calls There are eight ringer frequencies available One of them can be assigned to a CO button that is assigned as each of the following buttons Single CO Group CO or Loop CO button It is not possible to assign a ringer frequency to any other button Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming cccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeneenaeens User Manual Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons None Operation References Not applicable Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls Description Conditions Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to select the desired ringer frequency for the intercom button This distinguishes incoming intercom calls There are eight ringer frequencies available One of them can be assigned to an intercom button Programming References Feature References Station Programming 0 ccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeneenaeens User Manual Ringing Tone Selection for Intercom Calls None Operation References Not applicable Features 3 123 0 S 3 Features Secret Dialling Description Allows an extension user to conceal all or part of a registered telephone number that normally appears on the
376. n so that the front cover can be opened Notes e If two or three expansion units are installed cut the cabinet covers on the lower cabinets to allow the cords from upper cabinet to go down through the cabinet covers To guard the cords smooth the cut edge Cut here Programming References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Feature References Section 3 Features Module Expansion Installation 2 41 2 4 7 Remote Card Installation 1 Insert the upper end of the Remote Card into the two hooks on the main unit 2 Press the two corners at the lower end of the Remote Card 3 Connect the cord to the Remote Card connector O KxTDI906 REMOTE m oo Oo Remote Card is ly NA Ly 7 N Loy Programming References Section 4 System Programming 107 System Password 813 Floating Number Assignment 814 Modem Standard Feature References Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 2 42 Installation Available for KX TD1232 only 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection A maximum of two doorphones KX T30865 and two door openers is permitted Doorphone Installation 1 Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone into halves SCrew 2 Attach the base cover to the wall with two screws Note Two kinds of scr
377. n steps 8 and 10 You can assign an extension number to each PS also in program 671 PS Extension Number Set The PS password can be assigned in program 672 PS Password Set One PS must have only one registration number It is not possible to assign the different registration number for one PS If the PS extension number or the PS password is changed after registering the PS cannot be used until it is registered again in this program Do not press END after step 15 or it may not registered correctly To re assign the PS which is set the System Lock to the other DECT system it is required to cancel the System Lock first in PS Programming Setting the System Lock Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features Digital Wireless Connection DECT Portable Station Section 8 43 651 8 4 Description Selection Default Programming DECT PS System Programming PS Termination Deletes a stored PS so that it cannot be used in the system e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Not applicable 1 Enter 651 Display PS Termination 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PSO1 EXT 281 4 Press STORE Display Executing The system searches for the PS registration number while Executing is blinki
378. nal number is put here aximum of 16 commands can be assigned to a carrier Features 3 Features 4 Authorization Code Set Program 7X24 This is used to register an authorization code of a carrier to a CO line The code is inserted at the A position of the LCR Carrier Modify Command Example Authorization code table CO Authorization No Code 01 11111 02 22222 03 33333 24 12121 5 Itemized Code Set Programs 7003 and 7004 This is used to register an itemized code of an extension The code is inserted at the I position of the LCR Carrier Modify Command Example Itemized code table Extension Itemized No Code 201 201 202 202 203 203 364 364 6 LCR Exceptional Code Set Program 7X20 This table is used to assign area codes that are excepted from LCR routing plans of the specified carrier If the system finds out the same number as the user dialled area code in this table the call is sent to the CO line selected from Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Assignment table 3 82 Features 3 Features L Example LCR exceptional code table Programming Examples 1 Route Plan Table 1 Leading digit table 1 01 Ox 02 03 04 05 80 01 0235 02 0332 80 A If you use BTL MCL If you use MCL only for long distance calls you may program the
379. ndsfree Answerback This feature allows PS users to answer calls all or intercom without lifting up the PS or pressing any key only when the user supplied headset is connected to the PS If the PS user receives a call in this mode a handsfree conversation is established immediately after the user hears beep tone and the caller hears a confirmation tone PS Programming Setting the Handsfree Answer Mode is required to select the answering mode Hunting Group Program 131 Hunting Group Assignment is required to assign each PS to a hunting group PSs are hunted in the No Reply or Ring hunting mode If another hunting mode is selected in program 106 Station Hunting Type Station Hunting PSs are skipped In Ring hunting mode a maximum of four PSs ring simultaneously If the connected CS is busy the PSs are skipped Intercept Routing Program 674 675 PS Extension Intercept Routing Day Night is required for assigning the Intercept Routing destination for each PS The possible destinations of intercepted calls are as follows 1 a wired extension 2 an external pager A PS cannot be a destination Least Cost Routing LCR Program 677 PS Itemized Code Set is required for assigning the itemized code for each PS LED Indication CO Line e The LED indicators of the Flexible CO buttons do not work while on hook DECT Portable Station Section 8 31 8 3 DECT Portable Station Feature
380. ne in the system automatically saves the last telephone number dialled to a CO line and allows the extension user to dial the same number again Conditions e With a proprietary telephone REDIAL button is used to carry out Last Number Redial With a single line telephone the feature number is used e The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit to be sent to a CO line is dialled Dialling a CO line access code alone does not change the memorized number e Certain types of proprietary telephones allow automatic multiple redialling Automatic Redial 3 118 Features 3 Features R Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Last number redial Section 3 Features Redial Automatic DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Redial Last Number Redial Saved Number Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to save a telephone number and redial the number afterwards The user can store it while in conversation on a CO line The saved number can be redialed many times until another one is stored e Certain types of proprietary telephones PT allow automatic multiple redialling Automatic Redial If the SAVE button is not provided on your PT it is possible to assign a flexible button to be the SAVE button Programming References Feature References Operation
381. ne of the following DDI Subscriber number DDI number None Subscriber number Optional number e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Types DDI Any number 1 through 6 digits All PSs DDI 1 Enter 673 Display PS CLIP COLP 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 DDI 4 Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed and enter the number if required To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END None Section 3 Features Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 8 64 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 674 675 PS Extension Intercept Routing Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the Intercept Routing destination for each PS in both day and night modes e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 all PS registration numbers e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no Intercept Routing All PSs Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 674 for day
382. ne to both an S CO and a G CO button e If Least Cost Routing LCR is set it is overridden by an outgoing call made by pressing the S CO button e Incoming calls appear on the proprietary telephone when an extension is assigned as the incoming call destination and an S CO G CO and or L CO button is assigned e Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line basis e The digital PT user can choose a desired ringing tone type for the S CO button by system or station programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming 0 cccccceecceeeeseeeneeeeceeeneeens User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Single CO S CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Feature References Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line Line Access Individual LED Indication CO Line Ringing Delayed Line Access Direct Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons 3 16 Features 3 Features Operation References Basic Operation User Manual Making Calls DPT Features Outward Dialling Line Access Individual Buttons on Proprietary Telephones Receiving Calls
383. ner 55 38 External feature access 64 39 Station feature clear 790 40 _ Message waiting 70 41 Not available 42 Call forwarding do not disturb 710 43 Call pickup deny 720 44 Not available 45 Call waiting OHCA whisper OHCA 731 46 Not available 47 Pickup dialling 74 48 Absent message 750 49 Timed reminder 76 50 Electronic station lockout 77 51 Night service mode 78 52 Parallel telephone mode 69 53 Background music external 65 54 Paging deny 721 55 Primary COS select 791 56 Secondary COS select 793 57 _ Log in log out 45 58 Operator 1 call None 59 Operator 2 call None 60 Automatic callback busy cancel 46 61 69 Not available 70 Timed reminder remote 1 71 CO incoming call information log mode 56 72 Do not disturb for DDI 54 73 CLIR 59 74 _ COLR 58 75 CO incoming call information log lock 57 76 _ Live call screening password control 799 77 System working report 794 78 Super extra device port SXDP 48 4 38 System Programming f Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 4 3 System Programming 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program is used to determine if night mode is automatic or manual Manual Auto automatic Manual
384. nes for KX TD1232 In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable The number of the CO buttons available depends on the telephone type Refer to Section 3 Buttons on Proprietary Telephones To program 24 CO buttons use proprietary telephones KX T7230 T7433 T7436 If you press the same CO button again in step 5 you can select a desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tone When you enter the tone type number 1 through 8 you will hear the selected tone type until STORE is pressed This selection is possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single CO Group CO or Loop CO Section 3 Features Button Flexible Buttons on Proprietary Telephones 4 24 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the jack number for a manager and or operators The manager extension can perform system programming The operator has the ability to perform operator services e OPE 1 operator 1 Day Night OPE 2 operator 2 Day Night MNGER manager e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Operator 1 Day Night and Manager Jack 01 Operator 2 Not stor
385. ng to CO Line Limited Call Duration Call Transfer Screened to CO Line System Programming 4 115 503 4 7 COS Programming Call Transfer to CO Line Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Transfer to CO Line function e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Enable Disable All COS Enable 1 Enter 503 Display Transfer to CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Call Transfer Screened to CO Line 4 116 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Forwarding to CO Line function
386. ng and deletes the registration after it is found Display example Deleted 5 To delete another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Even if Rejected is displayed in step 4 above you can delete the PS In this case Registration Clear on the PS PS Programming is required Display Rejected The PS is not registered correctly The display changes after few seconds as follows Display Delete 5 If you do not want to delete the PS go to step 7 8 44 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 65 Conditions Feature References PS Termination contd 6 Press STORE 7 To delete another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 9 Press END Deleting the same PS registration number from the PS by PS Programming is only necessary when it is deleted after Rejected is displayed in this program If a PS registration is terminated in this program all the PS assignments and its extension assignments will return to the default settings If you only want to change the PS retaining all the assignments re enter the replacing PS on the old PS registration number in program 650 PS Registration In this case you should reset the system so that the assignment is activated Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features Digital Wireless
387. ng to the priority S CO gt G CO gt L CO on a hunted CO line group e If Idle Line Preference Outgoing is set on the telephone the user can access an idle line only by going off hook e The system waits for a programmed time before dialling after a CO line is seized Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic line access LCR 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Outward Dialling Line Access Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Description Conditions Allows the extension user to dial access a CO line group An idle line is selected from the CO line group To specify a CO line group dial the feature number the default setting is 8 anda desired CO line group number 1 through 8 A proprietary telephone user can also specify a CO line group by pressing a Group CO button e Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines available to access e An idle line is selected in sequence from the lines in the specified CO line group e Group CO buttons must be programmed prior to use e If Idle Line Preference Outgoing is set on the te
388. nnect the wired extensions 7 1 Insert the required telephone wires into the holes in the plug Press the transparent part into the black part Note Do not peel off the wire coating Insert the wires all the way 2 he lt 4 pin plug D1 D1 i AE D B 7 2 Insert the plug into a jack on the unit Connect the ground terminal to To extensions ground Note If other expansion units are installed the frame ground connec tion is required for only one unit 8 14 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 4 Installing the Unit 8 Tie all of the cords into a bundle If Note If two expansion units are installed cut other cords are exposed in the upper the cabinet cover s on the lower cabi cabinet tie them also net s to allow the cords from the upper 9 Close the cabinet cover and secure the cabinet to go down through the cabinet outside screw cover s To protect the cords smooth 10 Cover the cords with the cord holder any cut edges included Cut here ID LIfe SAFETY CAUTION ls Cord holder The small cover which provides access to f connectors CN402 CN403 CN404 and CN405 shall not have its cable knock out section removed unless
389. nnectors Extension Connectors o pead CEE GEE 0 a i A z g 5 a e Paging Jack 2 Paging Jack 1 External Music Jack 2 External Music Jack 1 l o a GEE System Clear Switch Reset Button e Beste Front Cover Notes e EIA RS 232C Connector Battery Adaptor Connector Paging Jack ports External Music Jack ports and Doorphone Dooropener Connectors are at SELV e CO Line Connectors and Extension Connections are at TNV e Interconnection circuit should be such that the equipment continues to comply with the requirements of 4 2 of EN41003 for TNV circuits and 2 3 of EN60950 for SELV circuits after making connections between circuits Installation 2 5 2 2 3 Wall Mounting This set is made exclusively for wall mounting The wall must be able to support the weight of the main unit If screws other than the ones supplied are used they must have the same diameter as the ones enclosed Mounting on Wooden Wall KX TD816 KX TD1232 1 Place the templet included on the wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall to mark the three screw positions to mark the four screw p
390. nt c ceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 65 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment c ceeeeeeeeees 4 67 128 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment c eeeeeeeereeeeees 4 68 129 Operator Quete nnr a a 4 69 0 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment cseceeeseeeeeteee 4 69 1 131 Hunting Group Assignment 00 ieee eee eseeceeceeeeeeeeeeneeesaeeees 4 69 2 132 Hunting Group Name Assignment eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeees 4 69 3 133 Hunting Over low ecesivcvacisteraciasscvcavasesedecasoncasaesedsecsaavensceesndens 4 69 4 134 135 Hunting Intercept Day Night ee eeeeeeeeeeee 4 69 6 136 ISDN DDI Number Phantom Extension Number Transformation ccssceeee 4 69 7 148 Off Hook MOmitor ccccccccccccccesssssssececececeesesesssaeeeseceeeesensaaees 4 69 8 15 Installation Manual Contents 4 4 4 5 4 6 Timer Pr Brannan ssassn n 4 70 200 Hold Recall Tie nnas nnne rii u ii a 4 70 201 Transfer Recall Time ccccccsessccececcceesessnsseeeeeceeeesersaaees 4 71 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time sseseseeessseeesseeessresses 4 72 203 Intercept Time issii sdeceanacececdesadenecaapavaass 4 73 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time 224 3ccisi lt i ccondedezetes aactagedeneidaied donieees 4 74 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 00 cccceeeeeeees 4 75 207 First Dit Me ereenn maaa tateccad cpa AE 4 76 208 Inter Digit TIM
391. nting group basis Hunting works when an incoming call arrives at an floating number for a hunting group However for VM AA hunting an incoming call to any extension number which belongs to a hunting group is hunted as well The following assignments are determined for the hunting group e Floating Extension Number e The Hunting Group Name e Numbers of Waiting Queues e Overflow Status e The Destination of Intercept Routing Day Night e DDI number e Hunting Type e Each extension can belong to more than one group simultaneously Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type 112 DDI Number Assignment for Floating Extension 131 Hunting Group Assignment 132 Hunting Group Name 133 Hunting Overflow 134 135 Hunting Intercept Day Night 813 Floating Number Assignment Section 3 Features No Reply Group Ring Group Station Hunting Uniform Call Distribution UCD Operation References Not applicable 3 73 1 Features 3 Features I Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Description Conditions Connection References The system can assign which subscriber number is answered and which extension receives a call by the ISDN point to multi point configuration The optional ISDN SO Line Card Unit KX TD280 KX TD281 or KX TD282 is required A maximum of ten Multiple Subscriber Numbers MSN can be assigned to each ISDN SO bus with po
392. number 555 4512 deleted 5 digits 55545 12 12 added number 1 112 When DDI transformation number is selected the call is directed to extension 212 A e When extension is selected the call is directed to extension 112 B 3 48 0 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features D Conditions Connection References To select Method 1 or Method 2 depends on the program 990 Field 38 and to select DDI transformation number or extension depends on the program 990 Field 37 e DDI service can be enabled or disabled on a CO line basis e After the extension number is determined the system operates the call in the same way as the DIL 1 1 operation e If a called number cannot be converted to an extension number or DDI transformed number the call is sent to an IRNA destination e It is possible to deny answering the direct dialling in call on a Class of Service basis e This feature activates when Point is assigned in the program 424 ISDN Configuration Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Unit Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 111 DDI Removed Digit Added Number Assignment DDI Number Assignment for Floating Extension Direct Dialling In Day ISDN Configuration 429 Direct Dialling In Night ISDN DDI Numb
393. of Service COS basis e COS number 1 through 8 x x all COS Enable Disable All COS Enable 1 Enter 513 Display Night Service 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e The operator extension can switch the mode regardless of setting Section 3 Features Night Service 4 122 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 514 Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Enables or disables the ability to reject Direct Dialling In call on a Class of Service COS basis e COS number 1 through 8 x x all COS e Enable Disable All COS Disable 1 Enter 514 Display DND for DDI 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or
394. ollows Outside call gt Transferred call gt Extension call gt Doorphone call e Group Call Pickup starts with the lowest jack number e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup group 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Pickup Group 3 30 Features 3 Features C Call Pickup Deny Description Conditions Allows the user to prohibit other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his her extension by using the call pickup features Distinctive dial tone is sent to the user on the extension with this feature when the user goes off hook Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Call Splitting Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup deny Section 3 Features Call Pickup CO Line Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Directed DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Pickup Deny Allows the extension user to alternate between two other parties Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a conversation with the other party Call Splitting is impossible during Doorphone Call or Paging Programming References Featu
395. oming calls to the wired telephone will be forwarded to the desired destination Class of Service COS The COS level of the wired telephone becomes available Do Not Disturb DND Calls to the wired telephone due to the setting of the wired telephone Electronic Station Lockout The PS can make a call even if the wired telephone is locked Executive Busy Override Even during a conversation using a PS the setting of the wired telephone becomes available Pickup Dialling e The memory of the Pickup Dialling exists individually Redial Saved Number e The memory of the Saved Number Redial of the wired tele phone cannot be used by the PS Station Speed Dialling PS Dialling Directory Programming References e The memory of the Station Speed Dialling PS Dialling Directory exists individually Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Super extra device port SXDP Section 8 4 System Programming 654 SXDP Assignment Feature References None Operation References DECT Portable Station Features User Manual Super EXtra Device Port SXDP DECT Portable Station Section 8 37 8 4 DECT PS System Programming DECT PS System Programming Conditions Most of the system programming described in Section 4 is supported by a system with a DECT portable station PS In addition the programs which are described in the following pages are required to use the PS
396. on press the key at step 3 or step 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or for COO1 There are six notification methods 1 Immediate ringing rings immediately 2 2 ring delay 3 4 ring delay 4 6 ring delay 5 8 ring delay 6 No ring only the indicator flashes 7 Disable no incoming call When you change the jack number by pressing NEXT or PREV the CO line number is not changed Example 03 1 CO06 Press NEXT 03 2 CO06 Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Ringing Delayed Night Service 4 130 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an extension in both day and night modes The extension users can make outgoing CO calls using the assigned CO lines e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 all CO lines e Enabl enable Disab disable All jacks 1 2 all CO lines Enable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 605 for day or 606 for night Display example CO Out Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can a
397. on and the VPS automatically creates mailboxes with this data Automatically Configuration Quick Setup e A maximum of one VPS can be connected to each DSHS cabinet e A maximum of six DSHS jacks can be connected to a digital proprietary telephone capable VPS Because a digital proprietary telephone connection supports up to two simultaneous voice calls only one DSHS jack needs to be connected for each two VPS ports e Connect the jacks and ports in ascending order In other words the lowest number DSHS jack used for VPS connection must be connected to the lowest number VPS port e The VPS data is transmitted to the VPS on the lowest jacks port e Only extensions which are assigned as Connect in the program 611 can have mailboxes e The voice mail service codes and names can be stored in station speed dialling Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 126 Voice Mail Number Assignment 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 128 Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment 611 Extension Connection Assignment 617 Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration Operation References Not applicable 3 158 Features f Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100
398. on does not operate properly disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again or turn off the Power Switch of the system and then on again The system is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug Use twisted pair cable for CO line connection CO lines should be installed with lightning protectors For details refer to Section 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation Warning touch ground or wear a grounding strap To protect printed circuit boards from static electricity do not touch connectors indicated to the right To discharge body static Static sensitive devices are used ee a Warning Static sensitive connectors oe Installation 2 3 2 2 2 2 1 Unpacking Installation of the Main Unit When you unpack the main unit the following components should be included KX TD816 KX TD1232 Main Unit one one
399. on is as follows Called to Extension Phantom Type including Operator Extension Hunting Group DIL 1 1 CO line DDI CO line DDI DIL L N Selected Caller No incoming call No incoming call is CO line DDI is received received Selected Caller Selected Caller DDI number of hunting group and group name Selected Caller Selected Caller CO line DDI CO line DDI DDI DDI number of hunting group and group name Features 3 37 0 C 3 Features Conditions e It is required to name CO lines and extensions by system programming e With the CLIP feature the ISDN line informs the system of the caller s telephone number To display the name the system compares the informed number with the System Speed Dialling Numbers stored in program 001 and if a match is found determines the caller s name by using the System Speed Dialling Names stored in program 002 e The display DPT KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 or KX T7436 user can record the call information received by the CLIP feature CO Incoming Call Information Log feature e If the assigned information cannot be displayed it will be shown according to the following priority Caller CO Line DDI Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set 003 Extension
400. one None Level 8 None None Explanation Level 1 allows all calls Level 2 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 4 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 5 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 5 and 6 Level 6 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Table for Level 6 Level 7 Allows intercom calls only Level 8 Allows operator calls only Features 3 143 T 3 Features Flow Chart of Toll Restriction The user makes a toll call Is the call made by System Speed Dialling No Yes No Is TRS Override for System lt Speed Dialling enabled Levels 7 8 What is the extension toll Level 1 restriction level Levels 2 3 4 5 6 Yes Y N o Is the dialled number found in applicable Denied Code Tables Yes Yes Is the dialled number found in applicable Excepted Code Tables No
401. ons Feature References Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program 003 Extension Number Set e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Name 10 characters max All jacks Not stored 1 Enter 004 Display EXT Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 32 names for KX TD816 and 128 names for KX TD1232 Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e Program 003 Extension Number Set is used to assign extension numbers e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 Section 3 Features Display Call Information Intercom Calling Special Display Features Extension Dialling 4 22 System
402. or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available e To assign all ports to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port e After this assignment you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective Section 3 Features ISDN Extension 4 108 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 424 ISDN Configuration Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the configuration on ISDN port basis e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 x all ports KX TD1232 01 through 12 all ports Point point to point Multipoint point to multipoint All ports Point 1 Enter 424 Display Access Mode 2 Press NEXT Display Port NO gt 3 Enter a port number To enter a first port number you can also press NEXT Display example 03 Point 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available If one equipment is connected to the ISDN port sel
403. or 675 for night Display example PS Intercept Day 2 Press NEXT Display PS NO 7 gt 3 Enter the PS registration number You can also keep pressing NEXT until the desired PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To disable Intercept Routing press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You can set the extension numbers in programs 650 PS Registration 671 PS Extension Number Set 003 Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number and also floating numbers of the external ringer hunting groups and pagers in program 813 Floating Number Assignment e To assign all PSs to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for PS 01 e When Disable is selected Intercept Routing is provided according to the assignment in program 409 410 Section 3 Features Intercept Routing DECT Portable Station Section 8 65 676 8 4 DECT PS System Programming Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References PS Incoming Call Display Selects the display type for each PS when an incoming call is re
404. or Opener DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Doorphone Call Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 57 0 D 3 Features Doorphone Call Forwarding by ISDN Description Doorphone calls can be forwarded by ISDN SO lines The programs 607 608 become available when this feature is set to disable Conditions e If the transferred call is not answered before the programmed intercept time the line is disconnected If the doorphone button is pressed again before the call is answered the intercept timer starts again e When the LCR feature is functioning the data of Jack 01 1 is used as the itemized code programmed in 7003 Itemized Code Set The data of Operator 1 is also available Programming References Section 4 System Programming 625 626 Doorphone Call Forwarding Day Night 990 System Additional Information Field 61 Feature References Section 3 Features Doorphone Call Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Doorphone Call 3 57 1 Features Page left blank for future upgrade s D DSS Console Description 3 Features The Direct Station Selection DSS Console provides direct access to extensions and features and busy lamp display The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a proprietary telephone PT System Programming assigns the jack numbers of the DSS Console and its associated PT Up to four consoles can be in
405. or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND Override 4 118 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 508 Account Code Entry Mode Description There are three account code modes Option Verified All Calls and Verified Toll Restriction Override This program determines the mode to be used by each Class of Service COS Option mode The user can enter any account code if needed Verified All Calls mode The user must always enter a pre assigned account code to make a CO call Verified Toll Restriction Override mode The user must enter a pre assigned account code when the user needs to override toll restriction Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Option Verify All Verified All Calls Verify Toll Verified Toll Restriction Override Default All COS Option Programming 1 Enter 508 Display Call Accounting 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Option 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To program another COS press NEXT or
406. or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Each PS extension number can be two to four digits consisting of 0 through 9 The and keys cannot be used e A PS extension number can also be assigned in program 650 PS Registration DECT Portable Station Section 8 61 671 8 4 Feature References DECT PS System Programming PS Extension Number Set contd e A PS extension number is invalid if the first or second digits do not match with the setting in program 100 Flexible Numbering 01 16 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some PS extension numbers have two or three digits If two digits are assigned they have three digits and some may have four digits Double entries or incompatible entries are invalid including the assignment in programs 003 Extension Number Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number or 813 Floating Number Assignment Valid entry examples are 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry examples are 10 and 106 210 and 21 Program 653 PS Extension Name Set is used to name the PSs It is possible to modify the extension number in this program If the PS extension number was modified re register the PS to the system in program 650 PS Registration
407. originating and receiving calls can be different for day and night modes The system operation for restricting toll calls can be arranged separately to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night Switching of the Day Night Mode Day Night mode can be switched either automatically at a pre assigned time or manually by the pre assigned extension or the operator at any time desired Class of Service programming determines the extensions that can perform it Automatic Night Service If you select automatic switching mode your system will switch the Day Night mode at the programmed time each day The starting time of the Day Night mode can be set for each day Manual Night Service If you select manual switching mode the pre assigned extension and the operator can switch the Day Night mode by dialling the feature number Conditions The following programming items may be assigned in a different way between day mode and night mode 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Night 134 135 407 408 409 410 438 439 500 501 509 510 603 604 Hunting Intercept Day Night DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night Intercept Extension Day Night Extension Ringing Assignment Day Night for ISDN MSN Toll Restriction Level Day Night Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialling Day Night DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Features 3 103
408. ortable Station Section Provides information on the wireless system which can be optionally equipped with the basic system NOTE The following documents may be used in conjunction with this manual User Manual for KX TD816 KX TD1232 System DIGITAL Proprietary Telephones DSS Console DECT Portable Station and Single Line Telephones Programming Table The programming table is designed to be used as a hard copy reference to the user programmed data Installation Manual Contents Section 1 System Outline 1 1 System High li Ghts ssi csscssssscerccssssoncsvneseacencvsnuesssnverasnansexeasesvnassvenboravees 1 2 1 2 Basic System Construction sccsssccsssscsssssccsssscssssscessscessescesees 1 4 1 3 Proprietary Telephones oss cssaccdisccsccaisedesescinssscailsvesetivsaceoadedvcacuseasteas 1 5 I E ONO TAS PIATE EEE A E TA 1 6 1 5 SPOCHICAGOMS 5 Gisceicecasisiccsiscsesacaasbescesduoscstaveeecensusgnsucavencd causesencateneeses 1 10 1 51 General Description s earn a a s 1 10 1 5 2 CharacteristicS aie SEs a Ne cal alittle dada 1 11 1 5 3 System Capacity ennan nein e a a aii 1 12 S4 POLES onenei a sa dandancananedd euasedaats A A E 1 13 Section2 Installation 2 1 Before Installation e soosoossessoesoossessossooesosssesoossossossoossosssesooesossses 2 2 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit oesoossesoossoessessossosssessossoessessossosssese 2 4 22V WINDACKIING ee naa a haut E osha tt aie 2 4 2 22 Nam and Locatiosssnss
409. orwarding Busy Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding No Answer Intercept Routing No Answer In these functions the caller to the extension need not know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS Follow On ID function If a DIL 1 N call is transferred to the VPS by IRNA your system transmits the mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions A mailbox number is a respective extension number by default The mailbox number can be changed only if program 990 System Additional Information Field 18 is set to free Pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button and dialling the extension number allows the extension user to transfer to the corresponding mailbox In this case Follow On ID function is available The Voice Mail extension should be set to Data Line Security to achieve proper recording The KX TD1232 has two Extension Cards and can have two 8 Station Line Units It is recommended that you do not connect more than two VM ports to each card or units Section 2 Installation 2 3 2 Extension Connection 2 4 5 Extension Connection Optional Unit Features 3 Features V Programming References Common For VM Service For AA Service Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do no
410. ositions 2 Install the three screws included into 2 Install the four screws included into the the wall wall fie Drive the screw Drive the screw to this position to this position 2 6 Installation 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit 2 2 4 Frame Earth Connection IMPORTANT You must connect the frame of the main unit to Earth O a To Earth 2 2 5 Opening Front Cover Two screws are attached to the front cover by springs so that they will not be lost To open the front cover of the main unit 1 Loosen the two screws on the right side of the main unit 2 Open the front cover in the direction of Arrow Screw Screw Installation 2 7 2 3 2 3 1 Panasonic Connection System Connection Diagram Battery Adaptor KX A46 Q C T T S SS Gs 2989 BEge BBE gt sia el BBB Two car batteries connected in series e Consisting of two 12 VDC Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2
411. party to their conversation thereby establishing a conference e Possible conference combinations are 1 inside and 2 outside 2 inside and outside and 3 inside e Up to six conference calls are allowed simultaneously e When a two party call is changed to a three party call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties Eliminating the tone is programmable e The third party must have a CO button which is common to the CO line in use by the original parties Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 990 System Additional Information Field 13 Station Programming cceccceecceseereeeneeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Conference CONF Button None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Conference Features 3 41 C 3 Features Confirmation Tone Description At the end of many different functions the system confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user through the speaker of the telephone Confirmation tone 1 a Indicates that the new setting differs from the previous setting b Set or cancel the Electronic Station Lockout ls i Ea jj Confirmation tone 2 a Indicates that the new setting is identical to the previous setting b In addition sent when various features are successfu
412. peatedly until the display below appears Display REGISTRATION 11 Press the Auto OK button Display example DECT SYS NO 1234 12 Enter the DECT system number Display example DECT SYS NO 1 13 Press the Auto OK button Display example ENTER PASSWORD 14 Enter the PS password Display example ENTER PASSWORD Heke You will hear a confirmation tone 15 Press the Auto OK button Display DECT SYS LOCK DISABLE 16 Press the Book button to select DISABLE or ENABLE for the System Lock Display DECT SYS LOCK DISABLE 17 Press the Auto OK button Display example if disabled UNLOCKED Display example if enabled ENTER PASSWORD 18 If you select ENABLE in step 16 enter a System Lock password Display ENTER PASSWORD k kkk 19 Press the Auto OK button Display REENTER PASSWORD 20 Enter the System Lock password again Display REENTER PASSWORD k KK 21 Press the Auto OK button Display LOCKED 8 42 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 650 Conditions Feature References PS Registration contd With a display PT 22 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 23 Repeat steps 4 through 21 24 Press END It is possible to search the display by pressing Next or Previous i
413. plate Insert fingers into the slits to slide the cabinet to the left until it is remove the cover plate fixed SS g ma AIT y LAA E Slit Slit 4 Bi ml P Note Any of the cover plates can be removed as needed 2 Connect the cabinet cord to the 4 Loosen the outside screw and slide the connector in the main unit firmly cover to the right D1232 LB a Panasonic Ey _ y Outside screw Installation 2 39 2 4 6 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD280 5 Secure the inside screw included in the card to fix the cabinet to the main unit Note Be sure to fix the inside screw to the main unit or the unit may not work properly Inside screw TTT 6 Prepare the required plugs Two 4 pin plugs are included in 4 CO Line Unit or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit to connect four CO lines or two ISDN SO lines Eight 6 pin plugs are included in 8 Station L
414. pleted 7 Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 8 8 Press NEXT to program Slave System Display example Slave C C E1 E2 9 Repeat steps 3 and 7 10 Press END Conditions e When starting the system for the first time or performing System Data Clear the application for location will use practical installation instead of the system default setting For KX TD816 there is one expansion area inside the system area 1 and there are two expansion areas on the system area 2 and 3 from bottom to top For KX TD1232 there is one expansion area inside the system area 1 and there are three expansion areas on the system area 2 3 and 4 from bottom to top If the Slave System of KX TD1232 is out of service skip the steps 8 and 9 After changing the setting to make your setting effective unplug the system once and plug it in again Otherwise the previous setting will be maintained Feature References Section 3 Features Module Expansion 4 48 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 110 Network Type Assignment Description Assigns the type of ISDN network Selection BT EURO Default BT Programming 1 Enter 110 Display Network Type 2 Press NEXT Display example BT 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Feature References None System Programming 4 49 0 Ill 4 3 System Progra
415. press CLEAR and enter the new number Press STORE To program another group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired hunting group number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Section 3 Features Hunting Group Station Hunting 4 69 5 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 134 135 Hunting Intercept Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the Intercept destination in both day and night modes for each hunting group e Hunting group number 01 through 32 e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no Intercept Routing All hunting groups Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 134 for day or 135 for night Display example Hunt Intercp Day 2 Press NEXT Display Group NO gt 3 Enter the hunting group number To enter hunting group number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number To disable Intercept Routing press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another hunting group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired hunting group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You can set the extension numbers in programs 003 Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number and also floating numbers of t
416. press CLEAR and the new code Press STORE Press END The BTL access code can be a maximum of 10 digits consisting of 0 through 9 Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR System Programming 4 145 7003 4 9 LCR Programming Itemized Code Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Registers an itemized code applied to an extension The registered code is inserted into the T command position stored in program 7X22 LCR Carrier Modify Command e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Itemized code 4 digits max KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 201 through 216 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 301 through 316 KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 201 through 264 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 301 through 364 1 Enter 7003 Display Itemized Code 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter an itemized code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum o
417. r Assignment and 813 Floating Number Assignment Section 3 Features Phantom extension 4 69 1 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 131 Hunting Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Assigns the extension numbers which belong to each hunting group An incoming call is hunted in the order of registration except for Ring hunting e Hunting group number 01 through 32 e Extension number 2 through 4 digits 12 numbers max Disable No entry All hunting groups Disable 1 Enter 131 Display Hunt Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display Group NO 3 Enter a hunting group number To enter hunting group number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 01 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another extension to the same group press NEXT and repeat steps 4 and 5 7 To program another hunting group press SELECT and repeat steps 3 through 6 8 Press END e One extension can belong to more than one hunting group simultaneously e You can assign the floating number of the Ring hunting group for No Reply hunting Section 3 Features Hunting Group Station Hunting System Programming 4 69 2 132 4 3 System Programming Hunting Group Name Assignment Descriptio
418. r COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END To assign all COS to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display will show the contents programmed for COS 1 Section 3 Features Call Forwarding by ISDN Line 4 125 1 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 519 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Description Enables or disables to perform the Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA and Whisper OHCA on a Class of Service COS basis Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Enable Disable Default All COS Enable Programming 1 Enter 519 Display OHCA 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension e Program 613 ISDN Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each ISDN extension Feature References Section 3 Features Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whi
419. r Master 33 through 64 for Slave e Jack number for paired extension KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave Default All DSS Consoles Not stored Programming 1 Enter 007 Display DSS Console Asn 2 Press NEXT Display DSS NO gt 3 Enter a DSS Console number To enter DSS Console number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example DSS 01 P 4 Enter a jack number for the console To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number 5 Press gt 6 Enter a jack number for the paired extension To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number Display example DSS 01 02 P 03 7 Press STORE 4 26 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment conta Conditions Feature References 8 To program another DSS Console press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DSS Console number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END The jack number for the Console and that for the paired extension must be entered together Multiple DSS Consoles cannot be assigned to the same DSS Console jack Multiple DSS Consoles can be paired with the same proprietary telephone jack A DSS Console jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack number of Manager set in program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment Day Ni
420. r System Features Features 3 105 O 3 Features One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Description This feature if programmed allows the DSS Console and the proprietary telephone user to hold an outside call and quickly transfer it to an extension While talking to an outside party pressing a DSS button on the console or the proprietary telephone provides automatic hold and transfer There is no need to press the TRANSFER button The extension starts ringing immediately Conditions e One Touch Transfer cannot be performed when there is another call on Consultation Hold e If One Touch Transfer mode is disabled the user transfers an outside call by pressing the TRANSFER button followed by the DSS button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Feature References Section 3 Features Button Direct Station Selection DSS Operation References DPT Features User Manual Call Transfer to Extension DSS Console Features Call Transfer 3 106 Features 3 Features O Operator Description Conditions The system supports up to two operators during day and night modes separately Any extension can be appointed as an operator The extension assigned as an operator has the ability to perform the following operations e Controlling CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock mode e Clearing the Live Call Screening Password e Performing the Hotel Application e Printing
421. r a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example C001 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In case of the KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and 13 through 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 e If Enable is selected the subscriber number and extension number is provided to ISDN for CLIP and COLP Section 3 Features Direct Dialling In DDI System Programming 4 105 421 4 6 CO Line Programming CO Line Name Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the company or customer names to each CO line so that the operator or extension user can find the destination where the caller is trying to reach before answering e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 16 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 54 x all CO lines e Name 10 characters max All CO lines Not stored 1 Enter 421 Display CO Line Name 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO0
422. r failure Battery Adaptor KX A46 a E A Two car batteries connected in series Battery Adaptor Connector Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit 1 8 System Outline Available for KX TD1232 only 14 Options DSS Console KX T7440 KX T7441 KX T7240 KX T7040 Permits easy and quick access to stations and features The Busy Lamp Field shows the idle or busy state of each station DSS Consoles are designed for use with a proprietary telephone The system supports up to four DSS Consoles per system Paired Telephone DSS Console Digital Proprietary Telephone Pair Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Doorphone KX T30865 This system supports two doorphones and two door openers The doorphone is an option o Ei Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 Door Door Opener 1 Opener 2 Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit System Outline 1 9 1 5 Specifications 1 5 1 General Description System Capacity Control Method Switching Power Supplies KX TD816 CO lines ISDN SO lines 8 max 4 max Extensions K
423. r to appear busy to an incoming extension call or allows to transfer an incoming outside call to the assigned extension This can be set or cancelled by the extension user Conditions If your proprietary telephone PT is not supplied with the FWD DND button it can be assigned on a flexible button e DND does not work for the following calls doorphone calls recalls for hold Timed Reminder alarm e A PT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing the button showing the arrival of the call e An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service Do Not Disturb Override e The following extension cannot set DND operator the Call Forwarding C FWD destination or the DND destination e When the extension has set the C FWD DND or DND for Direct Dialling In Call the extension cannot be a DND destination e Setting this feature cancels C FWD or DND for Direct Dialling In Call If the destination extension has DND activated then the DSS button corresponding to it will light up red This indicates to the proprietary telephone or DSS console user that the destination extension is unavailable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb Station Programming 0 ccccccesseeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND B
424. ram 609 Voice Mail Access Codes 19 Assigns the first display of a digital display 0 names 0 Special Display proprietary telephone in Station Speed 1 numbers Features for KX Dialling T7235 Station Speed Dialling 20 Assigns the source of Music Source 1 for 0 internal music 1 e Background Music on Hold and BGM source Music BGM 1 external music e Background source Music BGM External e Music on Hold 21 Selects inter digit pause for pulse dialling 00 630 ms 01 None 01 830 ms 10 1030 ms 22 Selects intercom dial tone frequency 0 normal 0 None 1 distinctive 26 Selects the extension hooking signal 0 32 1000 ms 1 None detection time 1 32 136 ms 4 172 System Programming 4 11 Option Programming System Additional Information contd 990 Area Field Description Selection Default References 4 24 Prevents or allows a call originated by an 0 prevent 1 Voice Mail AA port of VPS to another AA port 1 allow Integration 25 Prevents or allows sending pulse dialling 0 prevent 1 None signals during an outside call 1 allow 27 Enables or disables the Digital Test Access 0 enable 1 None 1 disable 53 Enables or disables the SMDR printout of 0 disable 1 Station Message the secret dial numbers 1 enable Detail Recording SMDR 54 Reserved 57 5 28 Assigns the displayed language when in 0 Englis
425. ramming 4 2 System Programming 4 1 1 Using Proprietary Telephones Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display DPT Three soft buttons are provided just below the display on the display of Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 and KX T7436 The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance step by step Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display See Viewing the Display on page 4 6 for more information on the display lines If the SHIFT button indicator is on two functions are available with each soft button To alternate between the two functions press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display Soft button variations Example CLR NEXT KX T7230 Display Buttons V7 l l E Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Press SHIFT SKP CLR NEXT to alternate os Seo PREV Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT a 5 l Press SHIFT to alternate a gz l lt SEL PREV U Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT gt SEL NEXT J S A Press SHIFT to alternate Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT System Programming 4 3 4 1 1 Using Prop
426. rd Assignment 618 ISDN DDI Number Extension Not Stored Number Transformation 619 ISDN DDI Number ISDN Blank Not Stored Extension Number Transformation 620 621 Extension Intercept Routing All Jacks Disable Day Night Day Night 622 Incoming Call Display All Jacks Caller 623 CLIP COLP Number Assignment All Jacks DDI 624 CLIP COLP Number for ISDN All Jacks DDI Extension Assignment 625 626 Doorphone Call Forwarding All Jacks Disable Day Night LCR Programming 7000 LCR Mode Off 7002 BTL Access Code 121 5 8 List Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 7003 Itemized Code Set e KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 201 through 216 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 301 through 316 e KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 201 through 264 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 301 through 364 7X0Y LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 Carrier 1 Table 1 Location 1 x through 8 Other Locations Not Stored 7X1Y LCR Time and Fee Set for Plans 1 Not Stored through 8 7X20 LCR Exceptional Code Set Not Stored 7X21 LCR Carrier Code Carrier 1 131 Other carriers Not Stored 7X22 LCR Carrier Modify Command Carr
427. re References Operation References User Manual No programming required None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Splitting Features 3 31 C 3 Features CALL TRANSFER FEATURES SUMMARY Description Call Transfer features allow the user to transfer a call to another party This operation can be screened or unscreened Screened call transfer is used when you want to announce the call to the other party before completing the transfer Unscreened call transfer immediately releases the caller to the called party An intercom or an outside call can be transferred to an extension or to an outside party by Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to Extension Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to voice announce to the external party and transfer the intercom call Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to perform it Programming References Feature References Operation Reference User Manual Section 4 System Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line 990 System Additional Information Field 1 Section 3 Features Hold Recall DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Transfer to CO Line Call Transfer Scr
428. re deleted and 2 is added and the number becomes 203 e This program is available when the program 990 Field 38 is assigned to use this program Section 3 Features Direct Dialling In DDI 4 49 System Programming Page left blank for future upgrade s 112 4 3 System Programming Floating DDI Number Assignment Description Assigns the floating DDI number for an operator External Pagers modem and hunting groups Selection e DDI floating station KX TD816 Operator Pager1 Pager2 Hunting Groups 01 through 32 KX TD1232 Operator Pager1 Pager2 Pager3 Pager4 MODEM Hunting Groups 01 through 32 Floating DDI number 6 digits max Default Not stored Programming 1 Enter 112 Display FLT DDI NO 2 Press NEXT to program the Operator Display example Operator To program another floating station press NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 3 Enter a floating DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another floating station press NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions None Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Dialling In DDI 4 50 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 3 System Programming 113 VM Status DTMF Set
429. rect extension lines and a payphone should not be connected as an extension Operation in Power Failure In the event of a power failure three single line telephones connected to Power Failure Transfer jacks will be directly connected to the following CO lines KX TD816 CO 1 CO 2 and CO 5 KX TD1232 CO 1 CO 2 and CO 9 e Set the Dialling Mode Tone or Pulse of your telephone according to the CO line e 999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency 999 and 112 service Satisfactory performance can not be guaranteed for every allowed combination of host and subsidiary apparatus 999 and 112 can be dialled on the apparatus after accessing the CO line for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the BT emergency 999 and 112 service During dialling this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line This is not a fault and we advise you not to call Fault Repair Service Prevention of access by user This apparatus is intended to be accessible only to authorized personnel This apparatus must be installed in a locked room or similar environment such that user access is prevented Failure to prevent such user access will invalidate any approval given to this apparatus Caution Do not push the PAUSE button more than twice following the initial access digit or digits Failure to comply with this requirement may result in unsatisfactory op
430. red PS registration number is displayed Display example PS01 CO01 Disab 4 Enter the CO line number You can also keep pressing m gt or lt until the desired CO line number is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another PS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired PS registration number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END 8 52 DECT Portable Station Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 659 660 PS DIL 1 N Extension Day Night conta Conditions Feature References e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key in step 4 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line 01 or the PS which has the lowest PS registration number e When you change the PS registration number by pressing NEXT or PREV the CO line number will not changed lt Example gt PSO1 CO06 Press NEXT PS02 CO06 Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Night Service DECT Portable Station Section 8 53 661 662 8 4 DECT PS System Programming PS Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Determines which CO lines can be accessed by a PS in both the day and night modes PS users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned CO lines e PS registration number KX TD816 01 through 16
431. rent entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another selection press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired selection number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers 01 through 16 1st through 16th extension blocks 1 Enter 100 Press NEXT Enter 00 Display All Feature CLR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END 4 36 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering conta Conditions e Each extension block has one or two digits consisting of 0 through 9 Assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective blocks e Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programs 003 Extension Number Set 012 ISDN Extension Number Set 127 Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment 130 Phantom Extension Number Assignment and 813 Floating Number Assignment Each feature number has one through three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and If or is included in a feature number dial pulse telephone users cannot access the feature Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid Valid entry example 30 and 31 210 and 211 Invalid entry example 5 and 5 30 and 301 If you delete a feature number the feature cannot be used by dialling operation You can remove all the feature numbers except selections 01 through 16 To clear an ext
432. resses the L CO button an idle line is hunted in the programmed CO line group order CO line group number 1 through 8 eight entries max in desired order 12345678 1 Enter 103 Display Local Access 2 Press NEXT Display example Access 12345678 3 Enter the CO line group numbers in priority from top to bottom To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new order 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e There is a maximum of eight CO line groups Up to eight CO line group numbers can be entered e Automatic Line Access feature works only if Least Cost Routing mode is turned off in program 7000 LCR Mode Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic Line Preference Outgoing Line Access Direct 4 42 0 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 104 Quick Dial Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assign a feature number for each quick dial location number e Location number 01 through 80 e Feature number 4 digits max All locations Not Stored 1 Enter 104 Display FLX Quick Dial 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a quick dial number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a desired number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter
433. rface to the EIA RS 232C connector located on the main unit After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer in 10 seconds When programmed for outgoing toll calls only printing occurs only for calls which start with the numbers stored in any Denied Code Table from levels 2 to 6 If LCR is employed not the user dialled but the modified number is checked against these tables This system can store information up to 100 calls If more calls are originated or received previous records are deleted starting from the oldest one This data is not deleted when you reset the system If the system clock is not set by system programming or if the calendar IC is out of order the date and time is not printed out If Register Recall signal is manually sent out during a conversation the call record is printed and a new record is started 8 Cost is printed out in the format selected in program 117 Charge Display Selection It is programmable to enable or disable the printout of secret dial numbers If the account code stored in location 01 of the programming table is dialed the dialed number is not printed out to SMDR Private Call Refer to the seventh line on an example of printed call records When the paper of the printer runs out or the printer is out of service the indication Check Printer is displayed on the telephone of Operator 1 3 130 Features Available for KX TD123
434. rge Fee Account Code 1 5 2 Characteristics Station Loop Limit KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7020 KX T7050 KX T7130 oaeee 40 ohms Single Line Telephone eeeeeeeeeeee 600 ohms including set Doorphoneia2 evalua eae 20 ohms Minimum Leak Resistance 15 000 ohms Maximum Number of Station Instruments per Line 1 for KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7130 KX T7020 KX T7050 or single line telephone 2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port Connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone Ring Voltage 70 Vrms at 25 Hz depends on Ringing Load Primary Power 230 VAC 50 Hz Central Office Loop Limit 1 600 ohms max Environmental Requirements 0 40 C 32 104 F 10 90 System Outline 1 11 15 Specifications Ability To Recognize Further Digits The KX TD816 KX TD1232 PBX is capable of accepting and acting upon routing information received from a proprietary telephone for 10 seconds after the latest routing information has been received Satisfies BS6450 Part 1 1993 Clause 13 5 1 5 3 System Capacity Lines Cards Units Station Equipment KX TD1232 Max Quantity Item KX TD816 Single System Max Quantity System Connection System Inter Connection Card Service Unit 1 1 8 CO Line Card or 1 4 ISDN SO Line Card 4 CO Line Card or 1 2 ISDN S0 Line Card
435. rietary Telephones Type 5 Press SHIFT SKP SEL NEXT Lt p SKP CLR PREV Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons For overlay buttons refer to Using the Overlay below Throughout programming you will see instructions such as Press PREV If you use soft buttons this means press SHIFT release SHIFT and then press Soft 3 The PREV function is performed Note If you use soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to press the following buttons you may press soft buttons shown below Instructions Soft button SELECT SEL SEL or SEL CLEAR CLR Using the Overlay A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory This overlay should be used at all times while in programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in programming mode as follows The original functions are in parentheses During Normal Operation During Programming PAUSE PAUSE PROGRAM SP PHONE NEXT REDIAL PREV PREVIOUS AUTO ANSWER MUTE SELECT RECALL RECALL FLASH RCL FLASH TRANSFER CLEAR FWD DND np CONF lt INTERCOM SECRET AUTO DIAL STORE STORE HOLD END 4 4 System Programming 4 1 1 Using Proprietary Telephones Location of Controls with the Overlay The pictures below show the functions of the b
436. riod This is called Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA The following items can have the Intercept Routing destination e CO Line Group e Extension e Hunting Group Conditions e Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N TAFAS Call Forwarding and Station Hunting e The final destination of intercepted calls must be programmed for day and night modes There are four possible destinations 1 an extension 2 an external pager 3 a hunting group 4 a phantom extension e Intercept Routing is activated as shown below depending on the combination of incoming type and called destination Extension External Pager Hunting Group including Operator Internal ISDN Phantom Extension DIL L N Assigned CO line No incoming calls No incoming calls group are received are received _ Registered Assigned CO line Assigned hunting DIL 1 1 extension group group Registered Assigned CO line Assigned hunting DDI extension group group No more Intercept No more Intercept Assigned hunting Intercept Routing Routing group If Call Forwarding to CO Line feature is set at the IRNA destination the call will be forwarded to the specific outside party Programming References Section 4 System Programming 203 Intercept Time 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 620 621 Extension Intercept Routing Day Night Feature References None Operation References Not applicable 3 74 Fe
437. rmation of a guest room e g cleaning status of the room and the total of the minibar charge with a telephone in each room Absent messages No 6 through No 9 can be printed out None Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 008 Absent Messages 990 System Additional Information Field 34 Section 3 Features Absent Message Capability DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Hotel Application Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call Description Conditions Allows the operator to set cancel and confirm the wake up call remotely for the extension e When either an operator or the extension sets a new time the pre set time is cleared e When a wake up call is not answered the operator s Alert indicator KX T7235 and KX T7436 only will flash Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Timed reminder remote Station Programming 0 ccccccesceeeeceteceteceeeeeeeeesees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Alert Button Section 3 Features Timed Reminder Operator Service Features Hotel Application Features 3 73 0 H Hunting Group Description Conditions 3 Features The system supports thirty two hunting groups The station hunting feature is assigned on the hu
438. rogramming Live Call Screening Mode Set Flexible Button Assignment Live Call Screening Button Live Call Screening Cancel Button None DPT Features Live Call Screening LCS Operator Service Features Live Call Screening Password Control If one party in a conversation goes on hook they are both disconnected from the speech path automatically This feature applies to extension and outside calls Reorder tone is sent to the off hook party before it is disconnected In the case of a single line telephone SLT if nothing is dialled within a certain period of time after the other party goes on hook reorder tone is sent to the SLT and then it is disconnected from the speech path Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Lockout Features 3 97 L 3 Features Log In Log Out Description Assigns an extension to join log in or leave log out a hunting group Extensions in log out status receive no calls by Station Hunting but can receive other calls unlike the DND feature Conditions e There should be at least one extension that is in log in status Only one log in extension cannot be set in log out status e The lighting patterns of Log In Log Out button and the status are shown below lighting CO Line Status pattern UCD Station Hunting Red on Log Out no reception
439. rogramming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 1 11 None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Transfer to Extension Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 33 C Call Waiting Description Conditions Tone 1 Intercom Tone 2 CO 3 Features While in conversation a call waiting tone informs the user of another incoming call that is waiting He or she can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold Call waiting tone can be enabled or disabled by dialling the appropriate feature number e The call waiting tone is generated when an outside call or a doorphone call comes in or when an extension caller executes Busy Station Signalling e Setting Data Line Security cancels Call Waiting which has been turned on e For proprietary telephone users two types of call waiting tone are provided to prevent them from missing the tone as shown below A proprietary telephone user can select the desired type by station programming Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call waiting OHCA whisper OHCA Station Programming 00 ccccccesceeseceteceteeeeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Sec
440. rogramming is required for location identification Refer to program 109 Expansion Card Unit Type in Section 4 Default Area 1 4 CO Line Unit Area 2 8 Station Line Unit PRI Section 7 3 7 2 1 Location of the Optional Units KX TD1232 A maximum of two 8 Station Line Units KX TD170 and or one CO Line ISDN Line Units KX TD180 KX TD280 or KX TD290 can be installed to any expansion area You must use the KX TD170 when you install the KX TD290 The former KX TD170 does not work properly with the KX TD290 Please see the back of the unit and check is marked Panasonic MODEL NO KX TD170 Max 2 units Unit Connectors y 8 Station f i o Line Unit i alee e aa ee pale KX TD170 z S i One of the following units Area 3 Ih TAE en hee i i W E i i igr Ea E o PENES i 1 4 CO Line jo e e Unit Area 2 4 P4 t4 cero i i KX TD180 yo ena ace is Wt 4 ia E k i i 2 ISDN SO adel dhl Line Unit Areal iH P KX TD280 Ji E
441. rt press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e If the charge limitation is set 0 no restriction is applied e To assign all port to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for a first port e Port numbers 03 through 06 are for the Master System and 09 through 12 are for the Slave if available e The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by 125 Assignment of Denomination Feature References Section 3 Features Budget management Charge Fee Reference ISDN Extension System Programming 4 35 0 015 4 2 Manager Programming Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns how many decimal places to set for the charge rate Number of decimal places 0 through 8 2 4 5 Enter 015 Display Decimal Point Press NEXT Display example Fraction place 2 Enter the desired number To delete the current entry press CLEAR Press STORE Press END e This program is used when the rate is assigned in program 016 Charge Rate Assignment e According to this assignment the charge is displayed during the conversation and shown on the SMDR print out e This assignment is used for the charge fee reference Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference 4 35 1
442. rvices Conditions If the presentation is enabled the calling party can check the the called party s number before the called party is answered it Connected Line Identification Presentation Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering COLR 419 Subscriber Number Assignment 517 Connected Line Identification Restriction Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Connected Line Indication Restriction COLR Features 3 43 C 3 Features Consultation Hold Description Allows the extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to transfer it or make a Conference call or make Call Splitting The held call cannot be retrieved from other extensions Conditions e With a proprietary telephone Consultation Hold is established by pressing TRANSFER or CONF button With a single line telephone it is established by pressing the Register Recall button e With a single line telephone the user can hold a call only to transfer it e Doorphone calls and paging calls cannot be placed on Consultation Hold e A new incoming call will not arise at the extension which is keeping a call on Consultation Hold The extension is regarded as busy e If a calling party is placed on hold music is sent to the party if available Music on Hold e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Transfer Recall starts e If an o
443. rwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination e An ISDN extension can be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding Do not disturb Station Programming cccccceeceeseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Forwarding Busy 3 20 Features 3 Features C Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Description Your calls are forwarded to another extension if your extension is busy or you do not answer the call in a pre determined time Conditions e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are Outside calls DDI DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e This function operates the same way as Call Forwarding Busy and Call Forw
444. s No programming required Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection Pulse to Tone Conversion Features 3 61 E 3 Features Operation References Not applicable Extension Connection Assignment Description Assign whether the extension user can perform all accesses or not Conditions e The extension of the jack number 01 should be set to connect If the destination of DIL 1 1 or DDI is set to disconnect the call is transferred to an operator Programming References Section 4 System Programming 611 Extension Connection Assignment Feature References None Operation Reference Not applicable Extension Group Description The system supports 16 extension groups Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to another group member Group Call Pickup or can make a voice announcement to another group member Paging Group Conditions e Every extension should belong to an extension group and can belong to more than one group simultaneously If System Connection is employed an extension group can include extensions on both systems e The floating number can be assigned on extension group basis Programming References Section 4 System Programming 602 Extension Group Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Call Pickup Group Paging Group Operation References Not applicable 3 62 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features E External Feature Ac
445. s TITLE PS CONDITION Message Waiting Module Expansion e is displayed as notification e The Message button can be activated by selecting it on the display For details refer to the Key Operation in the User Manual The Message button can be assigned on a flexible button However the LED of the flexible button does not work In addition to the current expansion unit a 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 can be installed to the system One KX TD144 supports up to two Cell Stations KX TD142 One KX TD144 can be installed to the KX TD816 and up to two KX TD144s can be installed to the KX TD1232 Night Service PS users cannot confirm the current mode on the display Paging All Group PS users can page and answer a page which is being announced over a nearby wired proprietary telephone or external pager However you cannot be directly paged at the PS Pulse to Tone Conversion The Tone button can be activated by selecting it on the display For details refer to the Key Operation in the User Manual User Programming Manager Programming Program 020 PS Flexible Button Assignment can also be changed by any display proprietary telephone user in the system Voice Mail Integration e A mailbox number can be assigned for each PS in program 665 PS Voice Mail Access Codes 8 32 DECT Portable Station Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features
446. s Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Feature References Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP Parallelled Telephone Operation References Not applicable Music on Hold Description While a party is on hold music is automatically sent Conditions e Operations such as Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold or Consultation Hold generates Music on Hold In case of Call Transfer it is possible to assign either Music on Hold or ringback tone is generated e The system has an internal music source However it may be necessary to connect a user supplied external music source such as a radio to the system Up to two music sources can be connected per system It is required to select the internal or external music source in program 990 field 20 e The music source is used for Music on Hold and or BGM Select a music source for each usage e Music on Hold of the Music Source 1 can be changed to a beep tone in program 990 field 70 Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 6 External Music Source Connection 3 102 Features 3 Features Programming References N Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Fields 1 20 70 Feature References Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Operation References Not applicable N ight Service Description This supports both Night and Day modes of operation The system operation for
447. s Section 3 Features Display Call Information Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 81 214 4 4 Timer Programming Message Waiting Ring Interval Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the Message Waiting ring interval time for a single line telephone Time minutes 0 through 64 0 min 1 4 5 Enter 214 Display MW Ring Time Press NEXT Display example Interval 10 min Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time Press STORE Press END When the internal time is set 0 the telephone does not ring for Message Waiting notification Section 3 Features Message Waiting 4 82 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 215 Ring Off Detection Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the ring off time so that the system can detect that the central office stops ringing Time seconds 6 11 6s 1 None None Enter 215 Display Ring Detect Time Press NEXT Display example Time 6 sec Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END System Programming 4 83 301 305 4 5 TRS Programming TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References T
448. s are connected with the VPS the port s with lower number s on the system need to be connected to one s with lower number s on the VPS lt Example gt Correct Way Incorrect Way 6 2 6 gt lt 2 5 _ 1 5 1 DSHS VPS DSHS VPS 3 6 Features Available when the Digital Super Hybrid System is connected to a Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 3 Features A Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Automatic Overflow and Hurry Up Transfer Description When Operator 1 is busy and the outside call reaches the Operator 1 directly the incoming call can be waited until the waiting queue is over assigned number When the incoming call is over assigned number the last call will be transferred to the Operator 2 Automatic Overflow Operator 1 can refer the waiting queue with the indicator of the Hurry Up button and transfer the first waiting call to the pre assigned extension with the Hurry Up button Hurry Up Transfer Conditions e Automatic Overflow does not function in the following cases a The waiting queue is set 0 b Operator 2 is not set c Operator 1 belongs to Station Hunting Group e Hurry Up Transfer does not function in the following cases a The waiting queue is set 0 b Hurry Up Button
449. s made an extension user can make and answer a call using either telephone e The proprietary telephone PT can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is enabled In the SLT DPT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the former In the SLT APT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call a three party call is established If one user goes on hook the other user continues the call When receiving a call The SLT is enabled Both the PT and the SLT ring except when the PT is in Handsfree Answerback mode or Voice Alerting mode The SLT is disabled PT rings but the SLT does not ring However the SLT can answer the phone When the SLT is in operation the display and LED indicator on the paired PT will show in the same way as if the PT is in operation If APT SLT are used the extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is playing BGM in programming mode receiving a paging announcement over the built in speaker If eXtra Device Port feature is available a DPT SLT can act as completely different extensions e Call Waiting tone can be heard only by PT Features 3 111 P Connection References 3 Features Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Parallelled Telephone Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 Sy
450. s may access the same call parking area The number of holding slots remains at 10 e If a parked call is not retrieved within Transfer Recall Timer period Transfer Recall starts to the operator or the extension that parked the call e If Call Park Recall is not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the parked call is retrieved Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call park call park retrieve 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 11 16 Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Park Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Description The Calling Party Control CPC Signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from the CO line when the telephone is hung up at the other end To support efficient utilization of CO lines the system monitors their state and when CPC Signal is detected from a line the system disconnects the line and informs the extension with reorder tone Conditions e CPC Signal Detection is enabled or disabled on incoming and outgoing outside calls by system programming e Generally CPC Signal Detection works on incoming outside calls and does not work on outgoing outside calls except once they are placed on 3 28 Features Available for KX
451. s out j Not Hit Check dialled number with LCR a carrier code table Not Hit LCR sequence Carrier forced sequence Obtains each carrier s charged fee by area Selects CO from LCR CO line group table code and current time CO indicator is on Compares each carrier s charged fee and Modifies number by using LCR selects least costly carrier carrier modification table Selects CO in the LCR CO line group table Sends out number to CO Y Modifies number by using LCR carrier e e System Cannot Poat DE A a code modification table in LCR leading digit table or the area code matches LCR exceptional code i i Sends out number to CO Selects CO from Automatic access CO line group table and sends out number to CO 3 86 Features 3 Features L Conditions e Toll Restriction check is done before LCR is applied e LCR works according to the selected dialling plan If the user dialled number is not found in the dialling plans the dialled number is sent out with Local Access Automatic line access Code This feature also applies to Call Forwarding to CO Line The same code with different digits may be assigned in program 7X0Y LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 or in program 7X20 LCR Exceptional Code Set In this case the code which has smaller digits takes the more expensive route is priority To prevent this enter X wild card after the code with the smaller digits Examples are shown below lt Ex
452. s the actual time 0 ms 1 Enter 211 Display CO Dial Start 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 000 msec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e You enter a number from 0 through 40 The actual time is a 100 times your input e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Line Access Direct Line Access Individual 4 80 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 212 Call Duration Count Start Time Description Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and this timer expires the system starts counting the call A display telephone shows the elapsed time of the call The starting time and the duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record Selection Time seconds 0 through 60 Default Os Programming 1 Enter 212 Display SMDR Durat Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 0 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e The timer starts counting after all the digits are dialled This timer is not applied to incoming calls The timer for incoming calls starts immediately e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature Reference
453. sable is displayed and go to step 9 If SELECT is pressed the display shows the previous entry If the previous setting was Disable press SELECT to enter the starting time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 5 Press gt 6 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new minutes 7 Press gt 4 40 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 102 Day Night Service Starting Time contd 8 Press SELECT for AM or PM 9 Press STORE 10 To program another day night mode or day of the week press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the day of the week selection number 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 12 Press END Conditions e To select the desired day you may keep pressing NEXT at step 3 To assign every day of the week to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday e If day night switching is unwanted select Disable at step 4 e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Night Service System Programming 4 4 103 4 3 System Programming Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the sequence in which CO line groups will be accessed when in Automatic Line Access mode When a user dials the feature number for automatic line access default 9 or p
454. sdoceosassqeds Sevencgedonaes 4 44 107 System PASS WOE ieii snenie lies s retn e anon aie 4 45 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button ssssssesseeseseeesseressssseessee 4 46 109 Expansion Card Unit Type sseseseeesseeessessesssesesseessseessresseessee 4 47 110 Network Type Assignment eeseseeeeseseseeeeesrreresrersrrsreseresreseese 4 49 0 111 DDI Removed Digit Added Number Assignment 4 49 1 112 Floating DDI Number Assignment cee eeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeneees 4 50 113 VM Status DTME Set ccccccccscecececeesesssseceeeeeeseeseeresaees 4 51 114 VM Command DTMF Set 00 0 ccceececccccccceesesssseceeeceeeesenseaees 4 53 EEE ACAUISE Timeen n a E E prema anes 4 55 116 ROM Version Display 6 5 2 cca yecayeseveiy cos echaetian vases qotesteease tease 4 56 117 Charge Display Selection iscctieccets fos peeetet ute tie aeghe ions 4 57 118 Charge Fee Reference Extension Assignment cseeee 4 58 119 Charge Fee Reference ID Code Sets cicciaciigatisneae atest 4 59 120 User Pass Wordi meai a a a a a i a 4 60 121 Pulse Dial Reception Assignment seseeeeeeesereesreererersesee 4 61 122 Automatic Door Open Assignment ssssseseeeeesseeesseessresseessee 4 62 123 Hotel Application eeesesseeeeseeeseseessersseseesseessrsrrssresseserssressesere 4 63 125 Assignment of Denomination sssessseesseessessseeesseessseessresseessee 4 64 126 Voice Mail Number Assignme
455. se dialling Pulse signals are transmitted to the CO line Call Blocking Mode Set this mode on CO lines that can receive both tone and pulse but under contract with the Central Office for pulse dialling only When dialling to the line using an MF4 telephone only pulse signals are sent to the Central Office e It is possible for the extension user to temporarily convert the pre assigned pulse dialling mode to DTMF mode Pulse to Tone Conversion DTMF mode cannot be changed to pulse In case a CO line can receive both DTMF and pulse signals and is contracted for DTMF with a Central Office DTMF mode should be selected for the line If it is contracted for pulse dialling mode Call Blocking mode should be selected for the line If a line is assigned Pulse Dial mode select an appropriate pulse speed pulse break ratio and inter digit pause for the line if needed Ifa line is assigned DTMF select an appropriate DTMF duration for the line if needed After a held call is retrieved the dial mode goes back to the one originally programmed on the CO line Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection 403 Pulse Speed Selection 404 DTMF Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 17 21 49 Section 3 Features End to End DTMF Signaling Pulse to Tone Conversion Tone Through Operation References Not applicable Features 3 47 D 3 Features Direct Dia
456. seescesceseseseeseenes input An ON condition of the CS CTS circuit indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from the unit The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when the CS CTS circuit is OFF Data Set Ready DR DSR cecccceececsseeeesteeeesnees input An ON condition of the DR DSR circuit indicates that the printer is ready An ON condition does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer Signal Ground SG Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals Data Terminal Ready ER DTR ce eeereees output This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that it is online The ON condition does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer The signal line is switched OFF when the unit is offline Data Carrier Detect CD DCD cece input The ON condition is an indication to data terminal DTE that the catrier signal is being received Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 801 SMDR Format 802 System Data Printout 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 2 24 Installation 2 4 2 4 1 Optional Cards and Units Installatio
457. ses substitute X carrier number 1 8 Y table number 1 8 3 Features 4 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment Program 103 Usually this table is used for automatic line access in non LCR mode In LCR mode if the system cannot find out the dialled number in Carrier Access Tables or LCR Routing Plan Tables or if the system finds out the same number as the user dialled number in Emergency Dial Number Set table or LCR Exceptional Code Set table this table is used to select a CO Automatic access CO line group table Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CO line group 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Carrier Access Tables 1 LCR Carrier Code Program 7X21 This is used to store each carrier s access code Example Mercury Communications Line MCL 131 If the system finds out the same number as the user dialled number in this table the call is sent to the carrier s line selected from the LCR CO Line Group Assignment table Program 7X23 2 LCR CO Line Group Assignment Program 7X23 This program is used to assign CO lines available to access each carrier LCR Routing Plan Tables 1 LCR Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 8 Program 7X0Y The user dialled area code is compared with this table If the system finds out the same number in the table a corresponding LCR Time and Fee Set table Program 7X1 Y is applied to the call 2 LCR Time and Fee Set Program 7X1Y This table is used
458. sper OHCA System Programming 4 125 2 600 4 8 Extension Programming EXtra Device Port Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References EXtra Device Port XDP allows a single line telephone SLT to be connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone DPT This program assigns which jacks are XDP The SLT and DPT of the programmed jack work as independent extensions e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 x all jacks KX TD1232 01 through 64 all jacks e Disable Enable All jacks Disable 1 Enter 600 Display XDP Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Immediately after changing your assignment changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP 4 126 System Programming 4
459. ss takes place Feature References Section 3 Features Pickup Dialling 4 74 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an outside party If an outside call is originated or answered by a programmed extension user and the timer expires the call is disconnected Time minutes 1 through 64 10 min 1 Enter 205 Display CO Dur Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e This time out applies to extensions to which Limited Call Duration is assigned by program 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit e This time cannot be set to zero or be left empty Section 3 Features Limited Call Duration System Programming 4 75 207 4 4 Timer Programming First Digit Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of outside dial tone and the first digit dialled on an outgoing outside call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF receiver is released Time seconds 5 through 120 10s 1 Enter 207 Display lst Digit Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10
460. sseees Call Wating poas sc ated e e AE ius odned Sarasa AR EE E gaye Charge Fee Referee en E sais Sia cae I Class of Service COS isssiinont ctl ea nts bh O A CO Incoming Call Information Display 0 0 0 0 ceecceeseceesseeeeeteeeeneees CO Incoming Call Information Log occ ee eeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeneeeaeenes CO Line Connection AssignMent cc ceeeesseeesceeseceseceeeeesneecsaeenes CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing eee eeeeeeeeeseeees CO Line Group isien nini E E R E N A En Confer nC csn oerion n na a A aiid A OAA i Confirmation TONS eener a esti REEE EER SE Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR ccceeeeeeees Consultation Hold zsri sessies anaa aaa a TEE Data Line Sec rit Yoro aqeasedacdonesnceasendseaeatnenseeyatos gustucedasdeeuseaesebacated Delayed Ringing Ringing Delayed ee eeeeeeneeenneeeeeetees Dial Tone Distinctive ccc ccccccccececececececececececececeeuseceseseseeeeaeess Dial Type Selection ainni h ale ait eek weld hee legis Direct Dialling In DDD scenic oie Beale ahi BAe a ade Direct In Lines DIL eei a aa ERS a AAEE Direct Station Selection DSS Button Button Direct Station Selection DSS sssnnsesssense0000s000 Directed Call Pickup Call Pickup Directed 0 eee eeeeeeeeteeees Display Call Information 2 3 4 22 5 4 oven Stace Display Extension Programmed Data eeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeneeeteeeeees Display Self Extension Number s 2 260 00 acc
461. stallation Instructions When installing telephone wiring basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm 2 3 4 Installation Precautions This set is exclusively made for wall mounting only Avoid installing in the following places Doing so may result in malfunction noise or discoloration Wiring Precautions 1 2 3 Dusty places or places where water or oil may come into Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines In direct sunlight and hot cold or humid places Temperature range 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs etc may damage the equipment or contacts Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong contact with the unit Near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders On or near computers telexes or other office equipment as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners It is preferable not to install in the same room with the above equipment Install at least 1 8 m from r
462. stalled per system A PT can be paired with up to four DSS Consoles The paired telephone user can carry out the following operations using the DSS Console e Direct access to an extension Direct Station Selection e Quick access to an outside party One Touch Dialling e Easy transfer of an outside call to an extension The programmable One Touch Transfer feature provides simplified operation e Quick access to a system feature The above functions are activated simply by pressing buttons on the console which were pre programmed as function buttons DSS Consoles are provided with the following buttons listed below KX T DSS Consoles Buttons 7040 7240 7440 7441 DSS Y 32 32 64 o 48 PF Programmable Feature Y 16 Y 16 ANSWER Y RELEASE Y V The button is provided on the designated telephones x Shows the number of buttons only if multiple buttons are provided The functions of the listed buttons are described below DSS Direct Station Selection buttons Used to access extensions Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension Pressing a button allows the user to call the corresponding extension Every button is provided with an indicator Busy Lamp Field which shows the current state of the corresponding extension as shown in the Table below Light State of extension Off Idle On Busy DND Busy Lamp Field Table 3 58 Features 3 Fea
463. stem The programmable items are manager programs 000 through 016 Entering the user programming mode Note You can access these programs by entering the User Programming Mode as follows Before entering the mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook e No calls are on hold at your telephone Press PROGRAM or PAUSE and enter the User Password default 1234 After entering the mode perform the same programming steps as the system programming steps in each program address e If your telephone set does not have a PROGRAM button substitute it with the PAUSE button If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM or PAUSE button is pressed it is cancelled e The User Password is not shown on the display The password can be changed by system programming Refer to Section 4 3 120 User Password e During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension e Only one proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 4 12 System Programming 4 1 5 Example of Programming The following programming instructions assume that you have already entered the programming mode and that you will employ method 2 on page 4 8 Example Program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set Sample of Description Explanation 001 4 2 Manager Programming System Speed Dialing Number Set Description Selection Def
464. stem Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Parallel telephone mode Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Parallelled Telephone Connection Pause Insertion Automatic Description Conditions This function is used to insert a pre assigned pause between the CO line access number the host PBX or carrier access code and the successively dialled digits e This feature requires previous programming of CO line access number and host PBX access codes as well as assignment of the pause duration e This feature works for Speed Dialling One Touch Dialling Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Pickup Dialling Call Forwarding to CO Line as well as for ordinary calls e Pressing the PAUSE button in dialling number inserts a pause for a pre assigned time Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic line access LCR CO line group line access 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time Section 3 Features Host PBX Access Toll Restriction Operation References Not applicable 3 112 0 Features 3 Features P Phantom Extension Description Conditions Allows the system to route the calls to a phantom extension A call to a phantom extension arrives at an extension who has the corresponding Phantom Extension button A Phantom Extension button can be assigned by Station Programming e Types
465. step 4 When printing is completed the display shows Display Print Out Finish 4 Press STORE Display Print Out Stop 5 Press END Conditions e It is necessary to connect a printer to the EIA RS 232C port provided on the system e You may stop printing by pressing the END button while records are being printed out e You cannot restart the printout while records are being output Feature References Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 159 803 4 10 Resource Programming Music Source Use Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and Background Music BGM Hold BGM e Music source number KX TD816 1 or 2 No Use KX TD1232 1 through 4 No Use Hold and BGM Music 1 1 Enter 803 Display Music Source Use 2 Press NEXT to program Music on Hold Display example Hold Musicl 3 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program BGM Display example BGM Musicl 6 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number Press STORE Press END e The music source is a user supplied item Two music sources can be installed per
466. system For KX TD1232 music sources 1 and 2 are connected to the Master System 3 and 4 are to the Slave if available Any music source can be used by either system e The system is provided with an internal music source By default setting external music source is used as Music Source 1 Program 990 System Additional Information Field 20 is used to select internal music source for Music Source 1 e To disable music press CLEAR at steps 3 and 6 e Program 804 External Pager BGM is used to enable disable BGM for each external pager Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Music on Hold Background Music BGM External 4 160 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 804 External Pager BGM Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to determine whether external pagers will receive Background Music BGM BGM External is turned on and off by the operator e External pager number KX TD816 1 or 2 KX TD1232 1 through 4 e Disable sends no BGM Enable sends BGM All external pagers Disable 1 Enter 804 Display Ext Pag BGM 2 Press NEXT Display Pager NO gt 3 Enter an external pager number To enter pager number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Pagerl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another pager press NEXT or P
467. t 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e To assign all jack numbers to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference 4 58 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 119 Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the identification code ID code required to verify charges ID Code 4 digits 0000 through 9999 1234 1 Enter 119 Display Charge ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display example Code 1234 3 Enter an ID code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new code 4 Press STORE 5 Press END None Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference System Programming 4 59 120 4 3 System Programming User Password Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference
468. t eee eeeeeeesteeeenteeees 2 38 2 4 5 Extension Connection Optional Unit 2 38 2 4 6 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD280 ee eeeeeeeteeeeneees 2 39 2 4 7 Remote Card Installationins sccccscccscstecsssseceassecdevacsdcaracosscacosesecess 2 42 2 4 8 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection e eee eeseeeeeeeeeee 2 43 Available for KX TD1232 only Installation Manual Contents 249 System Connection escsciccesiacced ced onsbscgdes desinas ateedsh ae waleacttedsntess 2 48 2 4 10 Battery Adaptor Connection xscccs actceicceseectaasssecertenccteneeeqeeee 2 50 2 5 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer csse0e 2 52 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time ssssssesssecssocesooessoessoesssose 2 54 2 7 Systemi Restart i caede cenxcacaasscaessaembisnansiientaernnstrarnnsacennentennieae 2 56 2 9 Syst m Data Clear is ccscssssessisesiacseescevcscesinencstousssscvizacscesavensstocsasescssses 2 57 Section 3 Features A Absent Message Capability assis and ventilatvasvuncciisandeennanncdinctitadvincwnaaiavee 3 2 Account Code EMY essre aeia a naie iaa E di EEEE 3 2 Alert Indicat Oisssisessenaiseensseans ynierii d a a 3 4 Alternate Calling Ring VOoiCe sesesseeeseesesressirsresressrssresrersereresres 3 5 Answering Direct CO LAN sas ceecaciece sey danstedencersseedsuatedaneatavvntonendedulens 3 5 Automatic Callback Busy Camp On cssccteccisteceucsintiesseitidentalervarnies 3 6
469. t Disable To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through C024 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e You may disable CPC Signal Detection for a CO line e Program 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set is used to program CPC Signal Detection for outgoing outside calls Section 3 Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection System Programming 4 93 405 4 6 COLine Programming CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set contd CPC Signal Detection Time Table Entry Time ms Entry Time ms Entry Time ms 02 16 27 216 52 416 03 24 28 224 53 424 04 32 29 232 54 432 05 40 30 240 55 440 06 48 31 248 56 448 07 56 32 256 57 456 08 64 33 264 58 464 09 72 34 272 59 472 10 80 35 280 60 480 11 88 36 288 61 488 12 96 37 296 62 496 13 104 38 304 63 504 14 112 39 312 64 512 15 120 40 320 65 520 16 128 41 328 66 528 17 136 42 336 67 536 18 144 43 344 68 544 19 152 44 352 69 552 20 160 45 360 70 560 21 168 46 368 71 568 22 176 47 376 12 576 23
470. t any time and allows the user to have access to the desired features e The available features are Absent Message Capability Call Park Call Pickup Group Message Waiting Paging access answer Parallelled Telephone e In addition to the features above the operator can have the display of the following features Background Music BGM External Class of Service primary secondary Night Service pre assigned extension also Programming References No programming required 3 126 0 Features 3 Features S Feature References Operation References User Manual None Special Display Features System Feature Access Menu System Speed Dialling Description Conditions A list of the names stored for System Speed Dialling is displayed This allows the user to dial by name without having to know the telephone number All the user needs to do is press the button associated with the desired name e The numbers and names for System Speed Dialling must be programmed e If a name is not stored for a number it is not displayed and cannot be called with this feature Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialling Number Set 002 System Speed Dialling Name Set Section 3 Features System Speed Dialling Special Display Features System Speed Dialling Features 3 126 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s
471. t immediate ringing 2RNG 2 ring delay 4RNG 4 ring delay 6RNG 6 ring delay 8RNG 8 ring delay No RNG no ring All jacks 1 2 all CO lines Immediate ringing Day Night 1 Enter a program address 603 for day or 604 for night Display example DIL 1 N Asn Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 CO01 Immdt 4 Enter the CO line number You can also keep pressing gt or lt until the desired CO line number is displayed 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number System Programming 4 129 603 604 4 8 Extension Programming DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night conta Conditions Feature References 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END e An extension can be assigned as the destination of as many CO lines as is required In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selecti
472. t 1 Port 2 1 Enter a program address 806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2 Display example RS232C Paramet 1 2 Press NEXT to program new line code Display example NL Code CR LF 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program baud rate Display example Baud Rate 9600 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed System Programming 4 163 806 807 4 10 Resource Programming EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 conta 7 Press STORE 8 Press NEXT to program word length Display example Word Lengt 8bits 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT to program parity bit Display example Parity Mark 12 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 13 Press STORE 14 Press NEXT to program stop bit Display example Stop Bit l1bit 15 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 16 Press STORE 17 Press END Conditions e The following combinations are invalid Parity Word Length Stop Bit Mark 8 2 Space 8 1 Space 8 2 e The program address of the out of service system port is unacceptable Feature References Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 4 164 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 813 Floating Number Assignment Description Assigns the floating numbers for
473. t Stored 014 Budget Management on ISDN Port All Ports 0 015 Charge Rate Fractional Point 2 Assignment 016 Charge Rate Assignment 0 01 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering See page 4 37 and 4 38 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Manual 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Every Day of the Week Day 9 00 am Night 5 00 pm 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group 12345678 Assignment 5 4 List 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 104 Quick Dial Assignment Not Stored 105 Account Codes Not Stored 106 Station Hunting Type All Hunting Groups Disable 107 System Password 1234 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Enable 109 Expansion Card Unit Type e KX TD816 C C E e KX TD1232 Master and Slave C C E1 E2 110 Network type Assignment BT 111 DDI Removed Digit Added All CO Lines Removed Digit 01 Added Number Assignment Number Not Stored 112 Floating DDI Number Assignment Not Stored 113 VM Status DTMF Set RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 114 VM Command DTMF Set LV MSG H GETMSG x H AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 115 Adjust Time 1 00 am 116 ROM Version Display Not Applicable 117 Charge Display Selection Pound 118 Charge Fee Reference Extension All Jacks Enable Assignment 119 Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set 1234
474. t and wake up call setting Uniform Call Distribution UCD Allows an incoming calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific group of extensions System Outline 1 3 1 2 Basic System Construction The KX TD816 Digital Super Hybrid System has a basic capacity of 8 extensions and KX TD1232 has 16 extensions It is capable of supporting Panasonic digital and analogue proprietary telephones DSS Consoles and single line devices such as single line telephones facsimiles To expand its capabilities the system can be equipped with optional components or customer supplied peripherals such as external speakers and external music sources e g radios 1 4 System Outline 1 3 Note Proprietary Telephones The following Panasonic proprietary telephones are available with this system Proprietary Telephone KX T7420 KX T7425 KX T7431 KX T7433 KX T7436 KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 KX T7130 KX T7020 KX T7050 Description Digital speakerphone 12 Flexible CO Digital speakerphone 24 Flexible CO Digital 1 line display speakerphone 12 Flexible CO Digital 3 line display speakerphone 24 Flexible CO Digital 6 line display speakerphone 24 Flexible CO Digital speakerphone 24 Flexible CO Digital 2 line display speakerphone 24 Flexible CO Digital 6 line display speakerphone 12 Fle
475. t depends on the telephone type used by the called party whether Call Waiting OHCA or Whisper OHCA is activated by the operation If the called telephone is one of the following OHCA becomes active KX T7130 KX T7235 KX T7436 e Class of Service programming determines which extensions can perform this feature e If none of three features Call Waiting OHCA or Whisper OHCA is set at the called party the caller will hear a reorder tone Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Off Hook Monitor Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call waiting OHCA whisper OHCA 519 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Section 3 Features Busy Station Signaling BSS Whisper OHCA Call Waiting DPT Features Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Allows the KX T7431 KX T7433 and KX T7436 digital proprietary telephone users to let the other users listen to the conversation through the built in speaker while continuing the same call using the handset This is effective with a handset conversation Programming References Section 4 System Programming 148 Off Hook Monitor 3 104 2 Features 3 Features O Feature References None Operation References DPT Features User Manual Off Hook Monitor One Touch Dialling Description One Touch Dialling offers the proprietary telephone PT user one touch access to a desired party or system featur
476. t disturb Message waiting 113 VM Status DTMF Set 114 VM Command DTMF Set 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 609 Voice Mail Access Codes 990 System Additional Information Fields 6 through 9 18 Station Programming cccccceeceseeeseeeneeeteeeteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment MESSAGE Button Voice Mail VM Transfer Button Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Select Voice Mail Hunting 990 System Additional Information Fields 10 29 30 Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Select Automated Attendant Hunting 990 System Additional Information Field 24 Section 3 Features Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy Intercept Routing Call Forwarding Busy No Station Hunting Answer DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Voice Mail Integration Voice Mail Transfer Features 3 157 V 3 Features Voice Mail Integration for Digital Proprietary Telephones Description Conditions The Digital Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System can be connected to the Digital Super Hybrid System DSHS in a tightly integrated fashion The system sends the VPS data which contains the extension number configuration informati
477. ted by selecting it on the display For details refer to the Key Operation in the User Manual The FWD DND button can be assigned on a flexible button However the LED of the flexible button does not work Door Opener Doorphone Call Program 663 664 PS Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night is required for assigning each PS to receive a doorphone call or to open the door DSS Console KX T7240 KX T7040 The DSS Console cannot work with a PS Extension Connection Assignment Program 667 PS Extension Connection Assignment is used to assign whether the PS user can perform all accesses or not 8 30 DECT Portable Station Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features TITLE PS CONDITION Extension Group e The PS extension group can be used with the Group Call Pickup e The PS extension group can be assigned in program 658 PS Extension Group Assignment Flexible Numbering e In addition to current flexible numbering the feature number for the Super EXtra Device Port SXDP can be assigned For details refer to the program 100 Flexible Numbering Handset Headset To use a headset with your PS just connect the user supplied headset Selection to the PS Moreover it is possible to answer calls without lifting up the PS or pressing any key In this case PS Programming Setting the Handsfree Answer Mode is required to select the answering mode Ha
478. ted to the desired feature Examples of this special function are shown below Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb CO Outgoing Call Log Extension Dialling Hotel Application operator only See the HOTEL APPLICATION Station Speed Dialling System Feature Access Menu System Speed Dialling Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Description Conditions Allows the KX T7235 and KX T7436 users to set or cancel the Call Forwarding and Do Not Disturb DND features using the display messages after pressing the FWD DND button None Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb DND Special Display Features Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb 3 124 Features 3 Features S CO Outgoing Call Log Description Conditions Provides a KX T7235 and KX T7436 display of the last dialled telephone numbers and allows the user to perform redialling the number by pressing the associated button The oldest telephone number will be eliminated when over the limited numbers are dialled out Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Extension Dialling Description Conditions No programming required None Special Display Features CO Outgoing Call Log Provides a display of extension names and numbers The user can call an extension by pressing the associate
479. tem Programming 4 67 Proprietary Telephone capable Panasonic Voice Processing System one that supports digital proprietary telephone integration e g KX TVP100 128 4 3 System Programming Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment t Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns each voice mail number to a voice mail extension group number e Voice mail number VM KX TD816 01 through 12 KX TD1232 01 through 24 all voice mail numbers e Voice mail extension group number VMG 1 through 8 All voice mail numbers VMG 1 Enter 128 Display VM EXT Group Asn Press NEXT Display VM NO gt Enter a voice mail number To enter voice mail number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example VM 01 02 1 VMG1 Enter the voice mail extension group number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new number Press STORE To program another voice mail number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired voice mail number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END For the KX TD1232 VM 01 through VM 12 are for the Master system and VM 13 through VM 24 are for the Slave system if available The display shows VM XX Y Y 1 EXG Z in step 3 XX means a voice mail number YY means the jack number of the voice mail port programmed in 126 Voice Mail Number Assignment 1 of YY 1 m
480. tem and extension A telephone with an A A1 relay is connected Bad extension Take that extension and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord If the telephone does not work connection between the system and the extension must be repaired Use a 2 wires cord Set the A Al relay switch of the telephone to OUT or OFF position Take that extension and plug it into another extension port that is working If the telephone does not work replace the phone Improper reset operation Press the Reset Button Noise in external paging Induced noise on the wire between the system and the amplifier Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the system and amplifier A short shielded cable is recommended Volume distortion from external music source Excessive input level from external music source Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source Speed Dialling or One Touch Dialling does not function Bad programming Enter the CO line access number 9 81 through 88 into program ming 6 2 Troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting 6 1 2 Connection Connection between the DSHS and a proprietary telephone T dial No CAUSE SOLUTION Sm eae r gt The A B is connected to the H L Use the correct cord inner 2 i wires are for A B and the H pie eno H ou
481. ter 2 wires are for H L A r A B ae clap B L r e L DSHS extension The P1 P2 is connected to the L H Use the correct cord 2 wires r second from the outside for H e A H L and the outer 2 wires are Ao eA for P1 P2 Be eB Le L per eP DSHS extension Connection between the DSHS and a single line telephone Yes CAUSE SOLUTION The A B is connected to the H L Use the correct cord inner 2 wires are for A B He _ i ea a If a PA s Be eB with an A A1 relay is Le e connected to the DSHS set the A A1 relay switch of DSHS sensi the telephone to OFF Continued to the following page Available for KX TD1232 only Troubleshooting 6 3 6 1 Troubleshooting Connection between the central office and the DSHS Continued from the previous page Can you dial No outonaCOo m line CAUSE CO lines are connected to the A A SOLUTION Reconnect the CO lines to the paired A B of the telephone jack using 2 conductor wiring CO line CO lines are connected to the A B that is not in a pair eo CO line DSHS 6 1 3 Operation PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION e When using the speaker The HANDSET e When the headset is not used set phone mode with a HEADSET selector of the HANDSET HEA
482. th a proprietary telephone press any button Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Timed reminder None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Timed Reminder Features 3 141 T Toll Restriction Description 3 Features Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature that in conjunction with the assigned Class of Service can prohibit certain extension users from placing unauthorized toll calls Every extension is programmed to belong to one of eight Classes of Service Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll restriction level for day mode and night mode There are eight toll restriction levels available Toll restriction level 1 is the highest level and the level 8 is the lowest That is level 1 allows all toll calls and levels 7 and 8 disallows all toll calls Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining pre programmed deny and excepted code tables Denied Code Tables An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a toll restriction level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the selected Denied Code Tables If the leading six digits of the dialled number not including the line access code are not found in the table the call is made There are five system programs for Denied Code Tables 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 each program is used to
483. that they can act as completely different extensions e XDP requires previous programming of the individual jack Enable XDP mode for the desired jack by system programming Immediately after changing the assignment changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds e If an analogue proprietary telephone APT and SLT are connected to an XDP enabled jack neither telephones work Features 3 63 F 3 Features If XDP is disabled for the jack DPT and SLT may be used as Parallelled Telephones APT and SLT also can be used as Parallelled Telephones Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 4 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 600 EXtra Device Port Feature References Section 3 Features Parallelled Telephone Operation References Not applicable Flexible Numbering Description The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the number used for extension numbers are not fixed They can be set as required provided there are not any conflicts Feature numbers can be from one to three digits utilizing numbers 0 through 9 as well as and 4 Extension numbers can be two to four digits in length Any number can be set as the leading first or second digit If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have 2 digit numbers and some have 3 digit numbers If two digits are assigned as the
484. the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of eighty quick dial numbers A maximum of four digits consisting of 0 through 9 can be assigned to a quick number Section 3 Features Quick Dialling System Programming 4 42 1 Page left blank for future upgrade s 4 3 System Programming 105 Account Codes Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the account codes for Account Code Entry Verified All Calls and Verified Toll Restriction Override modes If Verified All Calls is assigned in program 508 Account Code Entry Mode an account code is required to make an outside call If Verified Toll Restriction Override is assigned an account code is only required for a toll call and overrides toll restriction e Location number 01 through 40 e Account code 5 digits max All locations Not stored 1 Enter 105 Display Account Code 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter an account code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new account code 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press
485. the user to make an outside call using the same line at the station This is also allowed for those extensions that have Account Code Verified All Calls mode assigned if 0 disconnection signal is selected in field 3 above System Programming 4 171 990 4 11 System Additional Information contd Option Programming Area Field Description Selection Default References 2 16 Allows you to remove Confirmation Tone 0 disable 1 Confirmation 3 This tone is sent when a conversation is 1 enable Tone established just after dialling the feature numbers for accessing the following features Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve 17 A CO line set to pulse or call blocking 0 60 1 Dial Type mode in program 402 Dial Mode 1 67 Selection Selection can have two settings This assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing Select an appropriate ratio depending on the standard in your country 18 Assigns if an extension s mailbox number 0 extension 0 Voice Mail is substituted by the extension number or it number Integration is programmable free If a call is 1 free forwarded or rerouted to the VPS this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user s mailbox To make it programmable select 1 free then assign the number in prog
486. ting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination e An ISDN extension can be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding Do not disturb Station Programming 0 cccccceccceseeeeeeeeeeseeneenaeens User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button None Features 3 19 C 3 Features Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Description Conditions A call directed to your extension is forwarded to another extension if your telephone is busy e Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are Outside calls DDI DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the fo
487. tion 3 Features Busy Station Signalling BSS DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Waiting 3 34 Features 3 Features C Charge Fee Reference Description Conditions Allows pre assigned display telephone users to see charges and print out the charges Charges are displayed per extension CO line Account Code or the total of each can be referred to There are two display formats Pulse or Pound e System programming determines the extensions that can see charges e An identification code ID code set by system programming is required to see charges e The first display format Pulse or Pound is selected by system programming This can be switched manually at each extension e Exchange rate between pulse counter and pounds is changeable by station programming e The displayed currency denomination can be programmed by system programming Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 015 Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment 016 Charge Rate Assignment 117 Charge Display Selection 118 Charge Fee Reference Extension Assignment 119 Charge Fee Reference ID Code Set 125 Assignment of Denomination Station Programming 0ccccecceccceecceteeeneeeneeeteeeeeees User Manual Charge Fee Reference None Station Programming Charge Fee Reference Features 3 35 C 3 Features Class of Servic
488. tion 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type 131 Hunting Group Assignment 813 Floating Number Assignment 3 104 0 Features 3 Features N Feature References Section 3 Features Floating Extension Station Hunting Operation References Not applicable Notebook Function Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to store the phone number in the memory during conversation on the phone or on hook status The stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation Conditions e The outside line which was connected when the user stored the number is selected when re dialling the number If the line is busy the busy tone is sent e The pause if programmed can be inserted between the CO line access number and the following phone number Automatic Pause Insertion Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References DPT Features User Manual Notebook Function Features 3 104 1 O 3 Features Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Description Conditions OHCA allows you to inform a busy extension that another call is waiting by talking through the built in speaker of the called party s proprietary telephone If the existing call is using the handset the second conversation is made with the speakerphone so that the called party can talk to two parties independently OHCA is performed the same way as Busy Station Signalling BSS or Whisper OHCA I
489. tion of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Two doorphones can be installed in each system In the case of KX TD1232 doorphones 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e You can enter up to two for KX TD816 or four for KX TD1232 doorphone numbers for each extension Section 3 Features Door Opener Night Service Doorphone Call 4 134 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 609 Voice Mail Access Codes Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns a mailbox number for each extension only if program 990 System Additional Information Field 18 is set to free e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Mailbox number 16 digits max All jacks Not stored 1 Enter 609 Display Mailbox ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a mailbox number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program anoth
490. title Provides a more detailed description of the program Shows you choices that you can assign Shows you the default factory setting Shows you programming procedures step by step e While programming use the overlay e Before starting to program enter the programming mode See Entering the programming mode on page 4 6 Enter the program address The display shows the program title If your telephone has soft buttons the lower line shows the functions that are currently assigned to them or the NEXT shown on the overlay number the number is displayed Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits The indicator lights red and a confirmation tone lets you know that storage is complete dial number Pressing the NEXT PREV allows you to select the next higher lower speed dial number You can also keep pressing them until the desired one is displayed If you press SELECT System Programming 4 13 4 1 5 Example of Programming Sample of Description Explanation 4 2 Manager Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set contd Conditions There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 and keys RECALL or FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons Feature References Section 3 Features Special Display Features System Speed Dialling System Speed Dialing
491. to be a One Touch Dialling FWD DND SAVE Account CONF Conference or Voice Mail Transfer button as desired PROGRAM Used to enter exit the Programming mode With the KX T7220 and KX T7250 it can also be used as the PAUSE button RECALL Allows you to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up Recall Sends a Register Recall signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access their features External Feature Access REDIAL Used for Last Number or Automatic Redial SAVE Used to store a dialled telephone number for Saved Number Redial SELECT Used to select the displayed function or to call for the displayed phone number 3 18 0 Features 3 Features C Conditions SHIFT Used to access the second level of Soft button function Soft Pressing a Soft button performs the function operation appearing on the bottom line of the display SP PHONE Speakerphone Used for handsfree operation Pressing the button causes the telephone to switch between handset and handsfree operation TRANSFER Transfers a call to another extension or external destination VOLUME Used to adjust the ringer speaker handset and headset volume and the display contrast e Certain buttons are equipped with light indicators LED s to show line or feature status e CO buttons can be classified according to the following three types Single CO S CO button Group CO G CO button Loop CO L CO butto
492. to register each carrier s fee in pounds per minute in each time zone The system compares the current time and each carrier s charge fee by this table in order to decide the least expensive carrier 3 80 Features 3 Features Example of programming tables Route Plan Table 1 Leading digit table 1 01 021 02 0333 03 0444 04 0555 05 0666 80 Route Plan Table 8 Leading digit table 8 01 061 02 091 03 0355 04 0577 05 0588 80 Time zone and fee table 1 Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 8 00AM 0 75 8 00AM 0 75 eco All day 0 50 9 00AM 1 00 9 00AM 1 00 ooo 1 00PM 0 75 1 00PM 0 75 eco 6 00PM 0 50 6 00PM 0 50 ooo Time zone and fee table 8 Monday Tuesday eee Sunday Start time Fee Start time Fee eee Start time Fee 8 00AM 3 50 8 00AM 3 50 eco All day 2 00 9 00AM 5 00 9 00AM 5 00 eee 1 00PM 3 50 1 00PM 3 50 eee 6 00PM 2 00 6 00PM 2 00 eee 3 LCR Carrier Modify Command Program 7X22 When the carrier is decided this table is used to modify the user dialled number as appropriate for the carrier This table has the following commands mm Pe vo A z Insert carrier code Send a pause Change to tone DTMF mode Insert an Authorization code Insert an Itemized code Home Position the origi
493. to the plug cord Connect the ground terminal to Ferrite Core To the Cell Station ground Roll the cord once around the Note If other expansion units are ferrite core and close the core installed the frame ground connec Note Put it in the cabinet when tion is required for only one unit closing the cabinet cover 8 12 DECT Portable Station Section 8 2 4 Installing the Unit 6 3 Insert the modular plug into the Cell Station and attach the ferrite core included to the plug cord Ferrite Core Roll the cord once around the ferrite core and close the core 6 4 Survey the site for the Cell Station by testing the radio signal Refer to Section 8 2 5 Site Survey Note e System Programming is required to assign an extension number to each portable station Programming References Section 8 4 DECT PS System Programming 650 PS Registration 653 PS Extension Name Set 671 PS Extension Number Set 672 PS Password Set 681 PS Radio System ID Set Feature References Section 8 3 DECT Portable Station Features Digital Wireless Connection DECT Portable Station Section 8 13 8 2 4 Installing the Unit 7 Wired Extension Connection A 2 RF Interface Unit with a 4 Station Line KX TD144 can support four wired extensions as well as wireless extensions Use 4 pin plugs to co
494. trieve intercom 990 System Additional Information Fields 16 44 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Hold Intercom Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Hold Retrieve Features 3 27 0 C 3 Features Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Description Allows the extension user to display the calling party s number on the LCD of the called party s telephone when making a call CLIP or allows the extension user to display the called party s number on the LCD of the calling party s telephone when answering a call COLP You can select the number sent to the other party from either of the following e DDI Subscriber number your extension number or transformed DDI number e Any number Subscriber number any number max 6 digits This feature is one of ISDN s services When DDI is selected the number added to a subscriber number can be selected from either of the extension number and the DDI transformed number by program 990 Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 419 Subscriber Number Assignment 516 Calling Line Identification Restriction 517 Connected Line Identification Restriction 623 CLIP COLP Number Assignment 624 CLIP COLP Number Assignment for ISDN Extension 990 System Additional Information Field 37 Feature References Section 3 Features CO Inco
495. try Mode 509 510 Toll Restriction Level for System Speed Dialling Day Night 511 Door Opener Access 513 Night Service Access 514 Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call 516 Calling Line Identification Restriction 517 Connected Line Identification Restriction 3 36 Features 3 Features Feature References Operation References User Manual 518 CFU CFB CFNR Assignment 519 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 601 Class of Service 613 ISDN Class of Service 991 COS Additional Information None Operator Service Features Class of Service COS Switch Co Incoming Call Information Display Description Provides the display proprietary telephone user with pre assigned information if an incoming outside call is received You can select one of the following by system programming e The caller s telephone number and name available for an ISDN line provided with the CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation feature The CO line number and CO line name this information is useful in the following case When several divisions or companies are connected to one system and they have their own CO lines a user can check the called party by the LCD before answering the call if each division s or company s name is assigned to a CO line e DDI number and Name of the called party available for incoming DDI calls only The initial display on the LCD of the called extensi
496. ts e Selection for field 2 0 disable 1 enable Default Field 1 All COS 0000 Field 2 All COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 991 Display COS Add Inf 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number Display example 1111111111110000 4 176 System Programming 4 11 Option Programming 99 COS Additional Information conta Conditions Feature References 9 10 None Keep pressing gt or lt to move the cursor to the desired field Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and the new selection To program another field repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE To program another COS press SELECT and the desired COS number Repeat steps 4 through 8 Press END Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Follow Me Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Class of Service COS System Programming 4 177 Section 5 List This section lists tone ring tone and default values of system programming Tone Ring Tone 5 1 Do Not Disturb DND Confirmation Tone 4 Tone lt TONE gt Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone List 5 2 Tone Ring Tone 5 1 lt TONE gt Call Waiting Tone 2 Intercom Hold Recall Outside Hold Recall Doorphone Calls Timed Reminder Callback Ringing Camp on Recall Cal
497. tton or press S CO button 44 Assigns if pressing the HOLD button twice 0 Hold Retrieve 1 e Call Hold acts as Exclusive Hold or Hold Retrieve 1 Exclusive Hold Exclusive e Call Hold Retrieve 45 Assigns whether the system displays the 0 display 1 None authorization code while programming in 1 do not display program 7X24 Authorization Code Set 46 Reserved 47 4 174 0 System Programming 4 11 Option Programming System Additional Information contd 990 Area Field Description Selection Default References 6 48 When an incoming call reaches the Hunting 0 receive 1 None group Circular UCD Ring and No Reply 1 not receive this program determines whether the extension which the Do Not Disturb feature is set receives the call or not 58 When an incoming call reaches the Hunting 0 receive 0 None group Circular UCD Ring and No Reply 1 not receive this program determines whether the extension which the Call Forwarding feature is set receives the call or not 59 Enables or disables the display of the 0 enable 1 HOTEL margin rate during an outside call 1 disable APPLICATION 60 Enables or disables the SMDR printout of 0 enable 1 HOTEL the margin rate 1 disable APPLICATION 61 Selects the extension whose itemized code 0 Operator 1 1 Doorphone Call is used for the Doorphone Call Forwarding 1 Jack 01 1 Forwarding to to
498. ture only when both outside lines are ISDN SO lines e The forwarding extension s Toll Restriction Least Cost Routing and Account Code Entry requirements still apply e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to perform the function e If an extension is limited by the program 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit according to its Class of Service the extension is unable to forward an outside call to a CO line e If a call between an extension and an outside party is established by this feature the duration of the call period can be restricted depending on the setting of a system timer Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line Station Programming ccccccccceeseceteceteceeeeeeeeenees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND
499. tures User Manual Busy Station Signalling BSS Features 3 11 B 3 Features Button Direct Station Selection DSS Description DSS button permits the proprietary telephone user one touch access to other extension users Conditions e A flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone can be assigned as a DSS button using either system or station programming e DSS buttons are provided on DSS Consoles with default setting Changing the setting is possible from the paired telephone using station programming e Once a button is assigned as a DSS button it provides Busy Lamp Field BLF status e The mode of a DSS button on a DSS Console proprietary telephone can be programmed to disconnect the CO line and calls the extension or hold and transfer the call to the extension One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Station Programming cccccceeceeeeeeeeneeeecneeeaeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Direct Station Selection DSS Button Feature References Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field One Touch Transfer by DSS DSS Console Button Operation References Basic Operation User Manual Making Calls DPT Features Call Transfer to Extension DSS Console Features Button Flexible Description The use of Flexible Buttons is determined by either system or station programmin
500. tures CO Line Group 4 88 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection Description Each CO line can be programmed for DTMF pulse rotary or call blocking This program assigns your choice for each line DTMF The dialling signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to tone signals and transmitted to the CO line Pulse The dialling signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to pulse signals and transmitted to the CO line Call blocking If your central office can receive both DTMF and pulse signals but you are contracted for pulse select this mode When dialling on the line with an MF4 telephone only the pulse signals are sent to the CO line Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e DTMF Pulse C Block call blocking Default All CO lines DTMF Programming 1 Enter 402 Display CO Dial Mode 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 DIMF 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO2
501. tures D Conditions Connection References To meet the user s various needs DSS buttons can be changed to the other function buttons PF Programmable Feature buttons printed as F1 through F16 These buttons are provided with no default setting The paired telephone user can program the buttons for the other function buttons ANSWER button Used to answer an incoming call to the paired telephone RELEASE button Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer e Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone using Station Programming or Programming with Personal Computer System Programming with a Proprietary Telephone is not available e If the extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another number the DSS button automatically follows the new number Re programming is not necessary e During System Connection DSS Consoles must be paired with telephones in the same system e If a port connected to a DSS Console is programmed for XDP jack a standard telephone can be connected to the port in parallel Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manua Section 4 System Programming 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment 600 Extra Device Port Station Programming 0 cccecceeceeceeeeteeeteeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible
502. tures are classified as follows Paging All Paging External Paging Group 3 108 Features 3 Features P Paging All Description Allows you to make a voice announcement from the speakers of the proprietary telephones and from the external paging devices external pagers If one of the paged persons answers your paging you can talk to the person through the connected line Conditions e If System Connection is established paging is performed to all proprietary telephones and all external paging devices in both systems e The confirmation tone is sent to extensions when the paging is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable e The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers before the voice announcement Eliminating the tone is programmable e The ringing or busy extension cannot receive a page Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 5 External Pager Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external Paging external answer TAFAS answer Paging group Paging group answer Paging deny 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Paging All Paging ANSWER Paging DENY Paging and Transfer Paging External Description Allows you to make a
503. ugh calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination e An ISDN extension can be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Station Programming 0cccccccceceeseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button 3 22 Features 3 Features C Feature References Operation References User Manual Call Forwarding Description Conditions None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Forwarding No Answer to CO Line Calls directed to your extension will be sent to an external destination The outside telephone number must be pre programmed e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are Outside calls DIL 1 1 DDI ISDN Service only Intercom calls Extension Transfer A call between two external parties can be established by this fea
504. umbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 To assign all jacks to one COS press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Section 3 Features Class of Service COS System Programming 4 127 602 4 8 Extension Programming Extension Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns each extension to an extension group Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup and Paging Group e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Extension group number 01 through 16 x all groups e Disable not belong Enable belong All jacks 1 2 Extension group 1 Enable 1 Enter 602 Display EXT Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering the jack number Display example 01 1 EG01 Enabl 4 Enter the extension group number You can also keep pressing m gt or lt m until the desired extension group number is displayed 5 Keep pressing SELECT until
505. unt Code Entry Mode 990 System Additional Information Fields 3 15 eS ee Features 3 3 A Feature References Operation References User Manual Alert Indication Description Conditions 3 Features Station Programming cccccceecceseeceeeteeeeenteeeseees User Manual Charge Fee Reference Flexible Button Assignment Account Button Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Account Code Entry If the following situations occur the pre warning indication is displayed on the proprietary telephone of Operator 1 in Day mode Memory When the system finds the wrong system data the indication System Data Err 1 is displayed Printer When the paper of the printer for SMDR runs out or the printer is out of service the indication Check Printer is displayed Check the printer Connection When a system inter connection error occurs and system connection operation is interrupted the indication System Link Down is displayed Connect the interface between the systems and press the Reset Button on both systems None Programming Reference Feature Reference Operation References User Manual No Programming required None Operator Service Features Alert Indication 3 4 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features A Alternate Calling Ring Voice D
506. utomated Attendant AA Ring and No Reply Circular hunting The extensions are hunted until an idle one is found regardless of the jack number UCD Refer to Uniform Call Distribution UCD in this section AA hunting All of the AA ports are hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service VM hunting All of the VM ports are hunted until an idle one is found to permit VM Service Ring All of the extensions in the group ring simultaneously No Reply hunting The extensions are hunted in the order of registration at a programmed Call Forwarding No Answer time If the called extension is busy the call hunts the following extensions One hunting type is selected for each hunting group The hunting order corresponds to the order of registration in program 131 For VM AA Hunting an incoming call to any extension number which belongs to a hunting group is hunted as well Hunting Type Circular VM UCD Ring No Incoming Call Arrives at an Reply Floating Extension v y y y y Extension which belongs to a J hunting group A call is hunted e Even if the called extension has set Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding they are disregarded and the call reaches to the extension Programming References Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type 131 Hunting Group Assignment 3 128 0 Features 3 Features S 132 Hunting Group Name Assignment 133
507. utside call is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Programming References Section 4 System Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 2 5 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Splitting Call Transfer Unscreened Call Transfer Screened to Conference CO Line Music on Hold Call Transfer Screened to Extension Operation References Not applicable 3 44 Features 3 Features D Data Line Security Description Data Line Security is a function that can be set by system programming Once set communication between the extension and the other end is protected from signal intrusions such as Call Waiting and Hold Recall Data equipment or a facsimile may be connected to an extension jack so that the user can perform data communications During the communication Data Line Security maintains secure data transmission against tones or barging in from other extensions Conditions e If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security it applies to the both extensions e The Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA feature is not available for incoming calls to the extensions to which the Data Line Security feature is assigned Programming References Section 4 System Programming 612 Data Line Security Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Dial Tone Distinctive Description Four types of d
508. utton Feature References Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb for Direct Do Not Disturb DND Override Dialling In Call Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Do Not Disturb DND 3 54 Features 3 Features D Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call Description Conditions Allows the pre assigned extension user to reject to answer the direct dialling in call on Class of Service basis The rejected call will be transferred to an operator The operator cannot reject the direct dialling in call This feature is one of the ISDN services e Setting this feature cancels Call Forwarding or DND e If the destination extension has DND activated then the DSS button corresponding to it will light up red This indicates to the proprietary telephone or DSS console user that the destination extension is unavailable Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Do not disturb for DDI 514 Do Not Disturb for Direct Dialling In Call Section 3 Features Direct Dialling In DDI DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Do Not Disturb For Direct Dialling In Call Do Not Disturb DND Override Description Conditions Permits the pre assigned extension user to call another user who sets the Do Not Disturb feature Dialling 2 enables the caller to override the DND programmed on t
509. uttons of the KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 and KX T7436 while in programming mode KX T7431 is the same as KX T7433 except for the Soft and SHIFT buttons r N Tai N KX T7230 KX T7235 eS cS co PROGRAM Soft 1 Soft 2 _Soft 3 SHIFT co co PROGRAM SHIFT co e Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 a O O 1a JO O J Ss ce cS a n Ja O JO Ja J I eaaa 0a oO ao a Ja ja 1a JO O J i e e e a a a oa oO a oo SECRET PAUSE CLEAR SECRET PAUSE CLEAR pp i iE CO oOo i Ei oa 0 oo i 1 Cala Cal VOLUME VOLUME 4 5 6 Ly all 5 6 Ly nE STORE ts STORE 7 3 9 aj 9 SELECT SELECT o o 0 E PREV RECALL END NEXT PREV RECALL END NEXT aS a SY VJ E Cc co co cc co co KX T7433 KX T7436 cS ent gaat gaat SHIFT Soft 1 _Soft 2_ Soft 3 SHIFT D D D a a d a SECRET s PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR SECRET lt PROGRAM PAUSE CLEAR a a D per STORE ii Der STORE 1 2 3 1 2 3 FLASH SELECT TH KE CA FLASH SELECT 5 ah g i E ee H C9
510. vel for System Speed Dialling Day Night Section 3 Features System Speed Dialling Toll Restriction DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Toll Restriction Override Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialling Features 3 147 T 3 Features Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Description Conditions Connection References A tone signal is sent from the external pager when an incoming outside call is received Any extension user can answer the call e Connect a user supplied external paging device e Two external pagers can be installed per system System Connection permits four pagers maximum These pagers are numbered from 1 through 4 To answer an incoming call dial the feature number and 1 to 4 The feature number is the same as that used to answer Paging External e Floating numbers of pagers are programmable e TAFAS can be used in the following cases a The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the DIL 1 1 destination In this case all the incoming calls on the specified line will be signalled b The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination In this case incoming calls redirected to the destination will be signalled c The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the Direct Dialling In destination e Confirmation tone is sent to the user before being connected to the caller Eliminating the tone
511. vice between primary and secondary and count and print out the telephone charge and the other charges such as mini bar Conditions e It is required to enable the hotel application by system programming e When the check in is assigned the Class of Service is set to the primary one and the charge counter will be cleared When the check out is assigned the Class of Service is set to secondary one and the total telephone charge and the other charge will be displayed and printed out The telephone charge can be added the surcharge according to the pre assigned margin rate The pre assigned tax rate can be also added If the operator uses the paired DSS console the operator can refer the check in status on DSS console It is possible to give a header to the printed bill such as hotel s name or greeting or to assign the starting location of output data with a personal computer It is possible to limit the telephone usage on a pre assigned amount by system programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 010 Budget Management 011 Charge Margin and Tax Rate 123 Hotel Application 990 System Additional Information Field 33 Feature References Section 4 Features Budget Management Charge Fee Reference Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Hotel Application 3 72 Features 3 Features A Room Management Description Conditions Allows the extension user to print out the info
512. voice announcement using external paging devices external pagers Up to two pagers can be contained per system It is possible to select one or two pagers to perform your paging Any telephone user can answer your Paging External Conditions e Previous connection of an external pager is required Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 109 Connection References 3 Features e External pagers can be used for TAFAS Paging External or Background Music BGM External in this order For example if Paging External is overridden by TAFAS reorder tone is returned to the performer of the Paging External If BGM is overridden by another higher priority it is interrupted and starts again when the higher priority is finished e If System Connection is established up to four pagers are available e The confirmation tone is sent to the extensions and external pager when the paging is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable e The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers before the voice announcement Eliminating the tone is programmable Section 2 Installation 2 3 5 External Pager Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Paging Group Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external Paging external answer TAFAS answer Paging deny 805 External Pager Confir
513. west CO number e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup CO line 990 System Additional Information Field 16 None DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features Call Pickup CO Line Features 3 29 C 3 Features Call Pickup Directed Description Allows any extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension Conditions e Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer doorphone calls e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable e You can pick up a call by pressing a flashing DSS button assigned on a proprietary telephone Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup directed 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT and ISDN Telephone Features User Manual Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Group Description Allows the extension user to answer a call that is ringing at another telephone if the call is ringing within the user s extension group Conditions e The user can pick up an incoming outside intercom or doorphone call e The priority of Group Call Pickup is as f
514. wo ISDN SO lines System Inter Connection Card 8 CO Line Card 4 ISDN S0 Line Card for KX TD1232 System Inter Connection Card Connector CO Line Expansion Card Connector Front Cover is Open SYSTEM INTER CONNECTION e E Pees se 8CO ISDN Install System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 This card connects two DSHSs together Install 8 CO Line Card KX TD181 Adds eight CO lines or Install 4 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD281 Adds four ISDN SO lines Installation 2 27 2 4 2 CO Line Connection Optional Card Card Installation for KX TD816 To connect CO 1 through CO 4 install the optional 4 CO Line Card KX TD182 To connect two ISDN SO lines CO 1 through CO 4 install the optional 2 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD282 1 Insert the upper end of the 4 CO Line Card or 2 ISDN SO Line Card into the two hooks on the main unit 2 Press the two corners at the lower end of the Card 3 Fix the card with an accessory screw at the lower right corner 4 Connect the cord to the connector 2 ISDN SO Line Card 4 CO Line Card M isin i Y lh w 4 pin Connector X2 4 pin Connector x1 2
515. x Pulse to Tone Conversion x Account Code Delimiter 99 When the set is on hook Time display date display switching x Day night mode display None Operation References Not applicable e Flexible feature numbers can only be dialled during dial tone e The following are examples of feature number conflicts Examples 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 101 32 and 321 etc e Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by 0 3 66 Features 3 Features F Floating Station Description You can assign virtual extension numbers for resources to make them appear to be extensions These numbers are defined as floating numbers FN The following resources can have floating numbers 1 External paging instruments used for TAFAS feature For KX TD816 two FNs are available For KX TD1232 four FNs are available These FNs can be assigned as a DIL 1 1 destination b Intercept Routing destination 2 Modem used for system administration One FN is available This can be assigned as a DIL 1 1 destination b and also can be used as an extension number to call the modem 3 Hunting group used for Station Hunting feature 32 FNs are available These FNs can be assigned as a DIL 1 1 destination b
516. x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Authorization code 20 digits max All programs Not stored 1 Enter a program address 7X24 Display example Authorize Code Cl 2 Press NEXT Display example CO Line NO gt 3 Enter CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter an authorization code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new code 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 8 CO lines for KX TD816 and 24 CO lines for KX TD1232 each of which can be given an authorization code e Each authorization code has a maximum of 20 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e To assign one authorization code to all CO lines press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Cool e If the authorization code is already stored Already Set is displayed at step 3 e To display parts of the commands which have scrolled off the display press m or lt m Section 3 Features Least Cost Routing LCR 4 156 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout Description Used to determine which calls will produce an SMDR printout Selection e Out
517. xible CO Digital monitor 6 Flexible CO 1 line display speakerphone 12 Flexible CO 12 PF Speakerphone 12 Flexible CO 4 PF Monitor 12 Flexible CO 4 PF Flexible CO Flexible CO button programmable PF Programmable Feature button System Outline 1 5 14 Options 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 Each unit adds eight extensions One expansion unit for KX TD816 and up to two expansion units for KX TD1232 can be installed per system D1232 Ht y 8 or 16 extensions s extensions can can be added be added 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 One of the following units can be installed per system KX TD180 Adds four CO lines KX TD280 Adds two ISDN SO lines e L4 CO lines 4 DID lines L 4 CO lines 4 DID lines 2 ISDN SO lines can be added 2 ISDN SO lines can be added 1 6 System Outline 14 Options 8 CO Line Card KX TD181 4 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD281 One of the following cards can be installed for KX TD1232 KX TD181 Adds eight CO lines K
518. xtension Assignment Day Night 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment 008 Absent MESSAGES 5 3ic oi cid e a E E ER S 009 Quick Dial Number Set cccccccesccccceccceesesssseceeeseceeeesensaaees 010 Budget Management 5 cccdsisvssissscccsarcsocasas soseceavaccsensedsecsaavecsens 011 Charge Margin and Tax Rate cee eeescecesceeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeenaees 012 ISDN Extension Number Set ccccccesessssssessssssssssseesereees 013 ISDN Extension Name Set ccccccescccccccccessessssceeececeeeesersnaees 014 Budget Management on ISDN Pott 0 ee ceeeeeeeeeneeeeneeees 015 Charge Rate Fractional Point Assignment eecceeeseeeeeeeee O16 Charge Rate ASsiOmMentt s oisscucccsscssesss caeenccciisatees staseacsessnncedeaes 14 Available for KX TD1232 only Installation Manual Contents 4 3 System ProgrammMing ccsscccssssscsssscsssscccsssccsssscssesscssseccsseessees 4 36 100 Flexible Numbering nosoden va tch ge sda veclg siete gbaiancen 4 36 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode 00 eee eeeeeeeeeereeeneeee 4 39 102 Day Night Service Starting Time eee eeeeeeeeeeeeereeeneeens 4 40 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment eeee 4 42 0 104 Quick Dial Assignment i 5s cacccsesisaceasdenerettel soscatasaucegaleaceaceanes 4 42 1 105 Account Code S e n a a A R E EN 4 43 106 Station Hunting Type scs ccsscesscchesisesdoue jovaeded
519. y press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 and keys RECALL or FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons To store the register recall signal press RECALL or FLASH Note The stored recall will be in effect only during an established call Refer to Section 3 External Feature Access To store a hyphen press the button System Programming 4 17 001 4 2 Manager Programming System Speed Dialling Number Set conta Feature References To store a pause press PAUSE Refer to Section 3 Pause Insertion Automatic To store the feature number to convert pulse signals to DTMF signals press the keys Refer to Section 3 Pulse to Tone Conversion To prevent the display of all or part of the number press SECRET before and after confidential parts of the number The SECRET button must always be entered in a pair Or your entry is not stored Refer to Section 3 Secret Dialling If you are storing an external number include the line access code default 9 81 through 88 before the number When dialling a pause
520. your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and the new selection To program another field repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE To program another area press SELECT and the desired area code Repeat steps 4 through 8 Press END Feature References See References on pages 4 169 through 4 174 System Programming 4 175 991 4 11 Option Programming COS Additional Information Description 1 Sets the number of digits allowed to dial out during an analogue outside call on a Class of Service COS basis If an outside party hangs up and the extension user tries to dial out still on the CO line the system will disconnects the line at the time the assigned number of digits are dialled This program can be added if CPC Signal Detection is not provided by the CO The Field 1 shown below is used to enter your selection 2 Enables or disables the Call Forwarding Follow Me feature on a COS basis The Field 2 below is used to enter your selection Display Sine 1111111111110000 Field number unused 2 1 Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Field number 1 or 2 e Selection for field 1 0000 no limit 0001 1 digit 0010 2 digits 0011 3 digits 0100 4 digits 0101 5 digits 0110 6 digits 0111 7 digits 1000 8 digits 1001 9 digits 1010 10 digits 1011 11 digits 1100 12 digits 1101 13 digits 1110 14 digits 1111 15 digi
521. ystem Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Terminate Button None DPT Features Terminate Time Out Variable Description Provides timers to control various features or functions The following timers are programmable System Timer Items Range Automatic Redial Interval Time nx10s n 3 120 Automatic Redial Repeated Times 1 12 times Features 3 139 3 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Out CO Dial Starting Time Extension to CO Call Duration Time Hold Recall Time Intercept Routing Time Out Message Waiting Ring Interval Time Pickup Dialling Waiting Time Ring Off Detection Time SMDR Duration Count Starting Time Toll Restriction First Digit Time Out Toll Restriction Inter digit Time Out Transfer Recall Time CO Line Group Timer Items Disconnect Time Register Recall Signal Time Pause Time CO Line Timer Items CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming DTMF Digit Time Extension Timer Items Delayed Ringing Count Voice Mail Integration Timer Items DTMF Signal Duration DTMF Signal Waiting Time after VPS Answer DTMF Signal Waiting Time after VPS calls Extension Programming References Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time 201 Transfer Recall Time 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 203 Intercept Time 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time Features 1 1
522. ystem so that this assignment is effective Section 3 Features ISDN Extension 4 110 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 426 ISDN TEI Mode Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI mode on ISDN port basis e Port number KX TD816 01 through 04 x all ports KX TD1232 01 through 12 x all ports Fix 0 through 63 Automatic All ports Fix 0 1 Enter 426 Display TEI Assign Press NEXT Display Port NO gt Enter a port number To enter a Port 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Fix 0 Enter TEL To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number To assign Automatic press CLEAR Press STORE To program another port press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired port number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Port numbers 01 through 06 are for the Master System and 07 through 12 are for the Slave if available If the Point is selected in program 424 assign the fixed TEI If Multipoint is selected assign Automatic To assign all ports to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Port 01 After this assignment you should reset the system so that this assignment is effective Section 3 Features ISDN Extension System Programming 4 1
523. zl g I is z z KI OPER PREV PREV System Programming 4 5 4 1 1 Using Proprietary Telephones Viewing the Display The display gives you helpful information such as what you should do now what you have done etc The KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7433 and the KX T7436 utilize two information lines for programming The upper line is called the Message Line and the lower one is called the Function Line The Message Line upper shows you what you should do or what you should select It also allows you to confirm what you have just entered The display capacity is 16 digits If your entry exceeds the capacity you can shift the display by pressing gt or lt button The Function Line lower shows the current function of the soft buttons These functions change with the programming procedures SYS PGM NO gt lt Message Line CLR NEXT lt Function Line KX T7230 Display SYS PGM NO gt lt Message Line SYS BCMINGO D lt Message Line CLR E lt Function Line CLR NEXT lt Function Line KX T7235 KX T7436 Display KX T7433 Display Before entering the programming mode Before entering programming mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook e No calls are on hold at your telephone Entering the programming mode Press PROGRAM or PAUSE and enter your System Password default 123

Digital Super Hybrid System

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents